RAS Multibend 9000 Folding Machine Safety & Operation Instructions

lc-;-t t € v
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
SAFETY AND OPERATION
INSTRUCTIONS
'.\ '1 .
I
i
i).
FOLDING MACHINE
RAS 74.20-25-30-40
MULTIBEND 9OOO
3/93
US-execution
7032 SINDELfINEEN TEL. 0703 I -6 I 8-0 REINHARDT

POSTFACH 369 TELEFM 7073r-618-185 MASCHINENBAU
RICI.IARD-WAGNER.STR. 4- I O TEIETEK 703 I 108 rqs G M BH
OPERATING MANUAL
SAFETY AND OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
for
***MULTIBEND 9000***
RAS 7 4.20-7 4,25-7 4.30-7 4.40
,t
09.93
US-execution
IRASI
\/
CONTENTS
I
1 TECHNICAL DATA 1-1

I
1.1
l
RATINGS 1-1 I
1.2 SUITABLEAPPLICATIONS 1€ I
2 SAFETY 2-1
2.1 OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW SYMBOL 2-1
2.2 CAUTION SYMBOL 2-1
2.3 GENERAL HMARDS IF SAFEry DIRECTIVES

ARE NOT OBSERVED 2-2
2.4 SAFETY.CONSCIOUS OPERATION 2-3
2.5 OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW DIRECTIVES 24
3 RECEIVING INSPECTION, TRANSPORT,

CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISIONING 3-1
3.1 RECEIVING INSPECTION 3-'t
3.2 TRANSPORT 3-2
3.3 CLEANING THE MACHINE 3€

3.4 INSTALLING THE MACHINE 3.4
3.5 FITTING THE REAR PLATE STOP 3-15
Februar 22, 1994 l-1 RAS 74.20-40

ntl ll TlEtEi,tt1 annn
CONTENTS
RAS
4. MAINTENANCE 4-1
4-2
4.1 NOTES
/t€
4.2 LUBRICATION
4.g CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL, CHANGTNG THE OIL,

REPLACING THE FILTER H
4.g.1 CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL, CHANGING THE OIL 44
4.3.2 CHANGING THE FILTER 4-6
4.4 REPLACING THE FILTER MAT +7
4.5 SERVOMOTOR +7
4.6 GENERAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION 4€
5. ELECTRICALEQUIPMENT 5-l
5-1
5.1 SAFETY DIRECTIVES
5.2 MAINS CONNECTION

ffi
5.3 FOOTSWITCH
5€
5.3.1 FUNCTION OF THE FOOT SWITCH 5-7
5-9
5.4 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
t.
RAS 74.20.40 l-2 S€ptemb€r 7, 1993

IEA$J
\/
6 WORKING WITH THE MACHINE "6-1
6.1 OCCUPATIONALSAFETYDIRECTIVES s1
6.2 WORKING DIRECTIVES 6€
6.2.1 FOLDING MATERIALS.OFDIFFFRENTI.ENGTHS 64
6.2.2 AUTOMATIC FOLDING SEQUENCE 6-5
6.2.3 ADJUSTIN.IG TI..IE SAFETf DEVICE $-OR MAX. BENDiNG ANGLE 6-6
6.2.4 BEND]NG CHEEK SETTING 6-8
6.2.5 LOWER CHEEK SETTING 6-10
6.2.6 SETTING VALUES FORTHE LOWER CHEEK

AND BENDING CHEEK 6-11
6.2,7 ADJUSTING PROGRAMMABLE LOWER CHEEK 6-13

AND BENDING CHEEK
6.2.8 IMPRESSIONBENDING 6-14

I
6.2.9 REPLACING THE RAIL 6-1 5 I
6.2.10 CORRECTING THE STOP DIMENSIONS 6-20
6.2.11 PARALLEL POSITION OFTHE STOP 6-21
7 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 7-1

7.1 TWGPERSON OPERATION USING FOOT SWITCH 7-1
7.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL SYSTEM wlTH AUTOMATIC CLAMPING 74
7.2,1 GENERAL 74
7.2.2 FITTING AND REMOVING THE TOOLS 7-5
7.2.3 SCALE AT UPPER BEAM 7-8
'CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9OOO-
-Refer to the separate rnanual-
Aplil 26, 1994 l-3 RAS 74.2G40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
ANNEXES
ANNEXES
CRANE SUSPENSION WITHOUT REAR STOP
CRANE SUSPENSION WITH REAR STOP
CRANE SUSPENSION - STOP (2 sheets)
FOUNDATION PLAN
INSTALLATION PLAN
LUBRICATI NG I NSTRUCTIONS
LEGEND OF SYMBOLS FOR THE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
LUBRICANT CHART
EXAMPLE OF BENDING SETTINGS
DRAWING . SWITCHGEAR CABINET RAS 74.20.40
PERFORMANCE CHARTS
HYDRAULIC PLAN
PNEUMATIC PLAN WITH LIST OF EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONDITIONERS
LEGEND OF SYMBOLS FOR RATING PLATES
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SIEMENS SERVOMOTOR
SEPARATE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE

"C NC-COLOU RG RAP H IC.CONTROLLER M U LTI BEN D 9OOO" "
OPERATING INSTRUCTION FOR UNITEK ANALOGUE

REGULATION ELECTRONICS FOR MOTOR CONTROL UNITS
RAS 74.20-40 l-4 SeptgmberT, 1993

Itr il TrErtrNn onnn
INASI
"V
TECHNICAL DATA
1. TECHNICAL DATA
1.1. RATINGS
"f4.25
I
RAS v4_20 7t1.30 74.40 I

I
inches
l
Usefullength 80.3" 1 00" 126" 159.9"
Max. sheet thickness for -

1
58000 lb/in2 refened to the inches 0.197" 0.177. 0.159" 0.1 19"
standard 45o upper cheek rail
i
and the 1.18" wide bending rail. I
Max. permitted sheet thicknesb

may be reduced for special rails
Min. permitted bending radius 1.25 x sheet thickn
Min. permitled inner shoulder

height inches approx. 6 x sheet thiskngss
Max. opening width of the upper inches 15.75"

-
cheek referred to the standard
45"upper cheek rail
Regulating range of the bending inches 3.1str _

and lower cheeks, bending angle degrees 0-180
Max. bending speed degrees/s. 74_
Max. uppercheekspeed
- DOWN inches/s. 1.57il _
.UP inches/s. 3.62il _
For blanks with a higher tensile strength than 59000 lbsfin2, the
ATTENTION! max. admissibile sheet thickness will be reduced, correspond-
ing to the attached capacity diagranns.
September 7, 19!13 1-l RAS 74.2G40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
TECHNICAL DATA RAS
Connected ioad aPProx. KW
Dimensions refer to the foundation Plan

-
Net weight lbs 9700
-11 10600 11700 13900
without stoP (kg) (4400) (4800) (5300) (6300)
Net weight lbs 10270 11195 123r',0

with sioP (kg) (4660) (5070) (55e0)
lbs 145r''O
For stop width
(kg) (65s0)
118.1"
lbs 15040
For stop width
(kg) (6820)
157.s',
STOP
Stopdepth inches 0.4" - 61 "
Regulating sPeed inches/s. 7.87"
Required compressed air supply lbs/in2 87
lbs 570 595 MO

Net weight
(kg) (260) (270) (2e0)
lbs 640
For stop width
(kg) (2eo)
1 18.1"
lbs 1140
For stop width
(kg) (520)
157.5"
STANDARD ACCESSORIES:
Angle rail degrees 45
Bending railwidth inches 1.18"
RAS 74.20-40 1-2 S€ptemberT,1993
MULTIBEND 9OOO
EGHNICAL DATA
IHAUI I
V
1.2. SUITABLE APPLICATIONS
The folding machine has been designed exclusively for the standard application of folding
sheet-metalparts made of steel or nonferrous metals.
The perforrnance chart for the respective type of miachine must be used to determine the rnax.
permitted sheet lhickness (refer to the Annex to this operating manual).
Any other application is regarded as being unsuitable. The nrranufacturer cannot accept liability
for any darnage resulting thereof - this is at the use/s ourn risk.
Suitable application also includes observance of the operating, maintenance and repair conditi-
ons prescribed by the manufacturer.
The folding machine nny only be used, serviced or repaired by personnel who are familiar with
it and who have been informed of the associated dangers.
The relevant accident prevention regulations and other generally acknowledged safety regulati-
ons must be observed.
The manufacturer cannot accept liability for any damage resulling from unauthorized modificati-
ons to the machine.
S€ptEmb€r 7, 1993 1-3 RAS 74.2G40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
TECHNICAL DATA
Notes:
RAS 74.20-40 1-4 September 7, 19!r3

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
IBASI
\f
2. SAFETY
2.1. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY SYMBOL I
You will find this symbol alongside all important occupational I
safety directives in this operating manual (OM), which con-

stitute a danger to life and limb. Observe these directives and I
be particularly careful in such situations. Pass on all occu-
I
o
pational safety directives to other users. The general safety
and accident prevention regulations valid in your country
must also be observed, as well as the directives contained in
I
this OM.
1
l
I
2.2. CAUTION SYMBOL
This "CAUTION" can be found in those sections of this OM

ATTENTION! which require particular attention to ensure that the guide-
lines, regulations, directives and proper working sequenae
are observed, and to prevent damage or destruction of the
machine and/or other components.
SeptemberT, l9{13 2-1 RAS 74.2G40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
2.3. GENERAL HAZARDS IF SAFETY DIRECTIVESARE NOT

OBSERVED
The rnachine has been built according to the state of the art and is safe to operate. ln spite of
this, the machine may prove to be dangerous if incompetently operated by untrained personnel
or used for unsuitable applications.
Such actions may incur
Danger to life and limb of the user or a third party
ATTENTION! lmpairment of the machine and other property belonging to the user
ATTENTION! Danger to efficient machine operation
Everybody involved in the installation, commissioning,

operation, maintenance and repair of this machine on the
user's premises must have read and understood this operat-
ing manual and, in particular, Chapter 2 "SAFEW". We rec-
ommend that the using company draws up internal
instructions, taking the known specialist qualifications of the
members of staff involved into consideration, and to require
written confirmation of receipt of the instructions - operating
manual and/or participation in familiarization - training.
This item also applies to the separate operating manual "CNC

CONTROL MULTIBEND 9000" for RAS 74.20-40, enclosed
with these instructions.
RAS 74.20-40 2-2 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
R A s
2.4. SAFETY.CONSCIOUS OPERATION
The machine may only be operated by qualified, authorized operators, who have been
- trained by their superiors.
The areas of responsibility for machine operation must be clearly defined and maintained
- to ensure that there are no conflicts of authority as far as safety aspects are concerned.
This applies, in particular, to work on electric, hydraulic and pneunnlic equipment, which
may only be canied out by qualitied specialisls.
The machine must always be disconnected from the mains

prior to commencing installation, commissioning, operation,
conversion, adaptation, maintenance and repair work. For
this, the main switch on the switchgear cabinet must be
turned off (position 0) and secured with a padlock. The mem-
ber of staff responsible for the work must take possession of
the key.
The main switch must be turned otf and secured with a

padlock prior to working inside the switchgear cabinet.
Furthermore, the main electric supply line from the mains to
the switchgear cabinet must be disconnected. Care must be
taken to ensurethatthe main supply line cannot be connected
during work. Before starting work, the responsible member
of staff must satisty himself that the supply line really is dead
by means of a measuring instrument.
SeptamberT,1993 2-3 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
2.5. OCCUPATTONAL SAFETY DIRECTIVES
1. Any method of working which detrimentally affects safety on the machine must be prohibited
(refer to the following items).
2. The machine may only be operated by qualified, authorized

personnel who have read and understood this operating
manual.
J. The operator may only activate and operate the machine after
he has been suitably trained and has read and understood
the operating manual.
4. The operator shares the responsibility of ensuring that no unauthorized personnel work on the
machine.
5. The operator is obliged to check the machine for obvious damage and faults at least once
during a shift and to report any changes to the machine - which affect safety - to his superior
immediately.
6. The user shall undertake to always operate the machine in imnnculale condition only
7 Electrical hazards - misuse or incorrect installation work on

the machine can lead to an electric shock, damage or death.
lnstatlation work must comply with the "National Electric
Code" (Article 250 - grounding etc.).
8. Work may only be carried out on the electrical installation of

the machine by an authorized electrician. Before connecting
the machine, check that the operating voltage and
9. No safety devices may be removed or disabled.
The upper cheek, bending cheek and rear stop may constitute
a danger to life and limb.
RAS 74.20-40 2-4 S€ptomber 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
IHASI
\f
10 The machine must always be at a standstill before commenc-
ing any maintenance or repair work.
The machine must always be disconnected from the mains

before commencing repair or maintenance work. For this, the
main switch on the switchgear cabinet must be turned off
(position 0) and secured with a padlock. The member of staff
responsible for this work must take possession of the key to
this padlock.
The electrical supply line from the mains to the switchgear

cabinet must also be disabled before starting work inside the
switchgear cabinet, Care must be taken to ensure that the
main supply line cannot be activated during work. The re-
sponsible member of staff must satisfy himself, with a meas-
uring instrument, that the supply line is really dead prior to
starting work.
Furthermore, additional measures, such as preventing

access to unauthorized personnel, are absolutely necessary.
11 lf it is necessary to remove any protective devices for repair

or maintenance work, these may only be removed while the
machine is switched otf (refer to 10.). These protective dev-
ices must be replaced immediately after repairwork has been
completed.
12 The machine may only be reconnected to the mains when all

protective devices have been installed and activated.
13. The switchgear cabinet may only be opened when the main
switch has been turned off (position 0).
14 Once electrical installation or repair work has been carried

out, the fitted protective devices must be tested by an
authorized electrician (e.9. grounding resistance).
15. Adjustment or setting work may only be carried out on the

machine when it is switched off - main switch on the switch-
gear cabinet to the 0 position (refer to 10.).
16 Any unauthorized conversion or modification work on the

machine is prohibited in the interest of safety.
September 7, 1993 2-5 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
17 Wooden blocks must be fitted under the swung up bending

cheek to prevent it sinking during service or repair work.
Proceed as follow for this:
ln ,,SERVICE MODE", swing the bending cheek upwards by approx. 92o (refer to the separate
"cNc-colouRGRAPHtc-eOrurnou-ER MULTIBEND 9000" instruc'tions for RAS 74.20-40).
Once the bending cheek has been swung up by approx. 92o, two wooden blocks must be placed
under the bending cheek - in accordance with the picture below. These wooden blocks must have
a cross-section of at least 2.5 inches x 3 inches and should be approx. 33.5 inches long.
Wooden blocks on the left

and right-hand sides of the
bending cheek.
0 )l
i/
it
t,l
RAS 74.20-40 2-6 Septembel 7, 1 993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFEry
IBASI
V
The folding machine must be disconnected from the electric system under all circumstances once
the wooden blocks have been installed. The bending cheek then swings slowly downwards -
lowered by its own weight. Once the bending cheek is resting firmly on the wooden blocks, the
rnain switch on the switchgear cabinet must be turned off.
The main switch must be secured with a padlock to prevent

inadvertent activation. The member of staff responsible for
the work must take possession of the key.
The bending cheek must never be lowered mechanically as

this may possibly cause the entire folding machine to topple
over.
Once work has been completed, the wooden blocks under the bending cheek must be removed
again before the folding machine is reconnected to the electric system.
For this, apply a hammer to the wooden blocks, approx.

4 inches above the floor of the hall and drive them out (refer to the figure below).
-]
0
(D
Septomber 7, 1993 2-7 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
The bending cheek will tip down by approx. 2 inches when

the wooden blocks are driven out,
The folding machine may only be switched on at the switch-

gear cabinet once the wooden blocks have been removed
18 lf it is necessary to raise the upper cheek to replace rails or

for repair work, this must be secured with two hardwood
blocks (refer to the figure below - minimum cross-section 3
inches x 3 inches).
Wooden blocks on the left

and
right-hand side
RAS 74.20-40 2-8 SeptemberT,1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
sAt-ts,I
IffASI
"V
Y
19. The operator must ensure that it is not possible to start the
machine by accident. Always turn the main switch off, secul€
with a padlock and take possession of the key.
20 The operator must onsure that hands and fingers are kept
away from the danger zone of the upper cheek and the rails
while the machine is running.
21 The operator must ensure that he is out of the danger area of

the swinging bending cheek before stading the bending
cheek.
CAUTION!
The bending cheek swings forwards by approx. 32 inches.
22. The operator must ensure that hands and fingers are out of
the danger zone when the rear stop is in motion. Hands and
fingers must be kept away from the area under the upper
cheek as the blades of the rear stop move forwards into the
gaps in the lower cheek. Risk of injury to hand and fingers.
23. The operator must never leave the machine if it has not baen
disconnected from the electric system,
The main switch on the switchgear cabinet must be turned

off (position 0) and secured with a padlock. Furthermore, the
operator must take possession of the padlock key.
24. The machine must not be used when it is due for servicing.
ATTENTION!
25. The operator must look out for any accidental hazards which
may occur.
26. The user must ensure that the working area at and around the
ATTENTION! machine is kept clean and tidy by means of appropriate
instructions and checks.
September 7, 1993 2-9 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
27 Wherever necessary, the user must ensure thatthe operating

ATTENTION! personnel wear protective clothing -e.g. gloves, safetyshoes
etc.
28. Machines with only one foot switch may only be operated by
one person.
Machines with two foot switches may only be operated by 2

members of staff after the "2-person operation " safety control
system has been switched on. There must be a foot switch
for each operator (refer to Section 7.1 "2-PERSON OPERA-
TtoN uslNc FooT swtTcl{Es").
DO The machine may only be lifted for transportation at the

appropriate points - in accordance with the enclosed draw-
ings - "CRANE SUSPENSION - MACHINE WITHOUT REAR
STOP'" "CRANE SUSPENSION - MACHINE WITH REAR
STOP" and "CRANE SUSPENSION - STOP". Safety aspects
do not allow the machine to be lifted and transported at any
other point.
The lifting ropes used must have an adequate lifting capacity

and must be safe for such applications (machine weight, refer
to Section 1.1 "RATINGS").
30. Once the machine has been installed, aligned and secured,
ATTENTION! the transpod suspension hooks must be removed under all
circumstances prior to commissioning. The hooks and
fastening screws should be kept safely as they may be re-
quired if the machine is moved or relocated.
The plugs, supplied with the machine, must be pressed into

the threaded holes for the suspension hooks in the uPper
cheek.
31 Warning and instruction notices on the machine must be read

ATTENTION! and understood before installation, connection to the electric
system and commissionin g.
JZ The machine must not be connected to the electric system or

operated until the separate operating manual "CNC-
COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9000 for RAS
74.2040", supplied with the machine, has been read and
understood.
RAS 74.20-40 2-1A S€ptemb€r 7, 19!r3

MULTIBEND 9OOO
lnAsl SAFETY
Y
33. The machine must not be connected to the electric system
ATTENTION! before the enclosed safety information from the "SIEMENS'
company has been read and understood.
34. Warning and instruction notices on the machine must not be

ATTENTION! removed or covered.
35 Any notices, fitted to the machine, which are damaged and

ATTENTION! illegible, must be replaced.
.\
Notes:
SeptemberT,1993 2-11 RAS 74.20.40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
SAFETY
Notes:
RAS 74.20-40 2-12 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
nEtvEI Y llllrl. IIllJFET/ | I\,rlli I nAII\)f Lrn I r
IRASI CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
\/
3. RECEIVING INSPECTION,TRANSPORT,
CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND
COMMISSIONING
3.1. RECEIVING INSPECTION
The machine must be checked for completeness and any shipping damage immediately on
arrival.
Any losses and/or shipping damage must be recorded in detail and confirmed as a factual report
by the freight forwardeis signature, to ensure that the complaint is handled properly.
This factual report willthen serve as a submission for insurance against damage or loss in transit.
Furthermore, should you have cause for complaint, please make contact wilh your dealer:
I
LF.T., lnc. I
L
1606 Barclay Boulevard i
Buffalo Grove, i
lllinois 60089
USA
Telephone: 708 - 465 - 1070
Read the operating manual, Section 3.2 "TRANSPORT"

ATTENTION! before unpacking the machine.
Februar11,1994 3-1 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTTON. TRANS PORT.
CLEANING,,INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3.2. TRANSPORT
Special care must be taken when transporting the machine in order to prevent danger to life and
limb, as well as damage caused by undue force or careless loading and unloading.
Any damage caused by the condensation of water, dampness or impacts must be prevented
during transportation.
The machine may only be lifted at the appropriate points in

accordance with the enclosed drawings - "CRANE SUSPEN'
SION . MACHTNE WITHOUT REAR STOP'" "CRANE SUSPEN-
SION. MACHINE WITH REAR STOP", "CRANE SUSPENSION
- STOP" - for transpoftation. Safety aspects do not allow the
machine to be lifted or transported by any other point.
The information contained in Chapter 3.5 "FITTING THE

I
REAR PLATE STOP" must be obserued with respect to
"CRANE SUSPENSION - STOP".
I
t'
The carrying capacity of the means of transportation must be
I
I
adequately dimensioned with an appropriate safety
allowance. Refer to Section 1.1 "RATINGS" for the machine's
weight.
ATTENTION! Oil may leak out of the tank if the machine is subjected to
excesses rocking motion or tilting.
RAS 74.20-40 3-2 Februar 11,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
nLr/Llvlll\.1. lllr>rE\z I ltJlY. I ftAl\Dfuh l.
INASI
v CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
3.3. CLEANING THE MACHINE
ln spite of all precautionary measures taken while preparing the folding machine for dispatch, dirt
or foreign bodies Inay accumulate on the machine in transit and may cause considerable damage
if the machine is not cleaned carefully.
ATTENTION! It is essential that this is checked carefully and that any

accumulated diil or foreign material is thoroughly removed.
The dirt must not be removed with compressed air as this

may cause the dirt to be transpofted into undesirable areas
such as bearings, guides, spindles, etc.
The machine has been thoroughly coated with preservative in the factory and it is therefore
necessary to remove the rust-proofing compound.
Use kerosene, white spirit or a standard solvent to remove the rust-proofing compound (preserv-
ative).
Caution - all of these agents are highly inflammable - fire and

explosion hazard.
Paint thinners may not be used under any circumstances as

ATTENTION! these may attack the paint finish.
The machine must be cleaned thoroughly before it is connecled to the electric system and put
into operation.
The machine must not be connected to the electric system

while cleaning off the transport dirt and rust-proofing
compound.

off (position 0) and secured with a padlock. The member of
staff responsible for this work must take possession of the
padlock key.
Februar 11,1994 3-3 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
NG. INSPECTION, TRANSPP.B-T, - -.
RE CEIVI
i i EAi"i i{ d'
I iu's-r[t-LATI o t t A N D c o lvt M I s s o
I N IN G RAS
3.4. INSTALLING THE MACHINE
ATT toN! The machine must be directly anchored to the concrete floor'
The concrete floor must be adequately dimensioned to

ensure that the machine's weight is accommodated with an
adequate degree of safety (refer to Section 1.1 "RATINGS"
and ihe enctJsed foundation plan for the machine's weight)'
plan.
The folding machine must be installed in accordance with the enclosed foundation
in the concrete
Refer to the foundation plan for the recommended dimensions of the holes
- floor, accommodating tl-re fastening bolts to anchor the machine.
are not
The fastening bolfs to anchor the machine and the steel plates for its alignment
- included in our scope of delivery - these must be provided.by the client. lt is advisable to
obtain these fastening bolts and steel plates before the machine is installed.
The enclosed drawini "EXAMPLES Or rloon ATTACHMENT" shows various
acceptable
alternatives for the fastening bolts'
(refer to the enclosed
The fastening bolts should have a 5/8-1 1 thread with nuts and washers
- drawing'EXAMPLES OF FLOOR AfiACHMENT").
bolts. This
A quick-drying cement of sufficient stability must be used to seal in the fastening
- cement must be supplied by the client'
directed to:
Any questions related to the fitting and inslallation of the machine must be
-
l.F,T., lnc.
1606 BarclaY Boulevard
Buffalo Grove,
lllinois 60089
USA
TelePhone: 708 - 465 - 1070
At stop depths of 3050 mm and more, the extension frame is

TENTIO supported-by spring-cushioned legs in order to reduce the
weight.
lnstalling the machine pay attention to place the supporting

ATTENT leg to th6 right position under the extension frame, and to fix
I
it to the ground.
At lirst turn the adjusting screw upwards until reaching the

TTENTIO I
extension frame.
RAS 74.20-40 3-4 Miirz 2, 1994
MULTIBEND 9OOO
l-tEUElVlNl.r. lNbl-trU I lUN. I HANUI"UI'I l.
CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Then turn the adjusting screw fufther upwards by 1/4" in

ATTENTION! order to achieve the necessary supporting power of the
spring-cushioned leg.
ATTENTION! Secure the adjusting screw by fixing the counternut.

I
i
l
eXension o+.o oo.
l.
adjusting I
screw
counternut
suppofting
leg
The oil level in the tank must be checked (refer to Section

ATTENTION! 4.3.1 "OlL CHANGE").
The control panel with boom has been dismantled for trans-
portation.
The main electric supply line from the mains to the switchgear
cabinet may only be connected after the control panel with
boom has been fitted and after the loose electrical cables for
the control panel have been connected (refer to Section 5.2
"MAINS CONNECTION").
When working inside the switchgear cabinet, the main switch

must always be turned off and secured with a safety lock
before opening the switchgear cabinet. The member of staff
responsible for this work must take possession of the key to
the safety lock The main supply line from the mains to the
switchgear cabinet must always be deenergized. Care must
be taken to ensure that the main supply line cannot be
switched on during work. The responsible member of staff
must satisfy himself that the supply line really is dead with a
measuring instrument before starting work.
Any work on the etectrical installation of the machine may ,
only be carried out by an authorized electrician.

I
Once etectrical instaltation work has been completed, the

installed proiective devices must be tested by an airthorized
electrician (e.9. eafthing resistance).
Marz 2, 1994 3-5 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION, TRANSP-OB-T, - - -
CEEANT lvd' t itS-f [t-LATto N AN D co M Ml s s I o N I N G
FITTING THE CONTROL PANEL WITH BOOM

(Refer to the following figures)
Detail X
Boom with control Panel
Check screws in the boom for the

swivelangle of the control Panel
N
Stop screw on the switchgear cabinet

ffi
tr
Circlip inside the switchgear cabinet
q
o
6
RAS 74.20-40 3-6 Februar11,l994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECI ION. TRANSPORT.
RAS CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Figure for detail X

Boom
Stop screw in the switching

cabinet
Cheek screw in the boom
Switchgear cabinet
0
_t
To assemble, insert the guiding tube, welded onto the boom, into the top panel of the switchgear
cabinet and secure it in axial direction with the respective circlip inside the switchgear cabinet
(refer to the previous figure and "Detail X").
The boom must be fitted in such a way that the stop screw in
ATTENTION! the switchgear cabinet is located between the two check
screws on the boom. This arrangement is necessary for
safety reasons, to ensure that the control panel cannot be
pivoted into the danger zone of the swiveling bending cheek
(refer to the previous figure and "Detail X").
The loose electrical cables must be connecled in the switchgear cabinet according to their
designations (refer to the enclosed electrical installation diagrams). Make sure that the groun-
ding cable has been connected.
Februar11,19!r4 3-7 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. -c,' INSPECTION, TRANS PORT,
C t EAr'ir l r r it SJn-I-LATI d N A N D c o M M I s s I o N IN G
Attention!
I
a
- Observe absolutely! r
The folding beam is fixed in its initial position by a transport-safety screw, in order to avoid its
swivel movement during lhe transport.
Remove this screw prior to connect the machine electrically.
{rans or l-
SA v screu
( red pa inted )
{ron Is ide rear s ide

o{ lhe machine o { lhe mach ine
u
R
4
lrans or i-
5a e ly scr
( red pa in led )
RAS 74.20-40 3-8 Februar11,19{r4

MULTIBEND 9OOO
cLEANTNG,'-tlr-sTAtlltiitNIKiibdniNiiSsTorVtNii
Refer to Chapter 5.2 "MAINS CONNECTION" to connect the

ATTENTION! main electrical supply line from the mains to switchgear
cabinet.
Refer to "CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9000 for RAS 74.20-40" tor

machine operation and activation.

and not put into operation before the separate "CNC -
COLOU RGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9000 for RAS
74.2O-4O" manual has been read and understood.
Chapter 2 "SAFETY" must have been read and understood

before switching on.
Before aligning the machine, the upper cheek must be moved

upwards by approx. 12 inches. For this, it is necessary to
connect the folding machine to the electric system (refer to
Section 5.2 "MAlNS. CONNECTION").
Februar11,1994 3-9 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RE CEIVING. I NS PECTI QN, TBA-NSfP.BT,
CE i-r d' t iv 5r [u u ATI o N A N o c o wt M I s s I o N I N G
EA-i'ri tn-A sl
\/
to the
The upper cheek may only be moved upwards after the machine has been connected
and a'tter tne direction of rotation of the main drive motor (hydraulic drive) has
"i".tiil'ry"t"m (refer to Section 5.2 "MAINS CONNECTION"). Observe the safety directives in
been checked
Section 5.1.
Proceed as follows to raise the upper cheek.
Turn the main switch on the rear panel of the switchgear cabinet to oN
-
Check that CNC control is ready for operation.
- Ready for operation when:
in the control screen lights up and all other lamps are switched
Pushbutton
STOP off. At the same lime, both
l,/ must be displayed on the monitor, accompanied

softkeys rAr. tl
by instruction texts.
SERVICE
Turn on the keylock switch for lhe controller

-
tf
.l
select the special service mode by means of the function softkey
- SERVICE
Open the upper check by pressing the central foot switch pedal'
- The upper check continues to move upwards as long as the pedal is
pressed.
ATTE N!
RAS 74.20-40 3-10 Februar 11,19!r4
MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION. TRANSPORT,
Two wooden blocks, approx. 12 inches long, must be used to

prevent the upper cheek sinking (refer to ltem 2.5 "OCCUPA-
TIONAL SAFETY DIRECTIVES", Paragraph 18).
The machine must always be disconnected from the electric

system again once the upper cheek has been secured against
sinking.

statf responsible for this work must take possession of the
padlock key.
The machine is delivered without built-in tools in the case of

machines with automatic tool systems incorporating auto-
matic clamping.
The upper cheek is closed for transpod and rests on the two
support screws. These suppott screws must be removed. To
do this, open the upper cheek and move the hardwood
supports
support screws
uppen cheek tr3"
C\
lower cheek
hardwood supports
(approximately 3 inches x 3 inches x 12 inches long) to the

left and right in the position shown in the drawing so as to
secure the upper cheek against any lowering.
Februar 11,1994 3-11 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION. TRANS PORT.
CLEANING,,INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The support screws may only be removed when the machine

is switched otf.
This means that in addition to the machine control, the main

switch in the control cabinet must also be switched off.
Secure the main switch with a padlock whilst removing the
support screws. The person authorized to perform this task
must keep the key to the padlock on his person. The support
screws must be removed when the machine is switched off.
The main switch and the control can then be switched on with
the key-operated switch. The upper cheek must be opened
slightly. To do this, firmly press the left foot pedal of the foot
switch downwards as quickly as possible beyond the
pressure point into the "Upper cheek up" position so that the
upper cheek opens a little further (see Section 5.2). The
hardwood supports insefted to secure the upper cheek must
then be removed again.
Great care must be taken in aligning the machine.
A steel plate, approx. 0.5 inches thick and 6 inches x 6 inches large must be fitted under each
side-post foot plate, as a firm support for the adjusting screws. The machine is aligned with the
adjusting screws, located in the side-post foot plate.
A spirit level (with the assistance of a tri-square) or a frame level can be used to check the
alignment and is applied to the guiding surfaces of the upper-cheek guide (on the inside of the
side post), as well as in the middle of the lower-cheek suppott (with the upper cheek opened by
approx. 12 inches), aligning the machine exactly, both vertically and horizontally. The accuracy
of the spirit level must be at least 0.0012 inches per 3 feet.
Particular care must be taken to ensure that the upper-cheek

ATTENTION! guides in both side parts are vedically identical on both sides.
RAS 74.20-40 3-12 Februar I 1,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
nEvE,lvltY\r. ilYorE\, I tLilY. I FlAt\lJrLrrt I.
IHASI CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
\f
Refer to the enclosed installation plan for the folding machine for the position of the spirit level.
Once the machine has been aligned, the fastening bolts are sealed in and the nuts tightened
once the cement has hardened. The alignment of the machine must then be checked again and
adjusted if necessary.
lf the alignment procedure described above is not carried out,

ATTENTION! this will have a detrimental effect on the machine.
The bending-cheek bearings and the guides for the side posts
and upper cheek may be damaged and wear prematurely. The
bending accuracy may also be detrimentally atfected.
Once the machine has been aligned, both hardwood blocks,

used to prevent the upper cheek sinking, must be removed
again under all circumstances before the upper cheek is
lowered.
The machine must never be switched on before the operator

has read and understood this instruction notice.
! ffi!
THIS MASHINE SHOIILD NE\'ER BE OPERA.
TED OR TvIAINTAINED WITTIOUT TIIE OPERA-
TOR AlrD/OR MATNTENAI{CE TNDnTIDUAL
FIRST IIA\rING READ AND UNDERSTOOD
THE SAFETY AND INSTRUCTION I\4ANUAT
PROVIDED WITII THIS MAQIIINE.
Do not remove or cover this sign !
15{ 909
Februar11,1994 3-13 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION, TRANSPORT, _ ^
CI EAt't t trt d,' I it S-t n-l t- n r O N A N D c o M M I s s I o N IN G
Refer to ..CNC.COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9OOO

for RAS 74.20-40" for machine operation and activation.
RAS 74.20-40 3-14 Februar 1 1, tr9!r4

MULTIBEND 9OOO
nErrEl Y llY\5. !l\a\>rE\, I l\rIIr I raAlI9r\.rrr I.
IRASI CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Y
3.5. FITTING THE REAR PLATE STOP
lf the rear plate stop has been removed fortransport (dispatch) because of the restricted space
available, this must be fifted again before the nnchine is commissioned.
The separate plate stop is supplied standing vedical.
To prevent personal injury and damage to the plate stop, the stop must be unloaded in accordance
with the enclosed depiction "CRANE SUSPENSION - STOP" - comprising two sheets. The
instructions given in this depiction must be obserued under all.circumstances.
Two lifting ropes of the same length, with adequate carrying capacity, must be used to remove
thestopfromitscontainer.RefertoSectionl.l "RATINGS"fortheweightofthestop.Avoidlifiing
the stop tilted.
The stop is taken out of its container in accordance with "ACTION 1" of the "CRANE SUSPEN-
SION - STOP" depiction and lowered onto two wooden bearns, at least 12 inches high and approx.
60 inches long, in aocordance with "ACTION 2".
The stop is then carefully lowered from its vedical position into lhe horizontal setdown position
-ACTION
in accordance with 3". During this process, rnake sure that the drive motor is pointing
downwards (towards the floor). When lowering, rnake sure that neither the drive motor nor the I
electrical terminal box rnakes contact with the floor at any point. i
Marz 2, 1994 3-15 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION, TRANSPORT, - -
CtEAi{ r i't d' t itS-f [t-LATtd t't AN D co M Ml s s t o N IN G
As the stop motor does not have a brake and the driving ball
screw is not self-locking, the mobile part of the stop would
stail to move from a certain tilted position (from the horizon-
tal to the veftical position), motivated by its own weight. ln
the interest of safety, this must be prevented by supporting
the mobile paft of the stop with a wooden block against the
stop frame.
Slop frame
Mobile part of the stoP
RAS 74.20-40 3-16 Februar11,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
nEtvEI V llY19. lllgrE le I l\,rlI' I frAl!lOrrrrn !.
IRASI
r-
\/
The plate stop must therefore only be suspended in such a
waythatthe supponed side of the stop is pointing downward.
The wooden suppoft must be removed before fitting the stop
(when the stop is in the horizontal position) under all circum-
stances.

and not operated before the separate "CNC-COLOURGRA-
PHUC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9000 for RAS 74.20-40"
operating manuat, enclosed with the machine, has been read
and understood-
The rear plate stop may only be fitted afterthe machine has been connected to the electric system,
the direction of rotation for the main drive (hydraulic drive) has been checked, the machine has
been aligned and secured.
The upper cheek must be moved upwards by approx. 12 inches to fit the stop.
Proceed as follows to raise the upper cheek.
Turn the main switch on the rear panel of the switchgear cabinet to ON
-
Check that the CNC control is ready for operation
- Ready for operation when:
on the control screen lights up and all other lamps are switched
Pushbutton off. At the same time, both
STOP
ln
softkeys rAr .l must be displayed on the monitor, accompanied by
instruction teXs.
SERUICE
Turn on the keylock switch for the controller

-
ln
Select the special service mode by means of the function softkey .l
-
SERVICE
Open the upper check by pressing the middle foot switch pedal.
- The upper check continues to move upwards as long as the pedal is \_r
being pressed.
vtl
Februar 1 1, 1 9t 4 3-17 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION, TRANSP-ORT, - -
CtEAfu r l\r G,' I i\t S-f [LLATtd t t A N D c o M M I s S I o N IN G
The raised upper cheek must be prevented from sinking by

fitting two hardwood blocks, approx. 12 inches long (refer to
Section 2.5 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFEry DIRECTIVES", Para-
graph 18).
Once the upper cheek has been suitably secured, the

machine must be disconnected from the electric system
again under all circumstances.

statf responsible for this work must take possession of the
padlock key.
RAS 74.20-40 3-18 Februar 11,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
nEvEtvuy\I. ilraJrEv I t\-rtr. I nAtt\)rL.rr-r t.
IRASI
"v CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The stop, now lying horizontal,

is then raised with a crane.
The two lifting ropes of the same

length must be fitted to the stop
as shown in the figure on the right.
When lifting, always make sure that
the stop is balanced to ensure that
it does not tip to one side when raise
CAUTION!
Do not damage any pneumatic or electric lines
or mechanical components.
As shown in the figure on left,

the stop must be insefted into
the parallel retainers, screw-
fitted to the lower cheek, from
the rear (refer to the follo-wing
figure).
Februar11,1994 3-19 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. -c,' INSPECTION, TRANSPORT,, -
C I EANI i't t it b=in l-L ATtd t t A t't o c o lvt M I s s I o N I N G RAS
Retaining joints <>
O
Retaining bolt O
Circlip
Retainer on the lower cheek
bolts are inserted into the retaining joints and secured on both sides by two
ATTENTION!
The two support rods are then fitted into the retainers, provided on the lower cheek and the stop
frame, and'tire stop is carefully lowered into place by the crane. The length of the support rods,
which has been adjusted and iixed via hexagon locknuts, must not be altered in order to ensure
that the stop's horizontal position remains unchanged.
Retainer on the
stop frame
Support rod
RAS 74.20-40 3-20 Februar11,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
IHASI c
-l
L E A N r N G,' r.r-sT ALLT f i tiN EN ti E d Ni Ni iB 5T6 tvti'r G
V
The respective support rods are color coded. When f itting these support rods, match these colors
to the colors on the stop frame.
Stop frame
Retainer on the
frame for lhe
support rod
Color coding
(e.9. red to red)
Support rod
Locknut
Before the stop is disconnectedfromthe crane,the O4mm

x 45 mm clamping sleeves supplied with the machine must
be driven into the two retainers in the lower cheek to hold the
two support rods. Make sure that the holes in the lower-cheek
retainer are in line with those in the support rods.
On the stop-frame side, the two suppott rods must each be

screw-fitted to the retainers in the frame with 2 MG x 10 mm
fastening screws, supplied with the machine (refer to the
following figures).
Februar11,1994 3-21 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION. TRANS PORT,
CLEANING,'INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Retainer in the lower cheek

for the suppoil rod
Supplied clamping sleeve

@ 4mm x45 mm
Support rod
Retainer on the stop frame for

the support rod
Suppl ied fastening screw

M6 x 10 mm long
Support rod
RAS 74.20-40 3-22 Februar11,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
lHAlil c L E A N r N G,' i-rt-SA[LAfl b-N A ilr b' b d tui rvi i S SIo r{tit d
\/
The stop may be released from the crane once these measures have been carried out.
As the length of the suppoft rods has been fixed by means of locknuts, the stop's horizontal
position has been restored.
The compressed air-conditioner, supplied with the machine, must be fitted in accordance with
the following figure. To do this, undo the lwo fastening screws in the stop frame, fasten the
conditioner to the frame with the retaining bracket and these screws, and connect up the
compressed air hose (color coded).
Stop frame
Retaining bracket
Fastening screws
Compressed air line

from the air supply
to the conditioner
Compressed
air conditioner
Compressed air hose
.,.i: a.
A compressed air line with a minimum nominal diameter of 0.23 inches must now be laid from
the compressed air supply to the conditioner. This air line is not included in our scope of delivery,
it must be provided by the client. The air pressure at the conditioner must be set to 87 lb/in".
Februar11,1994 3-23 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. TNSPECTION, TRANSPORT,
C tEAr'ir ru d,' itS-i[l-LAl oN A N D co M Ml s s I o
r N IN G llrls
Both of the stop's electrical cables must now be connected to the plug-in conneclors at lhe
switchgear cabinet (refer to the enclosed drawing "SWITCHGEAR CABINET RAS 74.20-40").
Furtheimore, the stop's electrical sensor cable must also be connected to the switchgear cabinet
using the circular plug located under the stop.
Once the stop has been fitted, both of the hardwood blocks,
which were inserted to prevent the upper cheek sinking' must
be removed again.
It may be necessary to readjust the stop after it has been in transit (ltem 7.2.9 "CORRECTING
THE bTOp DtMENSIONS" and ttem 7.2.10 "PARALLEL POSITION OF THE STOP").
The table panels, which have been removed from the stop and supplied loose with the machine
must be f1ied to the stop according to their designations (numbers 1 to X - same number on the
stop frame).
RAS 74.20-40 3-24 Februar11,1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
tHA!il cLEANtNc,'i-lr-sTAtl7fib-NAfr iitdniNiiS$IoNtNif
V
To do this, first place the table panels on the lower-cheek side of the stop, then, using the clips
in the table panels, fit them into the stop frame, from top to bottom, at the end of the stop frame.
lf the machine is used to bend parts which require a free area between the lower cheek and the
stop, the table panels can be otfset (1) to the rear (2) by approx. 8.6 inches by simply lifting the
panels (refer to the following figure).
Table paneloffset
\p
p
\
$.
Clip
Februar11,1994 3-25 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RECEIVING. INSPECTION, TRANSPORT, - ^
CIEANT Nif ' r itSTAt-LATtd t t AN o c o lvl Ml s s I o N IN G
Notes:
RAS 74.20-40 3-26 Februar 1 1, 1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
rYlFlllV r ElYAlIteE
4. MAINTENANCE
The machine must always be at a standstill before carrying

out any maintenance work. The machine must be discon;
nected from the electric system priorto starting maintenance
work. To do this, the main switch on the switchgear cabinet
must be turned off (position 0) and secured with a padlock.
The member of staff responsible for this work must take
possession of the padlock key.
This notice, fitted to the machine, must be complied with

before any maintenance work is carried out.
:
I
I
T
i
l
i
I
I
:
L_
i
! ffi! .
THIS MACHINE SHOULD NE\TER BE OPERA.

TED OR' MAINTAINED WrIEOUT TFIE OPERA-
TOR A_I\D/OR MAINTENAT\TCE TNDTVIDUAL
FIRST IIA]rING READ A}ID UNDERSTOOD
THE SAT'ETY AI{D INSTRUCTION T{ANUAL
PROYIDED WITH TmS IvfACHINE.
Do not remov€ or cover this sign !
154
S€ptember 7, 1993 4-1 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
4.1. NOTES
The directives tisted in Section2'SAFETY" must beobserved

for all maintenance oPerations.
Malfunctions caused by inadequate or incompetent maintenance work can incur very high
- repair costs and long d-owntimes for the folding machine. Regular maintenance is therefore
indispensable.
Operational safety and the service life of the lolding machine depend on proper maintenance
- - as well as several other factors.
ln other aspects, the separate "SIEMENS Servomotors 1
ATTEh HU 305 and Tachogenerator 1 HU 1052" operating instruc-

tions, as wetl as the "lnstallation and operating instructions
for RIEGELER conditioners" must also be observed (refer to
the Annex to this operating manual).
tt is prohibited to remove the lead seals from the pressure

ATTENTION! relief valves in the hydraulic system or to make adiustments
of any kind.
RAS 74.20-40 4-2 S€ptemb€r7,1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAIN I ENANUE
4.2. LUBRICATION
Careful lubrication is absolutely vital for lrouble-free operation of the folding machine and
- precludes expensive repairs. This applies in particular to the proper lubrication of the ball
screws on the rear plate stop and to the two worm gears, used to adjust the bending cheek.
The rnachine must always be disconnected from the electric system for lubrication and all
- work associated with lubrication - turn off lhe main switch and secure with a safety lock.
Referto the enclosed "LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS" and the "LUBRICATION CHART -

- FACTORY DESIGNATION" foT the greasing interuals, quantities and types of lubricant for
each greasing point.
Use only non-fibrous cleaning cloths when working on the hydraulic system, to ensure that
- no fibers can get into the machine.
Lubricants, such oils and greases, must be kept in clean, closed containers, to keep out dust
- and moisture and to reduce exposure to air and the associated oxidation effect to a minimum.
The storage area must be dry and cool.
i
I
.,
S€ptemb€r 7, 1 993 4'3 RAS 74.2G,40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
4,3. CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL, CHANGING THE OIL,

REPLACING THE FILTER
The machine must always be disconnected from the electric

system for this. The main switch on the switchgear cabinet
must be turned off (position O) and secured with a padlock.
The member of staff responsible for this work must take
possession ofthe padlock keY.
4.3.1. CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL, CHANGING THE OIL
The hydraulic system receives its supply from a 21-gallon oil tank, fitted to the cross member on
the rear side of the machine.
The oil level must be checked through the inspection glasses with min. and max. markings before
commissioning and once a week, plrticularly after the machine has run for the f irst time when all
pipes and cylinders are filled with oil. The oil must be topped up if necessary.
The oil must be changed once a year if the rnachine is used for single-shift operation.
:,
RAS 74.20-40 4-4 SeptemberT, 19!13

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
R A s
Hydraulic oil with detergent properties 45 cSt at 4Oo C I 1Mo F (refer to the lubricant chart in
the Annex, factory designation "B" ) must be used. Only use clean, pure,
uncontaminated oil.
For this purpose, remove the oil drain plug to empty the tank.
Observe the local regulations for the disposal of used oit

ATTENTION! under all circumstances.
Oil from the machine at operating temperature can become

very hot - risk of burning, e.g. if hot hydraulic oil is drained
without control.
The tank must always be cleaned before filling with new hydraulic oil. The two cleaning apedures
on the top panel can be used for this. New hydraulic oil must be poured in through a filler filter.
er filter
teqe
Return filter
Oil-level inspecti- :
on glasses
i
Cleaning aperture ;
Oildrain plug I
i
Oiltank I
I
I
l
l
i
I
'"i, l
i
September 7, 1993 4-5 RAS 74.20-40 l

MULTIBEND 9OOO I
I
MAINTENANCE
IS
4.3.2. CHANGING THE FILTER
(return filter)
Use
The filter insert in the return filter must be changed for the first time after 50 operating hours.
the filter element included with the accessories for this.
After this, change the filter every 6 months if the machine is used for single-shift operation'
The cover must be removed from the return filter to change the filter insert. When doing
this,
rr,.k" that the filter insert is installed in such a way lhat the compression spring points
"ur"
upwards.
permanent magnets are sealed into the cover of the return filter. Any metal chips clinging to this
nagnet must be removed when the filter is changed.
the factory.
The operating pressure for the hydraulic system has been adjusted and lead-sealed in
It is prohibited to remove the lead seals or to make any sort

ATTENTION! of adiustment.
RAS 74.20-40 4-6 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
4.4. REPLACING THE FILTER MAT
(in the switchgear cabinet)
The filier mals in the switchgear cabinet ventilation system must be inspected regularly for dirt
and replaced if necessary (refertothe enclosed drawingof theswitchgearcabinet RAS 74.20-40).
A replacement set of filter mats has been provided in the switchgear cabinet.
4.5. SERVOMOTOR
Refertothe operating instructions (SIEMENS) - servomotors 1HU3 05 andtachogenerator 1HU'l

052 - enclosed in the Annex for information on the regular maintenance of the servomotor with
lachogenerator - above all with reference to maintenance of the commutator, the carbon brushes
and their replacement.
::tl
SepbmberT, 19t13 4-7 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
RAS
4.6. GENERAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION
1 . lf there is an obvious loss of oil - check the oil level in the tank at shoder intervals, top up with
oil if necessary - determine lhe cause and remedy.
2. lf it is necessaryto change the type of oil or grease for technical or operational reasons, only
choose lhe typ-es and viscositiei which are recommended in the "Lubricant chail - factory
designalion" in this operating nranual.
3. When disnrantling, e.g. covers or sealing plugs, pay attention to the sealing elements. Check
all seals before installation carefully and replace if necessary.
4. Check screw connections and pipelines. Tighten leaky screw

connections or plugs when the system is depressurized only.
Do not repair damaged pipes, replace them. Replace hydrau-
lic hoses immediatety if any damage, signs of age or moisture
penetration become apparent. Use original spare pafts from
the machine manufacturer onlY.
Remedy any leaks in the pipeline system as soon as possible

- CAUTION depressurize the system and switch off the ma-
chine before staning work (refer to Section 4.3).
5. Clean all contact surfaces before assembling. Check connections for leaks following installa-
tion.
6. Checkfastening and securing components, e.g. screws, nuts, lockwashers and washers etc.
prior to reassembly and replace if necessary.
RAS 74.20-40 4-8 S€ptember 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
7. Clean the lubricating nipple before applying the grease gun, then grease
8. Apply a film of oil or grease to all blank metal rnachine components at regular intervals to
prevent corrosion damage.
9. Replace faulty pails in good time in order to avoid more serious damage.
10. Replacement assemblies have the same maintenance schedules as the units which they are
replacing.
11 Replace all protective devices properly after maintenance L

work has been completed.
12. Observe the environmental protection regulations when dis-

ATTENTION! posing of oil, grease, cleaning agents or components con-
taining oil (e.9. oil filters).
13. Service and repair work may only be carried out by authorized
personnel.
September 7, 1993 4-9 RAS 74.2G40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
MAINTENANCE
RAS
Notes:
RAS 74.20-40 4-10 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
ELEU I F{IUAL EtdUII'MtrN I
RAS
5. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
ATTENTION! Also refer to the separate "CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CON-

TROLLER MULTIBEND 9000" for RAS 74.20-40.
5.1. SAFETY DIRECTIVES
Work on the electrical installation of the machine may only

be carried out by an authorized electrician.
2. Electrical hazard - misuse or incompetent installation work

carried out on the machine may lead to electric shocks, injury
or death.
The instaltation must comply with the "National Electric

Code" (Article 250 - ground etc.).
.t. The machine must not be connected to the electric system or

operated before this operating manual has been read and
understood, pafticularly Chapter 2 "SAFETY".
The separate "CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MUL-

TIBEND 9000" operating instructions must also have been
read and understood beforehand.
The separate "SIEMENS safety information", supplied with

the machine, must also have been read and understood
beforehand.
Septembel 7, 1993 5-1 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
RA!
The warning and instruction notices, attached tothe machine,
ATTENTION! must have been read and understood before the machine is
connected to the electric system. Particular attention must be
given to the notice on the switchgear cabinet door.
WARNING!
DA}IGffi,!
+ +
IITGTI VOUIAGE
ffiI/ICE DXSCONNMT
Do not remove or cover this sign t
r't
RAS 74.20-40 5-2 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RAS
5.2. MAINS CONNECTION
All electric cables have been installed so that it is only necessary to connect the main electric
supply linefromthe mainstothe switchgearcabinel (refertotheenclosed architecturaldiagrarns).
The electric cables from the control panel to the electronic system and the controller must first
be connected in the switchgear cabinet, according to the designations, under all circumstances
(refer to Chapter 3.4 "INSTALLING THE MACHINE" "FlTTlNc THE CONTROL PANEL WITH
BOOM).
Furthermore, the main electric supply line from the mains to

the switchgear cabinet must be deactivated. Care must be
taken to ensure that the main supply line cannot be activated
during work. The member of staff responsible for this work
must satisfy himself that the supply line really is dead, with
a measuring instrument, before starting work
The main switch must be turned off and secured with a

padlock. The authorized electrician must take possession of
the padlock key.
The main electric supply line must first be connected to tine

terminals Ll, L2 and L3 in the switchgear cabinet, then to the
grounding terminal PE of terminal strip Xl (refer to the en-
closed architectural diagrams). The yellow terminal shroud-
ing, covering terminals L1, L2 and L3 must be removed by
undoing the screws beforehand and must be replaced imme-
diately once these terminals have been connected.
September 7, 1993 5-3 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
As it is possible for terminals in the switchgear cabinet to

TTENT I
become loose in transit, all terminals in the switchgear cabi-
net must be checked and tightened if necessary.
Before connecting the machine to the mains, check that the

ATTENTION! operating voltage and frequency quoted on the switchgear
cabinet iating piate agrees with the local mains voltage and
frequency.
The system may only be connected to the mains after the

main electric supply iine has been connected in the switch-
gear cabinet.
Once the machine has been connected to the mains, use the
ATTENTION! rotary field measuring instrument to check the direction of
the rotary field for the alternating current at terminals Ll,12
and L3.
The rotary field must rotate clockwise under all circum-

stances.
Change two phases if necessary.
The main switch and the main electric supply line from the
mains to the switchgear cabinet must be deactivated under
atl circumstances before the phases are changed. Care must
be taken to ensure that the main supply line cannot be
activated during the work. The member of staff responsible
for this work must satisfy himself that the supply line really
is dead, with a measuring instrument, before starting work'
Now check the direction of rotation for the main drive motor
(hydraulic drive).
RAS 74.20-40 5-4 S€ptember 7, 1993
MULTIBEND 9OOO
ffAS
Proceed as follows
Reactivate the main supply line.

-
Turn the main switch on the rear panel of the switchgear cabinet to ON.
-
Check whether the CNC control is ready for operation
-
Ready for operation when:
pushbutton on the control screen lights up and all other lamps are switched
otf. At the same time, both of the
softkeys
T\..tZ
f must be displayed on the monitor, accompanied by
instruction texts.
SERUICE
Switch on the keylock switch for the controller

-
and tum off again immediately with the pushbutton.
IMPORTANT:
ENTION!
Only switch on very briefly as the pump may be damaged if
the direction of rotation is incorrect.
The direction of rotation must comply with the arrow shown on the motor (looking at the ventilator
cowl, clockwise, to the right). lf the direction of rotation is correct forthe main motor, the direction
of rotation will also be correct for all other motors in the system.
Before setting to work, due to eventual mains fluctuations, adjust the control-voltage 110V, at
secondary winding in the range of +5T" up to +1 07" (1 1 SV up to 1 23V).
(Measure at secondary winding of transformer, adjustment by means of changing terminals at
primary winding).
August 11,1994 5-5 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
5.3. FOOTSWITCH
(refertothefigure, Section
Thefoot switch is equipped with afail-safe controlsystemwith 3 pedals
5.3.1 "FUNCTION OF THE FOOT SWITCH).
WARNING!
ffi!
IV{ACIIINES WITII ONg
pEDAI SWTTCE MLTST BE
OPERATED BY ONE PERSON ONLY,
MACTIINES WITH TTIIO PEDAI, SWITCIMS CA}'i BE
OPERATED BY TWO PERSONS, BUT ONLYIN CON-
NECTTON WITE TEE SAFETY CONTROL "2-PER-
SON-OPERATIOI'f'- IN TEIS CA'SE THE IvIACHIINE
MUST BE PROVIDED WIIH A PF;DAL SWITCH FOR
EACE OPER,ATOR
Do not remPwi or cover tbie eign t
1$ 911
(Atso referto section 8.1 "TWO-PERSON OPERATION USING FOOT

SWITCH)'
cheek.siops moving
when closing the upper cheek (left-hand pedal, jogging.mode), the upper
when the opening has been reduced to Ci'gZ ininei. I is necessary to rejease the pedal and
(ogging mode) until
press the left-hand toot feOat once again to continue the closing movement
ihe plate has been clamPed.
The automatic stop facility for the upper cheek ceases to be

effective if the opening is less than 0.32 inches'
Ia
! ]MPOHIANT!
AFTER EACH BI"ADE_CIIANGE IN THE UPPER
BEAhA TIIE PRE-SET SAFETY GAP MUST BE RE-
EO.TUSTEO ABSOLIITELY . FOR CLOSING THE
UP-
PER. BEAM TO A SECTTRITY GAP OF 0.32 INCTI.
AT''
rPE P.ACH ADruSTMEI{T THIS SAT'ETY GAP MUST
BE CITECKED AND,IF NESESSARY CORRÊCTED'
ISEE OPERATION IVIANUAL'-

thir eign !
Do not rcmovc or covcr
l9ln0
(Refer to Section 7.2.8 "REPLACING THE RAILS")
3-O September 7, 1993

RAS 74.20-40
MULTIBEND 9OOO
ELECTRICAL EOUIPMENT
5.3.1. FUNCTION OF THE FOOT SWITCH
Foot switch Function
Left-hand pedal 1. Closes the upper cheek
JgSOinS mode to an opening width of 0.32 inches
2. lf pressed again, upper cheek closes
Jogging mode, urttilthe plate has been clamped
3, EMERGENCY STOP during the bending process

(only at execution with 1 foot switch)
Middle pedal 1. Opens the upper cheek ,i

i
I
Jogging mode j
r
2. EMERGENCY STOP during the bending process t
I
(only at execution with 2 foot switches L
I
1
- 2-person-operation) i
i
j
Right-hand pedal Starts the automatic bending process I
l
I
(only effective if the upper cheek is closed firmly).
i
Bending cheek up - bending cheek down - upper cheek J
up, lo an opening width of 0.32 inches or to a higher :
adjustable value
II f 7 * -T 7 Onlyat execution with

T 2 foot switches - 2-person-operation
t:
\ i \2 ]-
-l
T
I
o I
tt Lf
I -A!
au{omalic 6'dnd
c lo5es
Only at execution
with 1 foot switch
Junl 13,1994 b'I RAS 74.2A-40

.MULTIBEND 9OOO
RA!
Never put your hand between the upper and lower cheeks
while pressing the left'hand pedal.
Before pressing the right-hand pedal, make sure that nobody

is in the danger zone of the bending cheek.
CAUTION: The bending cheek swings fonlrards by approx.

32 inches
Observe the instruction notice in the middle of the bending

cheek.
I ffi!
STAND CT-,EAR,
EEhIDING MAIVI RCI:I{TES
Do not remove or cover this sign !
1&4 905
RAS 74.20-40 5-8 " sepbmber 7, 1903

MULTIBEND 9OOO
lf the left-hand pedal 'EMERGENCY STOP' has been pressed during the bending process, there
are lhe following possibillties:
To restart the autonntic sequence again by pressing the right-hand foot switch pedal
-
To continue by pressing the pushbutton

- START
To leave the program by pressing the pushbutton STOP

-
in order lo return to the starting position immediately (to select a new operating mode), e.g. to
1 change to jogging mode in which each individual cheek movement can be started separately.
5.4. OVERLOAD PROTECTION
The main motor is equipped with a termistor-lype motor protection, which responds in the event
of overheating ( refer to the circuit diagram).
ATTENTION! The drive unit may only be started again after the motor has
cooled down following an overload.
SeptembsrT,1993 5-9 RAS 74.2&40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
ELECTRICAL EOUIPMENT
Notes:
RAS 74.20-40 5-10 S€ptember 71 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
WORKING WITH THE MACHINE
6. WORKING WITH THE MACHINE
6.1. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY DIRECTIVES
The machine may only be put into operation if the operator

has been trained, is authorized, and has read and understood
this operating manual, particularly Ghapter 2 "SAFETY", as
well as the separate'CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER
MULTIBEND 9000 for RAS 74.2G40" operating instructions,
supplied with the machine, and the "Siemens safety informa-
tion".
All safety devices must be fitted before the machine is

switched on.
The information plates, fitted to the machine, must have been

read and understood before switching on.
The machine must be disconnected from the electric system

before changing the rails. To do this, turn off the main switch
on the switchgearcabinet and secure with a padlock. Always
read Section 6.2.9 "REPLACING THE RAILS" in this operating
manual beforehand.
The machine must always be at a standstill and disconnected

from the electric system before any adjustment or main-
tenance work is canied out. Adjustment and maintenance
work may only be carried out by authorized personnel.
September 7, 1993 6-1 RAS 74.2A-4A

MULTIBEND 9OOO
R A S
Nobody is allowed behind the machine in the area of the stop

while work is being carried out on the folding machine.
Care must be taken to ensure that nobody is in the swiveling

range of the bending cheek white using the folding machine
for bending work. The swiveting bending cheek is dangerous'
Operating personnel must never put their hands into the

working area underthe upper cheekwhile inserting the sheet'
metal component or when ali$ning the part to be bent against
the stop blades. The descending upper cheek is dangerous'
When bending short sides, the stop blades move into the
cutouts in the lower-cheek rail. Danger of iniury to fingers'
.WARNIT{G!
! ffi!
Iv{ACHINESWITHONEPEDALSWTTCHMTJSTBE
OPERATED BY ONE PERSON ONLY'
IV{ACIIINES WITH T\VO PEDAI SWITCIMS CA]'I BE
oPERATED BYTWO PERSONS, BUT oNLYTN CON-
NECTION WITII Try SAFETY CONTROL "2-PER-
SON-OPERATIOI\T'- IN THIS CA,SE TEE N4AOHINE
MUST BE PROVIDED WITH A PEDAL SWITCH FOR
EACH OPER,ATOR.
Do not remgvc or cover thia sign !
911
(Also referto Section 7.1 "TWO-PERSON OPERATION")
RAS 74.20-40 6-2 September 7, 1993

MI.ILTIBEND 9OOO
HAS
6.2. WORKING DIRECTIVES
Compared with bending around a circular rail, bending work using an angle rail presupposes a
number of different compromises. As there is not suitable bracing within the bending radius, which
would support the radius, a certain amount of distortion is always produced in a certain area of
the radius.
At the same time, if the bending cheek is closely adjusted, the point of application of force on the
bending rail moves towards the point of rotation. The resull is the leading leg effect.
Angle rails are used frequently in spite of this. The disadvantages - such as differences in angle
and radius - are often more than compensated for by the costs of setting up and tools which would
be necessary for a large number of ditferent circular rails.
pivot poin Free bending with angle rails

I
I "Xs, + Same r:ail for various sheet thickness

apll-
al
- No bracing (radius distorted)
- Varying difference in bending angle between

SETPOINT and ACTUAL for 30o, 90o, 120"
- Shifting point of application of force along the

bending rail
pivol poln Bending around a radius
+ Best bending result on the radius
+ Virtually constant difference between

SETPOINT and ACTUAL for 30o, 90o, 120o
- Frequent rail changes (set-up cost)

H
- High tool costs
Physical reasons dictate that there are always resiliences in a bent component, the size of which
depends on the bending angle and which are determined by the material itself - and not by the
machine.
Sepbmber 7, 1993 6-3 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RAS
6.2.1. FOLDING MATERIALS OF DIFFERENT LENGTHS
lf metal sheets which are smaller than the working length of the rnachine are clamped on one
side - either lefi or right - for folding, it is not vital to make sure that a narrow dummy sheet.of the
same thickness is inierted on the-opposite side. The rnachine detects the degree of bracing by
means of an internal measuring system and prevents the upper cheek closing any further. A
iubsequent bending process nray be canied out. Once the upper cheek has been opened, the
bracing is automatically compensated again. The same also applies to segmented retaining
clampiails, whereby a iail segment can be used in place of the dummy sheet.
ATTENTI Observe Section 6.1 'OCGUPATIONAL SAFETY DIREC-

TIVES" under all circumstances.
Danger of collision if special rails are used - take Section 6.2.3

ATTENT I .,ADJUSTING THE SAFETY DEVICE FOR MAX. BENDING
ANGLE" into consideration under all circumstances.
Observe Section 6.2.9 "REPLACING THE RAILS" under all

circumstances.
RAS 74.20-40 6-4 S€ptember 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
6.2.2. AUTOMATIC FOLDING SEQUENCE
Precondition: "PROGRAM" operating mode with at least one program line.
When lowering the upper cheek, always ensure that there is

no danger of personal injury.
Observe Section 6.1 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW DIREC-

ATTENTION! Observe Section 6.2.3 "ADJUSTING THE SAFETY DEVICE

FOR MAX. BENDING ANGLE' under all circumstances.
Observe Section 6.2.9 "REPLACING THE RAILS" under all

ATTENTION! circumstances.
Press the left-hand foot switch pedal - jogging mode. The upper cheek closes and stops moving
when the opening has been reduced lo approx. 0.32 inches - protective circuit.
After releasing the pedal, press the left-hand pedal again to continue closing the upper cheek
fiogging mode) untilthe sheet has been clamped.
The closing process can be interrupted at any stage of the jogging sequence by releasing the
left-hand pedal.
Afier clamping the upper cheek, trigger the autornatic bending sequence by pressing the
right-hand foot switch pedal, i.e. the bending cheek swings upwards until it has reached the set
bending angle for the current program section.
The nnchine switches over, the bending cheek swings back into its original position and the
upper cheek opens to an opening of approx. 0.32 inches or a higher adjustable value.
The automatic sequence can be intenupted at any time by pressing the left-hand foot switch
pedal (refer to Chapter 5.3.1 "FUNCTION OF THE FOOT SWITCH"). lf an automatic sequence
has been interrupted in this way, it can be resumed again by pressing the right-hand foot switch
pedal.
Once the automatic bending sequence has been triggered,

the bending cheek swivels down automatically after the
entered bending angle has been reached. Always make sure
that nobody is in the danger area.
CAUTION: The bending cheek swings forwards by approx. 32

inches.
S€pbmber 7, 1993 6-5 . RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
6.2.3. ADJUSTING THE SAFETY DEVICE FOR MAX. BENDING ANGLE
Always read Chapter 6.1 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW DIREC-

TIVES" before changing the rails.
Everytime the upper-cheek rail has been changed, the bend'

ATTE I
ing angle timiter must be readiusted to the new rail. To do this'
undo the knurled set collar (refer to the figure) by turning to
the left.
ATTEN I The max. adjustable bending angle for angle rail is
180'minus railangle
e.g. angle rail30'
Max. bending angle: 180o - 30o = 150o
The graduated collar with graduations up to 180 can now be set to the new max. bending angle
valujforthis special rail. The bending angle value must be set in line with the marking line. Secure
15e graduated collar with the knurleJ seicollar. lf a program conlains a higher bending
angle in
;Angle" column than is possible for this special rail, the machine switches back automatically
the
once tn! max. permitted b6nding angle has been reached and returns to its starting position.
RAS 74.20-40 6-6 S€ptember 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
Graduated collar
Marking
Set c.ollar
Setting values Max. bending angle value
Angle railwith 45 degrees 135 degrees
Angle railwith 20 degrees 160 degrees
Radius rail 180 degrees
September 7, I 993 6-7 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
Is
6.2.4. BENDING CHEEK SETTING
- Referto Section 6.2.6 for the setting values -

The motordriven bending-cheek setting can be triggered in the "PROGRAM" or "JOGGING"

operating modes.
,,pROGRAM" operaling mode, the setting range is adjusted automatically in accordance
ln the
with the entered value when the appropriate program line has been reached.
,,JOGGING" operating mode, pressing the softkeys (F5) and (FG) or (F/) triggers the setting
ln the
as long as these keys are Pressed.
Refer to the separate "CNC-COLOURGRAPHTC-CONTROL-

ATTENTION! LER MULTIBEND 9000 tor74.2G4O" instructions.
When working with radius rails, always remember that the

ATTENTION! lower cheek must also be set as well as the bending cheek.
lf it is necessary to move the bending cheek and lower cheek downwards, the bending cheek
must be lowerei to the common setting first, followed by the lower cheek.
lf it is necessary to move the lower cheek and bending cheek upwards, the lower cheek must
be raised to thecommon setting first, followed the bending cheek.
ATTEN I Refer to Section 6.2.5 "LOWER CHEEK SETTING".
The bending cheek can be adjusted from 0 to 3.15 inches downwards.
It is not necessaryto undo or tighten screws or clamping devices before or afterthe adjustment
The setting value for the bending cheek, entered via the control qa1el, must always be checked
on the scile with vemier. There is a scale with vemier on lhe right and left-hand sides of the
bending-cheek holder (figure).
RAS 74.20-40 6-8 September 7, '1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
HAS
Guard plate
r [J
Vernier
Bending-cheek
holder
Scale
Bending cheek
The setting for the bending cheek is 0.02 inches lower than the lower cheek for normal bending
work. The two scales on the bending cheek have therefore been positioned in such a way that
the bending cheek is 0.02 inches lower than the lower cheek when the bending cheek and the
lower cheek are set to lhe same value.
The bending cheekand lowercheekaretherefore settothe same value for normal bending
work.
The bending cheek can be set up to 0.08 inches lower than the lower cheek in special cases
The setting for the bending cheek must never be higher than
ATTENTION! that of the lower cheek.
The drive unit to adjust the bending cheek is integrated in the

bending cheek itself. lf it is necessary to carry out any repair
work on the drive unit, the safety regulations defined under
Item 2.5 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY DIRECTIVES", Paragraph
17 must be obserued.
The machine must always be switched off before starting

repair work For this, the main switch on the switchgear
cabinet must be turned off and secured with a padlock. The
responsible member of staff must take possession of the
padlock key.
September 7, 1993 6-9 RAS 74.20.40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
6.2.5. LOWER CHEEK SETTING
- Refer to Section 6.2.6 for setting values '
Observe Section 6.1 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY DIREC-

TIVES' under all circumstances under all circumstances.
Section 6.2.4 "BENDING CHEEK SETTING" must also be

ATTENTION! taken into consideration under all circumstances.
Refer to the separate "GNC-GOLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROL-

ATTENTION! LER MULTIBEND 9000 for RAS 74.20-4iO" instructions.
The setting procedure takes place automatically. The program logic controls the adjustment
procedure ior the bending and lower cheeks in the correct collision-free order.
The logical recognition facility reacts to incorrect inputs with non-performance and an error display
"ERROR ! INCORRECT VALUE FOR BC S or LC S"
The bending cheek is usually lower or on the same level as the lower cheek. The lower cheek
nny be set io rnax. 0.08 inches above the level of the bending cheek, however, in special cases.
The values may be entered directly and determined by means of a mathematics program'
Factor it Remarks
Sheet thickness inches
lnner radius inches
Bending length inches
Stren$h 1-8 t = 14504 )bfin2
8 = 116030 lb/in2
RAS 74.20-40 6-10 September 7, 1993

rrr lr TrErtrNn onnn
6.2.6. SETTING VALUES FOR THE LOWER CHEEK

AND BENDING CHEEK
Refer to Section 6.2.7 "ADJUSTING PROGRAMMABLE LOWER CHEEK AND BENDING

CHEEK" for machines with motor-driven lower cheek adjustment (special version).

TIVES' under all circumstances.
Observe the following under all circumstances for adjust-

ATTENTION! ment work, in order to prevEnt collisions:
When moving downwards, always bring the bending cheek

to the common sefting first, followed by the lower cheek i
I
i
i
I
When moving upwards, always move the lower cheek to the l
common setting first, followed by the bending cheek. I
:_
The lower cheek and bending cheek must always be set with respect to the point of rolation in I
the conect order before starting bending work on the folding machine. t-
:'
:
This depends on the thickness of the sheet to be bent or on the respective radius and sheet
thickness when bending with radius rails.
S€ptember 7, 1 993 6-11 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
When angle rails are used for bending, the setting dimension for the lower and bending cheeks
is
e = 1.25 x sheet thickness
The value must be set and checked on the respective scales.
H(AMPLE:
When bending a metal sheet 0.12 inches thick with the minimum possible bending radius (refer
to ltem 1 "TEdHNICAL DATA"), the setting for the lower cheek and bending cheek is as follows:
e = 1.25 x 0.12 inches = 0.15 inches
The lower cheek and the bending cheek must therefore be set to 0.15 inches
When radius rails are used for bending, the setting for the lower cheek and bending cheek is as
follows:
e = radius + sheet thickness.
The value must be set and checked at the relevant scales'
EXAMPLE:
When bending a metal sheet 0.08 inches thick with a radius rail R = 0.59 inches, lhe setting for
the lower cheek and bending cheek is as follows:
e = (0.59 + 0.08) inches = 0.67 inches
The lower cheek and lhe bending cheek must therefore be set to 0.67 inches
RAS 74.20-40 6-12 S€ptember T, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RAS
6.2.7. ADJUSTING PROGRAMMABLE LOWER CHEEK
AND BENDING CHEEK
- Specialversion -
Observe Section 6.1 'OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW DIREC-

TIVES" under all circumstanc€s
Thanks to its logical recognition facility, the nnchine first moves the bending cheek to the common
setting dimension in a downwards direction, followed by the lower cheek.
The lower cheek rnoves to the setting dimension in an upwards direction first, followed by the
bending cheek,
Before the lower cheek moves upwards, the upper cheek opens by the prescribed lower-cheek
adjustment for safe$ reasons.
When moving downwards, the uppercheekopens by its clamping value.
The respective setting depends on the relevant factors.
Sheet thickness incheMnner radius inches/bending length feeVstrength 1 - 8.
The setting dimensions described under 6.2.6 "SETTING VALUES FOR THE LOWER CHEEK
AND BENDING CHEEK" can be used as reference values for direct input.
Septembel7,1993 6-13 RAS 74.20.40

MULTIBEND SOOO
6.2.8. IMPRESSIONBENDING
N..,,,i Observe Section 6.1 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY DIREC'

v\ TIVES" under all circumstances.
For impression bending, using the upper cheek, with the bending cheek swiveled out, enter "J"
as infornntion in the "HELP FUNCTIONS" cursor field.
The "impression bending" help function reduces repetitive working processes to a single
swing-out movement of the bending cheek and the "close upper cheek" function. The bending
cheek moves to its predetermined posilion of its own accord before the upper cheek closes and
rernains in the approached bending position. The bending angle is adjusted automatically or
changed to a new angle.
The "CLOSE UPPER CHEEK" foot switch is used to start and resume the working sequence.
Taking this a step further, it is possible to combine radiifrom various bending segments logically.
A radius rail, which need not necessarily correspond to the generated radius, can be used to
obtain optimum results. This makes the segments inconspicuous.
The bending cheek returns automatically if the "J" help function is not selected.
lmpression bending is only possible within the angle range of the 0 - 25 and for sheet thicknesses
of up to 0.05 inches (18 ga).
RAS 74.20-40 6-14 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
6.2.9. REPLACING THE RAIL
Observe Section 6.1 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY DIREC-

TIVES' under all circumstances.
Only authorized people are allowed to change the blades.

Prior to the blade changing, these people must read this
paragraph thoroughly and must have understood this.
UPPER-CHEEK RAIL
The upper cheek must be opened and supported as described

under Section 2.5 "OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW DIRECTIVES",
Paragraph 18.
The machine must always be switched off before replacing

any of the upper-cheek rails. For this, the main switch on the
switchgear cabinet must be turned off and secured with a
padlock. The responsible member of staff must take posses-
sion of the padlock key.
The uppercheek rail holder has a bayonet fixing. The rail must be pressed to the right along its
len$h until it reaches the bayonet stop.
There are threaded holes in the front end of the rails.
It is of advantage if a screw is litted into this hole on the end of the rail in such a way that it projects
approx.2 inches.
CAUTION: The internal threads provided are for metric

screws. The inserted depth must be at least2 xthread diame-
ter.
Septemb€r 7, 1 993 6-1s RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
you can now use a hardwood lever, braced against the upper-cheek guide, to press out the
machine to the righthand side.
The upper-cheek rails may be very heavy - according to

version - . The conesponding weights are marked in each
blade at the right hand side. Prior the each blade changing'
the authorized people must be consider these weight indica-
tion. lt is therefore absolutely necessary to ensure that
enough people are available to changethe rails. Each person
should not lift more than aPprox. 66 lbs ( 30 kg).
At divided goat foot bladeswith coresponding holding blade,

prior to the blade changing the paft pieces must be taken off
the hotding blade in order to reduce the blade weight to a
minimum. The weight of the holding blade is marked at the
right hand side of the blade and this only corresponds to the
holding blade without build-in pad pieces.
When removing the rail, it is advisable to pull it out on the right-hand side first until the rail is
basically only held on the lefi-hand side by its retainer.
The new rail is installed in reverse order, i.e. the rail is f irst inserted into its retainer on the left-hand
side, then swung into place on the right-hand side, finally being brought into the working position
by sliding to the left as far as the stop.
Every time a rail is replaced on the upper cheek, the safety

AT TION! limiter for the bending angle must be readjusted in accord-
ance with Section 6.2.3 "ADJUSTING THE SAFEW DEVICE
FOH MAX. BENDING ANGLE". Apart from this, the hardwood
blocks placed underthe uppercheek must be removed again.
RAS 74.20-40 6-16 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
hrm
VIEW OF THE MACHINE FROM THE REAR LEFT.HAND SIDE
Side part
,
Upper cheek
Marking (3)
Trip cam (5 )sensi-

tive adjustment for
upper cheek clos-
ing width limited
0.08 - 0.6 inches
(seclion 2.3, 6)
lndicator (4)
Trip cam (2)

to stop at
0.32 inches
opening
Screw (1)
IMPORTANT:
Every time a rail is replaced in the upper cheek, the trip cam
for the fail-safe control system governing closure of the
upper cheek, i.e. stopping the closing movement of the upper
cheekautomaticallywhen a safetyopening of 0.32 inches has
been reached - depending on the rail height - must be read-
justed under all circumstances. For this, every time an upp€r-
cheek rail is replaced, close the upper cheek carefully with
the foot switch. Once the upper cheek is closed, undo the
screw (1) and set the indicator (4) in line with the marking (3)
on the side part of the machine, then tighten the screw (1)
again securely. The trip cam (2) is the determining factor for
the safety opening width of 0.32inches.
September 7, 1 993 6-17 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
Once readjusted, check that the trip cam operates correctly

for the safety opening width of 0.32 inches. The trip cam must
ATTENTION! respond in suchawaythattheclosing movementof the upper
cheek stops at 0.32 inches. The setting must be conected if
necessary.
Every time a rait is replaced, always read these information

notices on the right-hand side of the upper cheek (in front of
the machine) and on the left-hand side of the upper cheek
(viewed from the rear).
W!
ffi!
AFTER EASH BLADE-CHANGE IN TTIE TJPPER
BEAIv{, THE PRE-SET SAFETY GAP MUST BE RE-
ADJT.'STED ABSOLUTELY . FOIL CLOSING THE UP_
PER, BEAM TO A SESURITY GAP OF 0.32 INCII. AF-
TER EACH ADJTISTMENT TIIIS SAtr'ETT GAP MUST
BE CITECI<ED AliD,IF NECESSARY CORRECTED.
-SEE OPERATION }VIANUAJ,..

Do not remove or @ver thie siga !
lJ.910
lf special rails are used, the max. permitted sheet thickness

ATTENTION! and max. opening width forthe upper cheek may be reduced
(also refer to Chapter 1 "TECHNICAL DATA").
RAS 74.20-40 6-18 S€ptemb€r 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RAS
BENDING.CHEEK RAIL
When bending profiles which require a special rail instead of the standard bending rail in lhe
bending cheek, the replacement procedure is as follows: The bending cheek must be in its starting
position.
The machine must always be switched off before replacing

the bending-cheek rail. For this, the main switch on the
switchgear cabinet must be turned off and secured with a
padlock The responsible member of staff must take posses-
sion of the padlock key.
The bending-cheek rails may be very heavy - according to

version and length -.The corresponding weights are marked
in each blade at the right hand side. Prior the each blade
changing, the authorized people must be consider these
weight indication. lt is therefore absolutely necessary that
enough people are available to replace the rail. Each person
should not lift more than approx. 66 lbs - 30 kg.
Once the machine has been disconnected from the electric system, undo all screws holding the
bending rail.
Using the efiractor hook (included in the supplied accessories) in the auxiliary hole provided on
the right-hand side of the rail, pull the rail upwards out of the retaining groove. Place the
replacement rail into the retaining groove on the bending cheek from above. Care must be taken
to ensure that the rail makes good contact along its entire length. Then tighten allscrews again.
When fitting narrow bending rails, always be sure to use the

ATTENTION! shoder fastening screws which belong to the rail.
When using nanower bending rails than the 1.18" standard

ATTENTION! bending rail, the max. permitted sheet thickness may be
reduced. Consult the manufacturer for permitted values (also
refer to Chapter 1 "TECHNICAL DATA").
September 7, 1993 6-19 RAS 74.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
WORKTNG WITH THE MACHINE
6.2.10. CORRECTING THE STOP DIMENSIONS
The machine must always be switched off before conecting

the dimensions. For this, the main switch on the switchgear
cabinet must be turned off and secured with a padlock- The
padlock key.
for example, it is necessary to adjust the stop dimension afterthe rear stop has been fitted, or
lf ,
at a later date, the adjustin! screw on the rear side of the stop can be used to rnake such
conections (refer to the following figure).
A graduation nnrk on the scale disk conesponds to 0.004 inches, wherebylhe stop dimension
becomes greater when tumed to the right and smaller when tumed to the left.
Once the dimensions have been corrected, reconnect the machine to the electric system and
recalibrate the stop by pressing the "Calibrate" pushbutton'
RAS 74.20-40 6-20 S€ptemberT, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
HAS
6,2.11. PARALLEL POSITION OF THE STOP
The machine must always be switched off before parallel

positioning. For this, the main switch on the switchgear
cabinet must be turned off and secured with a padlock. The
padlock key.
The stop may - if necessary - be positioned parallelfrom the rear side of the stop.
For this, undo the hexagon-head screw slightly with a 0.75 inch wrench and slide the guide to
the appropriate side.
The guide is attached to a pivot point at the front.
t.
I
.! 1
'!
'I
Depth correction :l
i
Hexagon- I
head .l J
.i'
screw
I
Adjusting I
screw I
1
Scale disk i
I
Parallel correction I
.\j
1
l
I
September 7, 19!,3 6-21 RAS 74.20-40

Mr il TtFlFNn qnoo
WORKING W|TH THE MACHINE
Keep your hands away from the plate stop when in motion.
Observe warning notices on the plate stop.
WARNING!
KEEP TIANDS A\MAY
MOVING PARTEI
Do uot rerDove or sover thic sign I
RAS 74.20-40 6-22 S€ptomb€r7, 1993

AUXILIARY EOUIPMENT
7 AUXILIARY OUIPM E NT
7.1. TWO-PERSON OPERATION USING FOOT SWITCH
Observe Section 6.1 "OCCUPATTIIONAL DIRECTIVES" under

all circumstances.
This version of lhe nrachine is equipped with two foot switches.
According to the accident prevention regulations, the same degree of safety must be guaranteed
for all persons involved in two-person operation. lt is therefore prohibited to work with one foot
switch if the nnchine is operated by two people.
wN!
I !
MACHINES WITH ONE PEDAI SWITCH MUST BE

OPERATED BY ONE PERSON ONLY.
IVTACHINES WITH TW.O PEDAL SWITCHES CAT.I BE
oPERATED BY TWO PERSONS, BUT oNLY rN CON-
NECTTON WITI{ TEE SAFETY CONTROL "?-PER-
SON-OPERATIOI{',- IN TIIIS CASE TIIE IVIACHINE
MUST BE PROVIDED WITH A PEDAL SWITCI{ FOR
EACH OPERATOR.
Do not remove'or cover this sign !

1tl911
The key lock switch with control lamp on the rear panel of the switchgear cabinet (face) can be
used to connect a second foot switch for two-person operation (refer to the following figure and
the enclosed drawing "Switchgearcabinet RAS 74.20-40").
SeptemberT,1993 7-1 RAS 74.2G'40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
The key for this key lock switch can be withdrawn in every
position for safety rsasons to ensure that unauthorized mem-
bers of staff cannot alter the setting. The foreman or super-
visor, responsible for the machine operators, must always
take possession of the key.
Activate two-person control by tuming and pulling ofi the key lock switch.
Two-person control mode has been activated when the associated pilot lamp lights up.
To close the upper check when two-person control is active, both operators must press the
left-hand "Close upper cheel(' pedal within 3 seconds for safety reasons.
The upper cheek comes to an immediate standstill if one of the two pedals is released.
Open the upper cheek by pressing one of the two foot pedals "Open upper cheek".
Both of lhe right-hand "Automatic start" pedals must be pressed simultaneously for a shod period
to start the automatic bending sequence. The movement of the bending cheekcan be interrupted
by pressing one of the central "Emergency stop" pedals.
RAS 74.20-40 7-2 Juni 9, 1994

MIII TIBtrND qNOO
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
ffi
Pilot lamp for 3
two-personoperation
q
Key lock switch for
two-personoperation
Emergency stop switch
SeptemberT, 1993 7-3 RAS 74.2&40

MULTIBEND 9OOO
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT RAS
7.2. AIJTOMATIC TOOL SYSTEM WITH AUTOMATIC

CLAMPING
See also the enclosed "Sales documentation, automatic lool system for RAS 74.20'40'(Pages
1-13)
7.2.1. GENERAL
Only tools in the enclosed sales documentation nny be used if the machine is fitted with a holding
rail ior the automatic tool system. Rails from the standard tool system cannol be used, since the
holding rail is not interchangeable.
It is essential to ensure that the permissible sheet thick-

nesses and strengths of the sheets being bent arc not
exceeded, taking into consideration that the maximum per-
missible values can be limited both by the tools themselves
and by the machine. lt is therefore necessary to take into
account the maximum permissible value for the tools (shown
in the enctosed sales documentation) and the maximum
permissible value from the Technical Data of the machine
(see Section 1.1), whereby the respective lower value must
not be exceeded.
RAS 74.20-40 7-4 September 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
AUXILIARY EQUIPM.ENT
IRASI
.V
7.2,2. FIfiING AND REMOVING THE TOOLS
Also see Section 2.3 "Work safety instructions"
Only persons authorized to change tools may fit and remove

them. They must have first read and understood this section
of the operating instructions.
Refer to the enclosed operating instructions "CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTI-

BEND 9000 for RAS 74.2040' for detailed instructions on operaling the machine.
Open the upper cheek and secure it against lowering by using

two hardwood suppoils in the right and left side section,
approximately 80 mm x 80 mm x 300 mm long.
wooden blocks on the

left and right-hand side
i
i
Tools may only be fitted and removed when the machine is switched off.
i
I
l
Ij
September 7, 1993 7-5 RAS 7_4.20-40

MULTIBEND 9OOO l
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
This necessitates not only switching off the machine control,

but also the main switch on the control cabinet' The main
switch must be secured with a padlock whilst tools are being
fitted and removed. The person authorized to perform this
task must keep the key to the padlock on his psrson.
The toot clamp is released when the machine is switched off.
drawinq of{ lowards lhe front il
pushing in {olt'ands the rear

too I
The fitted tools can be removed towards the front.

,s
RAS 74.20-40 7-6 Septsmbor 7, 1993

MULTIBEND 9OOO
'v
lnAsl AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Caution:
Hold tools securely and do not drop them.
Other tools can be pushed into the holding rail towards the
roar.
At least two tools (two grid pieces or two corner pieces) must be fitted in the upper cheek, whereby
it is necessary to guarantee lhat at least one tool is in the left half and one is in the right half.
The tools must all be firmly pushed in towards the rear, so

ATTENTION! that they all securely rest against their support surfaces.
When you have ensured that alltools are securely fitted, you
can switch on the main switch and the control at the key-
operated switch. The tools are simultaneously clamped. The
upper cheek must then be opened slightly. To do this, press
the left foot pedal lirmly downwards as quickly as possible
beyond the pressure point into the "Upper cheek open"
position so that the upper cheek opens slightly fufther (see
Section 5.2). The hardwood supports inseded to secure the
upper cheek must then be removed again. The machine is
ready for operation again.
,.,
t.
S€ptomb€r 7, 1 993 7-7 RAS 74.20-40 I
MULTIBEND 9OOO
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
7.2.3. SCAI.E AT UPPER tsEAM
For your guidance where the single tool groups should be assembled along the upper. beam,
togeiher iritn me rnachine will be delivered a self-adhesive scale which must be fixed to the
michine. This scale is consisting of 3 parts (4 parts at the RAS 74.40) which must be composed.
It is executed for fixing alternatively tothe left or right hand side starting with "Zero". Please lgke
the starting of the holiing blade for zero position. The overstanding rest part must be cul-ofi.
scale upper beam
blade
tool
RAS 74.20-40 7-8 Aprll 26, 1994

MULTIBEND 9OOO
RAS Reinhardt Maschinenbau GmbH
Richard-Wagner- S tr. 4- I 0
D-71065 Sindelfingen
.""'?
SALES DOCUMENTS
automatic tool-system
for RAS 74.20-40
I
I
i
{
RAS tool system for the hydraulic leaf-type folding
machines RAS 74,2O4O
Suitable for the automatic tool clamping
o Retrofittable for all versions of the model RAS 74.2G40
Features of the new tool systeml

rf High-quality quenched and tempered and surface-hardened (plasma-
nitrided)
Advantages: * High bending capacity:
4 mm sheet thickness with 100 mm goat's foot height
5 mm sheet thickness with sharp blades (at 400 N/mm2 tensile strength)
Exceptions: By limited capacity of the machine
* Tool stnength about 1000 N/mm2
* l-ow wear
* Dimensionally stable
* l,arge clearances
IS Precicion ground
Advantages: * Tool sets can also be added to and exchanged subsequently
* Precice bending results
rg Laser labeling of the tools with important data: height, Iength, elearances,
RAS logo and order number
!: Advantages: * No mix-ups occur during installation
* Detailed description for subsequent orders
* Rapid identification of the correct tools
8g All tools divided

Advantages: * Tool set consisting of e. g. basic segments, adapter pieces, corner pieces
* Short set-up time
* Changing by only I person within a very short time
* Low weight (average about 7 kg)
* Any desired combination is possible
tf All tools fit the automatic tool ctamping
Advantages: * No holding rails need to be changed
* Short set-up time
* It is not necessary to remove segments from the previous order if they
are lower (less complicatcd retooling, reduced item costs)
ET Removal and fitting of toors without further devices (hexagon socket

screw key)
Advantages: * Fast rt-up
* V/o'rk simplified
39 Goat's foot tools divided up into 'Front-free" and t'Rear-free'f tools

Advantages: * Thorough utiiization of the clearances in front of or behind the tool
* Front-free up to 60 mm deep
* Rear-free from 50 mm
]e Goat's foot and sharp tools with 30o point

Advantages: * Greater prebending angles for hems
* Deep C profiles can be bent
* Quenching and tempering and hardness guaranlee stabiliry
]s Sharp tools in flat design

Advantages: * Large clearances enable superior bend.ing geometry
]s Any tool length can be achieved in 5 mm steps

Advantages: * Fast tool change by suitable length partition of basic segments, adapter
and corner pieces
* The length combinations are aulomatically determined with the
"MULTIBEND 8001" CNC control system
rs Different tool types can be combined in one setting

Advantages: * Front-free and rear-free tools can be used together
* Reduction of tool costs
* Quick set-up, since only tools for the new order have to be usd the
remaining sections can remain in the machine
!s Tool lengths are adapted to the part lengths to be bent rather than to the ii
machine length
Advantages: * Reduced tool costs
. * Rcrofitting possible at any tirne
* lrngths can be combined from various tmls with the same height
ET Holder with optimal lever ratios
Advantages: * Safe and firm holding of the tools in the upper beam
* Thick shees can also be bent with goat's foot tools
* Bending forces safely dissipued
r6F Engaging the tools during setting-up

Advantages: * Safe prefixing at the clamping position
* Unciamped tools do not fall out
F Tools can be used on machines of different lengths
Advantages: * Total tool coss reduced
€ Standard tools
Advantages: * V = Front-free, H = Rear-free
* Goat's foot tools 10OV, IOOH, 150V, 150H,200V,200H
* Shaqp blades L = 400, L = 4O,L = 60
* Retrofittable at any time
* Lower purchasing costs
* Tools can be adapted to suit requiremens
3f Special tools on request

To matchr Automatic tool clamping
Advantages: * Tools held securely when swirching-on the power

rk
No assembly tools necessary during retmling
* Tool seat: High-quality quenched and ampcred, surface hardened
(plasma-nirided)
rF
Tmls held securely
* lower purchasing costs
* Additionally with "MULTIBEND 8001": Control system informs the
operatsr, which part pieces are neccssary for combining the required tool
lengrh
* Retrofittable for all versions
* Tools can be adapted o suit requirements (the longest part determines ttre
number of necessary tools rather than the machine length)
standard
standard upper beam
tool-system RAS 74.30 automatic
+
tool.systenr
automatic
clamping I
I = 3OOO mm
I = 3OOO mm sharp tools
I = 4O '40O mm
f;n n^ffi)
,8.
A
I = 3O - 195 mm
= 3OOO mm
goat's foot tools
I=5O-B0Omm
I = 3O. 195 mm
l radius tools
i^l
3OOO m
I ,8.
A
-rA
\E
IF-F
^^ffi)
Samples of tool combinations
1.) Tool type: "Fmnt-free"

Partpiece: Closed box
I*l pq"y"ment of the sample: Adapter set, 4 basic segmenrs
Tool length: Adaited to the longitu&nal side
Fint the front edge sides, then the longitudinal sides ite fotO"O.
g a a --;!-
-H
2.) Tool type: "Front-free"

Part.piece: Closed box with inward legs at the front edge sides
Tool requirement of the sample: Adapter set, 3 basic segme"nts, corner pi eces left and
Tool length: l#Hf" the longitudinai side

First the front edge sides, rhen the longitudinal sides it" fota"A.
3.) Tool type: "Front-free"

Part_piece: Open box
I*l pquir"ment of the sample: 5 basic segmenrs
Tool length: Nor ro be idapted to the longitudinai side
First the front edge side, then the longirudinal si?fus are folded]
€
a
F
4.) Tool typc: "Rear-fre€"

Part.piece: Open box
IooJ pquirement of the sample: 3 basic segmenrs
Tool length: Nor to be adapted to tlre loneitudinal side
Fint the front edge side, then the longirudinal sides are folded]
:
B
-_ -t ---
/3-
\8"
IRASI
5.) Tooltype: "Rear-free"
piece:
Part Closed box
f*! fq"it"ment of the sample: Adapter set, 3 basic segments
Tool length Adai,ted ro the longitu&nal side
First the front edge sides, thee the longitudinal sides ire rotoeo.
e
e E B € 5 g
6.) Tool type: "Front-free" and "rear-free" in 2 stations

Part piece: Closed box
Tml requirement of the sample: Adapter set "front-free", Adapter set and 3 basic
roouengrh: .
Fint the longitudinal sides, then
xffii#i;ffiffi;edge side
the fr6nt edge sides are f6tOeO.
7.) Tool type: "Front-free" and "rear-free" in combination

Part piecc: Closed box
Tool requirement of the sample: Adapter set "front-free", Adapter set and 3 basic
roor rength:
F.gst th9
Xf#:S';lHtffitudinar side
!o.nt edge. sides are folded wiih the tools "fr5nt-free", then the longirudinal
sides wi*r tlre combined tool length. The frce space of the "rear-free" toolsis sufficient
for the short C-folding at the longitudinal side.'
F
It 6 g
s
How to select the required tool part pieces
1
a Determine tool geometry out of the range of parts:
. V-tools (front free) for profiles closing ar the front
. H-tools (rear free) for lean profiles
. Corner pieces for profiles closing at the front, 3sided or 4sided
2. Determine number of tool part pieces:

. State the longest folding part of the drawings, which should be bent with
the determined tool geomery
. a) Sharp tools:
Largest dimension : 400 mm = Number of part pieces
. b) Goat's foot tools:
- for cach tool gcontctry onc adaptcr sct is ncccssary
- the number of basic segments for each tool geometry is calculated as
follows:
Without corner pieces With corner pieces (Y) With corner pieces (H)
Largest bending iength Largest bending length Largest bending length
- 3i5 mm (ad.apter set) - 555 mm (adapter set, corner - 469 mm (adapter set, corner
pieces) pieces)
: i95 mm (basic segment) : i95 mm (basic segment) : 195 mm (basic segment)

= Number of basic segments = Number of basic segments = Number of basic segments
Ie: t ben 2670 mm

Without corner pieces With corner pieces (V) With corner pieces (H)
Largest bending length Largest bending length Largest bending length
- 315 mm (adapter set) - 555 mm (adapter set, corner - 469 mm (adapter set, comer
pieces) pieces)
.2J55 mm 2115 mm 220L mm
: 195 mm (basic segment) : 195 mm (basic sesment) : 195 mm (basic segment)
= L3 basic segments = Ll basic segments = 1"2 basic segments
JAT"
IRASI
=E-
G G
r- r.-r. G G
t-- G s qs
- r---r - a
= r-r r-''l
- a
= r-)
_
=
@
a
t-.l
=
'Front-free'-tools
Adapter set consisrin g of 7 pafl pieces (l = 30, 3'5, 4A,45, 50, 55, 60 mm)
basic segment I= i95 mm
Comer piece, left hand i = 120 mm
Comer piece, right hand I = 120 mm
G
r-1
e G
-E--
@
f-r s
c.-,'
= -
=
S
t-r
sa
C---r fiR'
-e/
-J a
"Hear-free"-tools
Adapter set consisting of 7 part pieces (l = 30, 35,40,45, 50, 55, 60 mm)
Basic segment I = 195 mm
Comer piece, left hand I =77 mm
Corner piece, right hand I = 77 mm -Fq'
IRAS
-F
Sharp tools
basic segment I = 400 mm
Adapter piece I = 60 mm
Adapter piece I = 4O mm
cnane suspens I 0n
tttachine withoul back stop
HAS 7 4 .20 9700 lbs (4400 kg)

HAS 7 4 .?5 10600 lbs (4800 kg)
BAS 7 4 ,3A 1 1700 lbs (5300 kg)
BAS 74.4A 13900 lbs (6300 kg)
max. 120'
hook
ho ok
Bemove unconditjonallV hooks

Attent i on!
pni on to i ni ti al openati onl
(dnive in sealing plug jnto thnead - keep hooks)
BAS 74.20-25-30-40
L
" MULTiBEND gOOO '' 05.03.93 FischeP
cnane suspensl 0n
RAS 74.20 t0270 lbs. (a000 kg)

RAS 74.25 11195 lbs. (5070 ks)
BAS 74.30 12344 lbs. (55s0 kg)
RAS 74.40
back stop width 118 . 11" 14540 lbs. (6590 ks)
t RAS
back
74.40
stop wi dth !57 .AB' 15040 lbs. (6820 kg)
\\ \\
\\ \\ n0!
mox r20'
\\
\\
\x
FAS 7 4 .?0-25-30-40
L
'' MULT]BEND 9OOO.'
-t
CNANE SUS ension back stop page 1 of 2
FAS 74.20-25*30-40
''MULTIBEND 9OOO,'
BAS 74.20 570 lbs (260 kg)

RAS 74.25 595 ibs Q7a kg)
HAS 74.30 640 lbs (aso kg)
RAS 74.40 640 ibs (2e0 ks)
back stop l^Ji dth 118.11"
lbs. (2x260 kg)
# RAS
ba ck
74.40
stop wi dth r57.48"
2x570
2 suspensron noDes of same length
I Attention! Do not od16gs

Dneumatjc pr pes, eleliri c
cables and mechani cai Dants
Step 2
Spot to r';ooden beam
Step 1
Unload and suspend
Attention! Do not spot here

(scale disc and screw)
iiooden beam
Height 12" , length about 60'
L
.,|
cnane suspension back stop page 2 of 2
FAS 7 4 ,?0-25-30-40
,'MULTIBEND
90OO "
Step 3
Brlng back stop jnto hon ontal posjtion
Attent i oni
Bning back stop canefullV
fnom venti cal i nto
honizontal posrtion.
Do not damaqe moton and
electri c tenmi nal-box
Dniving motor' Electric tenminal-box
Back sto
0e 05 t osition
Dniving moton
L
RAS RAS HAS BAS 74 40
rith stop rith Btop
7 4.20 14 .25 74.30 {in ttl I {i7 rn'
L1 inches 134.25' 153.94 " 179.92" 2t3.78' 213.78',
L2 inches 88 .58' !08.27' 134.25 " 168.11' 169.11'
L3 inches 92.52' !t2.20' 138 . 19', 172.05' 172 . 05',
L4 inches 116.14' 135 . 83' 161.81' 195 . 67' 195.67"
L5 inches 80.3" 100' 126' 126' 161.02' Ain connection R1/4
xisht lbs 10270 11195 12340 14540 15040 tnin. pnessune 87 lb/in 2
xight kg 4660 5070 5590 6590 6820
t? ll
Connection to mains
JI
Powen ne inement 11 kl'{
3.15'
stop depth B max
tli'aulic tank
g)
61.02'
{ t- o
inches 78.7 4', o
o)
|-\ Free space fon opening the
80 .71' inches 98.42" @ doon of lhe contnol cabinet
100.39" inches !24.o?',
120 .08' inches 142.52' CU .q.
139.76
-
inches t6?.?L',
(.o
ra
i1 only with O Qrlrl
cr) li movable tneadle switch
159 . 45' inches 181 .89' CU t- J- Free space fon swivelling the
:.=l:-
r----1
l---l
iiow with controi panei
rl-
,t ---J L
r
cu
(t)
1
I
!
e(o li_sjj
s 6
Minimum distance to ambient
'. fixed pants > 20" ?
12.48" ? 1.14"
4 7 .24"
bout 28.54" IF
JD
The gnound must be dimensioned
46" 77 .72"
r
.66
satisfactonily in orden to take
up the weight of machine with
t
adequate safety.
I
7 .97"
r n
Fastenin g bolts do not belong
@
o)
ct)
to oun s upp 1y
JJ
5
O .s
o) +
7 .87 (r)
.<r
0.24'
lr)
H
nail only with
H Fasten i bolts 5/8"-11
movable tneadle switch Vide dnawing (Illustnation
fon fastening to the gnound.)
1993 l.q llare

Foundationplan for
-
l@ RAS 7 4 .?0-25-30-40
O 7106€ SINOELFINGEN REI NHANOT BCTPb 3.6 Fischen
l.IASCHIl{EN8AU
RI CHABI]-YAGNER-STR. .+- 10 G11 BH 0ctr
lbfa
svvivel bending ntachine i{ULTIBEND 9OOO
s/8" 5/8', 5/8-tt hex nut 5/8'
!1l washe n
f--
I
l-- |-\
r.rl l.r) LN
_i _l
I I
f with
I gnout hene
1,
Steel plate fon alinement

I
I
5/8-11 bent
,l of the machine ( anchon bolt
1
about 8.0 " 1S
to
m
\ ul
co
cr)
ri
j
i
a ,
a 2" x2"
I
:
J
:.
.t
t-
I
:
I.
t
BEINHARDT MASCHINENBAU
1993 Taq Nane t
i.
Iiirrstnation fon fastening FAS 7 4.?0-25-30-40
l(onkun.!nzf 1nf,n zugraf,gllsh grBcht t nbH
9eanb
6epn
5.3 No th
to lhe gnound
(v ide foundat ion p lan, too)
,
renden. D-7032 S I N DELFINGEN Nonn
,
I
MULTIBEND 9OOO
Set in line by means of a fname
water level at guidings-in case P1ace fname waten levei at suppont
detach covens of guidingsl of lower beaml (Uppen beam opened)
1
I
J
'l
j!
.A
!
1
note
ned to red
een to neen
E Fname waten level as measuning instrument

Fname waten level mini.mum accunacy 0.0012" each 3 feet
qln! lxlilF€ Srorhrlgunl drrt dic!€ 1991 Tao Nare

Illchnung ndrr kopicFL noch vrFylll- RET NHAROT MASCHI NENBAU .tt instal lation p lan fon RAS 7 4 .20-25-30-40
@
Searb 7 Fischen
txltigt, noch drlttcn Plptonrn odlr
GmbH
Xs*l,Fmrztlrxn rugilnellch gilacht
O.TO32SINOELFINGEN
Seon
llora.
si,vivel bending rnachine MULTIBEND 90OO
2000 6 7 2000
I 000 l 000
500 500
?00 2 + 5 200
50 50
0p erot i nq hours 0 0
*
I
I
\
_-t'
The Iubrtcotlon tnsfruclion cocr.esponds to fhe recommendottons of DIN 8659

ft
Non-tndlcofed lubrtcoirng potnts e.g.
beorlngs. gutdes. sptndles. geor teeth
ond lotnis for monuol qdJustrnenl ore to
roch I n. corpon.nts hydrou I
tonl
tc ol I brortn no I nlononcr rcrrr ond
ptndlr unti
odjurlrrnt
rhrrl drtvr rptndir
rollec
chqln
bevol
vheelg
rccd
d
!ua
bE lubrtcoied os regulred.
Iubrlcoilon lnl ? 4 5 6 7 I
t:
ryrbol
of lubrtcstton
t: lc' FG / / { ,/
/> Lubrtcoilng potnts 4-8 on bolh stdesl
3a
(h) 200 2000 2000 2000 o1 frequent odlusiment reosonoble rnore
rrlubrlcolr (h) zo0 200
crchon (h) 2000 dlsmount cover pIote
chrcl ond to (h) I
is0 3+98-1979
lubrleoni to
DIN 8659 T.z
lubrlcqnl foblr RAS 6 E F F F F
contolnrr (gcllr,) 2t 0_ 13
Ohrr rnr*r Grnohrrgrr3 derl dtrrr 1993 T Nor.

Z. l.h.r.! rrdrc lrl r rrl REiNHARDT t{As CHINENBAU Lubricoting instructicn for RAS 7 4 .24 -?5- 30 - 40
t..ltl!t. n.Gh d.rt+.r
Krrlcrrrrrf tnrr rrgceagltoh glrchl
9-7 t90l @ D-7032 S I
GnbH
NDEL FINGEN :swivel bending mochine HULTIBEND 9OOO
Grease Schedule l,laker's Cocle -
For greasing of 0un machines t'te recommened using the foliowing greases
BAS-Maken's code A B 0 0 E F
greasing oil fo hydraulic oiI with special oil fon pneu- oil
gnease for glide-and gear gnease fon
des ignat ion gean and bearings detengent effect matic service unit
specral gean
antifriction bearing open pinions
v lsK0s 1r,y v lsK0s 1 [y vrsK0srty v lsK0s r ry
46 cSl to 104 F 46 cSt to 104 F 10 cSt to 104 F 220 cSt to 104 F
lrn' nl I An' cl /n' nl
f 1,4n. nl
BP Enmgol tlf-t) 8P Energol HLP
w
46 10
BP Enrgol ILP 16 BP Energol CR-XP 220 BP Energrease LS 2 BP Enengol GR 3000-2
BP Energol HLP-D 46 BP Auto
BP Energol 6R-XP 46
m luto Hydnaullc 0ll 16 Hydraulic 0i1 10
BP Gear Oit EP 90 BP Energnease L2 BP Enengoi WRP
E 5S0 Nuto H46 xD3+20l{20 Spinesso 10 Spartan EP 220 Beacon 2 Sumett Fluid 4 K
Menopa 220 HulLifak 20

Hando 46 Cnater Special 2xFluid
Alcon 0D 46 Rando HD A 10 Geartex EP-A l'{ultifak EP2
Rando H0 B 46 Cnaten Special 5xFluid
80l,|-90 Texando F0 20
Hobil 0IE 25 l,lobil t)TE 25 Hobil Velocite 0il Mobilgean 630 Mobilux
Mobil Hobll 0elvac !210 Hobil Delvac 1210 No. 6 l'lobilube GX B5li-90-A l,lob i iux
2
EP2
Shell Tellus Oil 46

Shell Hydnol D0 46 Shell Tellus 0il 10 Sheil 0nala 0il 220
Shell Alvania Sheil l'lalleus Fluid C
Shell Fotella T lOH Grease 2 Shell l'lalleus Fluid t]
0rder of indicated gnease manufacturers nteans no classification of grease quality

00.00F 1 I
4Q"
D - 71065 SINDELFINCEN Te]. 07031 863 0- -
llnTsl REINHARDT
l:wl
I{ASCH I NENBAU
RiCIIARD-hIAGNEF_STR. 4-10 TELEFAX 07031-863-185 I
GMBH
t-JJ r\
't
lubnication ii tank
l
oi
gener-a I
lubr-ication,
i: fill in, inlet
centnal lubri cati on

system f or- oii, [; dnaining, outiet
manua I
centnal lubr'i cat i on

,/>
tt system fon oi I,
automat i c
t) J
I
exchange tank content
gnease lubr i cat i on, -l L

r T-t-
rL_______H
genena 1
l.t- |
ievel i ndi cator
centr-al lubnicati cn .-l.-

system fon gnease, l-E---l fill up to level
manua I
centnaI lubni cat i on

system fon oi l, separaton, genera 1
automat i c
gnease lubr i cat I on

*: f i I ten, genena I
wi th bnush
Symbol descniption
fon lubrication instnuction
{.12.199t Fischer
L
Sharp rail 45
o
Adjustment o{ loven beam and folding beam for {olding till 135'
z.B. e=1, 25xC. 12"=0. 15" e=1,25xs

Folding beam
90' posilion Sha 45
centen of notation
Fo beam of initia tion
lower beam
Hound nail
Adjustment of lowen beam and folding beam
z.B. e= (0.59"+0.08") =0.67" fl= R+s

Folding beam
180'position
round nail
I R
C\J
r0n
T
T d n beam of init t 0n
lowen beam
Sach-Nr Werkstcff Rohmo1e Bemerkung

Silck Benennung
Ohne unsere Genehnigung ddti dtese

Zeichnung weder koprcrt, noch veNtel' REINHARDT MASCHINENBAU
fiitiigt, noch dritten PeEonen oder GmbH
Konkunenzhmen z ugonglic h gemoc hl S
ZO32 SINDELFINGEN
6 1 u.1l des Gesetzes von 19. 7.190il
Tag Nome Mallstoh

Bedrb
Exampleof adjustment for folding
6epr
for swivel bending machine
Aus-
gabe Anderurig Tag Name
Venti lation fi lten
{ m
ogo
i n swi tch
Control panel
(vide sepanate and attached
openatrng jnstructions Signal lamp fon
"NC control MULTIBEND 9000") executj on "worki ng
with 2 openators"
(opt i onal extna)
Kev-openated switch fon

execuljon "working
with 2 openatons"
(opt i onal extna)
Emengency swi tch

{"
lug contact fon

sheet back stop
Contnol cabi net

HAS 74.20-25-30-40
MULTIBEND 9OOO
L
.t
Gnaph fon detenmination of max. sheet thickness to be folded

as a function of the folding length and the tensile stnength
Diagnam is nefenned to standand blade of 45" fon the
uppen beam and folding blade of 1.18" width.
Max. sheet thickness may be neduced using diffenent
blades. Admissible values to be inquined at the
manufactunen.
0.32
0.3
2
0.28 29000 1b/in
(n 0,26
OJ
_c.
(J
C 0.?4
-r-l 2
43500 lblin
C
.d
0.22
U)
(n
CJ 2
C, 0.2 58000 1b/in
.:Z
(J
.d
-c
JJ
0. 18
72500 lb/in 2
.{-J
2
o)
o) 0. 16 87000 lb/in
.C 2
a t0 1500 1olin
0. 14
0. 12
0.1
0.08
80
folding iength in inches
When bending nannow sheets, j,nsent dummy sheets of

the same thickness between uppen and lowen beaml
Stilck Benennung Soch-Nr Werkstoff RohmoDe Bemerkung
Ohne unsere Genehmigung doi dese

Zeichnung weder koprcft, noch verytel- REINHARDT MASCHINENBAU
ftltigl. noch dritten Personen oder
Ko nkutrenz hme n z ugdnghc h gemac ht Gm bH
werden.
lS 1 u. ll des 5esetzes von 19. 7. 1901)
ZO32 SINDELFINGEN
{ qq,1 Tag Nome l,la/1slab

Beorb. 12 11 Not-h Penfonrnance gPaph fon
6epr
swivel bendlng machine
Aus-
RAS 7 4 .20
gobe Anderung Tog Nome
1
Gnaph fon detenmination of max. sheet thickness to be foided

as a function of the folding iength and the tensile stnength
Diagnam is nefenned to standand blade of 45' fon the
Max. sheet thickness may be neduced using diffenent
manufactunen.
0.28
\
0.26 2
29000 lblin
\
0.24
0.22 I
t
2
43500 ]b/in
(u
C 0.2
-v
(J
.d
E
1) 2
0. 18 58000 lblin
-tJ
o.)
OJ
(n
2
0. 16
72500 lblin
\ 87000 1b/in2
0. 14 2
101500 lb/in
0. 12
foiding iength in inches
When bending nannow sheets, insent dummy sheets of

the same thickness bettleen uppen and lowen beam!
Stdck Benennung Sach-Nr We*stoff Rohma0e Beme*ung
Ohne unsere Genehmigung dot'f drcse

Zeichnung weder kopiert, noch veNiel' REINHARDT MASCHINENBAU
fijltigt, nach drilten PeEonen oder (,mbH
Konkutrenzhme n z ugain glich g emoc hl
werden. ZO32 SINDELFINGEN
rc I u. ll des Geseizes vom 19. 7 1901)
I qq,1 Tag Name Mallstob

Beorb. {3 ,1,1 Nnth Penfonrnance gnaph fon
6epr.
swivel bending machine
RAS 7 4 .25
Aus- Nome
gobe Anderung Tag
1
Gnaph fon detenmination of max. sheet thickness to be folded

as a function of the folding length and the tensile stnength.
upper beam and folding blade of 1.18" width.
Max. sheet thickness may be reduced using diffenent
manufactunen.
0.32
0.3
0.28
al{ 0.26
orl
-cl
0.24
2
29000 ]b/in
t;l 0.?2
0.2
el
c-,l 2
.dl I 43500 lb/in
0. 18
5l
0. 16 58000 ]b/ina
HI
72500 Ib/in2
0. 14
2
87000 1blin
0 t2 101500 1b/in2
0.1
0.08
I
folding length in inches
l^Jhen bending nannow sheets, insent dummy sheets 0f

the same thickness between uppen and lower beaml
Stuck Benennung Soch-Nr We*stoff RohmolJe Bemerkung
Ohne unsere 6enehmigung dad diese

Zeichnung weder kopiert, noch veryrcl' REINHARDT MASCHINENBAU
f.jltig!. noch dritten Pe6onen oder Gm bH
Konkune n zltnen z ug dnglic h gemoc ht
werden. 7032 SII.IDELFINGEN
lS I u.11 des 6esetzes von 19. 7. t901)
{ oo1 Tog Nome Mallslob

8eorb. 41 14 Nnfh Penfonrnance gnaph fon
6epr
Nom.
I
svlive benoing machine
Aus-
RAS 74 30
gobe Anderung Tog Ncme
1
Gnaph fon detenmination of max. sheet lhickness to be foided

as a function of the folding length and the tensile stnength
Max. sheet thickness may be neduced ustng diffenent
manufactunen.
0,24
I \
\ \
t \
.22
\\
0
\t
t I
t \
u.t \
6 \
a)
-c.
(J
0.
\
.d
C. 18
\
\ 2
c \ 29000 lblin
.d
0. 15
\
lt)
a
(Lt
c
ll
U 0. 14 2
. r.l 43500 Ib/in
.C
-+-J
1-)
\
o) 0.12 58000 lb/in 2
OJ
-c.
(n
2
72500 \blin
0 1
\-- 2
-r 87000 1b/in
2
101500 1b/in
0.08
a
0.06
0 I
84
folding length in inches
When bending nannow sheets, insent dummy sheets of

the same thickness between uppen and lowen beaml
Stdck Benennung Sach-Nr Werkstoif Rohmalle Bemerkung
2hne unsere Genehmigung dorf diese

Zeichnung weder kopiert, noch veniel- REINHARDT MASCHINENBAU
fciltigt, noch dritten PeEonen oder
K onkure nz hmen z ugtinglic h gemoc hl GmbH
werden.
(S 1 u 11 des Gesetzes von 19. 7.1901) /032 SINDELFINGEN
{ aol Tag Nome Mollstob
Bearb 13 .1.1
Nnth Penfonmance gFaph fon
6epr
svvivel bending machine
Aus-
RAS 7 4 .40
gdbe Anderung Tog Nome
F, :';11-i?
T -t I
n0 denomi nat i on type manu f actunen part-no
I d-moton xith thern.-protect 132 t4/4 0ietz 153 891
lllan0tlleten
I punp t{ith intennal gean IPH 4-?5 Voith 093 850
cOnnecti0n T 1r
th 11 contnol block !n-4u94-10 / !
?i-, Nr.5 3 Aros/Bosch
147 48A
4 pilot control block 1A-4t/94-?0/ t Anos/Bosch
5 additional contnoi block 1R-41/191-10 Aros/Bosch t47 4Bt

Y8
I,
24V hydnaulic-cyl inden RAS 130 887
J I
Nn tr
J J 7 rotary piston cyjinden LDK 2OO Sue dhydrau I ik 130 410
-'t
I
L- netunn filten 67 301 62 286 l.lann und Hunmel 135 407
24U I F'$yt. 12
I spaPe cantnidge H68/1 67 301 56 196 Mann und Hulllll}el 135 408
I
uppen beaIIl
Y6
10 filling filter 02 200 21 002 Mann und Hunnei 135 406
v -- tl pilot contnolled check valve RH3V
l,k' 11 Hawe 131 105
Nr.6
-J I rY' L? pressure relief valve svc 53F-12 Hawe 131 103
I
I
Y15
I, _J t3 pressune nelief valve svc 53F-60 Hawe 13t 104
24U I
-1
14 hydr. pressune switch 9059
'": 'suco
Y)
I
IF.' I
I
135 315
TE
IJ propont. cunnent negul. valve SE 3 3P G24 Hawe 132 200
Nr.4 I
Nr. 14 I
L 16 nanspanent-f lexib le tube n0.720 F is chen 057 840
down Y5 I
set up fon I
Nr. 12 l7 nubben oil tube 0.98'x1.18' Heigelt und Soehne 097 140
B3
:,60-435 ]b/in'
uppen bealfl I
I
up Y4
24V
Nn.3 Set up values of valves no. 12 at
down
!{.''.7
RAS - 290.1 lblin
74.20 2
(
FAS 74.25 - 362.6 tblin
24U
folding beam
RAS 74.30 - 435.1 lblin
2
up ( n
24V e7o tb/in2

folding beam RAS 74.40 - 507.6 lblin
X1
-1
-- Stuak Bertennun-o Sach-Nr Werkstoff Rohmo0e Beme*ung
Nr. 13
Nn.15 --l- L Nr.7
Ohne unsere Genehmigung dorl dese
Zerchnung weder kop!erl, noch veNEl.
lititigl, noch ditten Persanen oder
REINHARDI MASCHINENBAU
YT Konkune nzhme n z ugongiic h ge mdc ht GmbH
I werden
24U (S i u ll des Gesetzes vom 19 7 l90ll ZO32 SINDELFINGEN
l.ln.2
Nn. l0 10.2 ga11s./min 1993 Taq Name Ma1stab
Nn.1 Beorb 4.3 Noth Hydnau ic-contno 1-diagnam
1
Nn. 17 n=180QU/min eep. with equipment iist
9 kH .i..
.B/s Nn.16
-t ,rj i
RAS 7 4.?A-25-30-40
tank 21 Aus-
I
L_ _J gabe Anderung Tag I

Name MULTIBEND 9OOO
Nn.6
Nr .4 Nn .5
Nr .2 Nr .3 Nn .7
Y9 Y10
\ T t \ T Y17
24U 2AU
fto
I
L
Nn. I set up fon E7 lb/in?
rdlttlonal teatures
dutomatic t00l-systen rith automatic clanping
p0s denollli nat i on tYPe nanu facturer orden-no
No.825H
service unit R 1/4 Biegler 043 120
rith 75/l
h! uler G.dl$n! dr.l !l.s
t solenoid vrlre t{0FH-3-16 FestD t32 587 IrfrqldbtL.r.@YRI.F
lltrql. norn flrtm hrromn dr O - 71065 SINOELFINGEN -4. f,Et t{8rnDr
tmlrr.rltsnn rqbElGn !frrchl
FICHMO-YAGNEF-STF. {.O IRASI MSCH I t{E}rBrU
GI.IBH
solenoid vaive t32 587 (t I !. x 6 hE€ hr E-t.r$tl
r'roFH-3-l'15 Festo
I!g =t' HaBs lab
1 cylinden ESN 20-25P Festo It4 609 Jearb. F i scher
epa Pneumatic cincuit diagnam
5 cylinder EsN e0-25P It1 609 Nott.
6 clanoing rril cDl RAS 156 oil

RAS 74.20-25-30-40
30lenoid YBIYe ilFH-3-H5 FesIo t25 604
MULTIBENO 9OOO
.!",.
RI=GLER & CO KG
7417 URACH/WURTT.
Fcstiach 1309 Telefon @7125\ 29't+292
TeckstraBe
Germany
7 Telex 07245519
- Alemania
ffi EAEEffiLEtrR
Druckluft-Armaturen
lnsiallation and Operating lnstructions

for Maintenance Units
\.9-:
nlFr
and lubricators and serve the
Normally, maintenance units consist of oil ancj water s€parators, pressure reducers
particles, controlling the air
purpos€ of cleaning operationally useci compressed air from liouici and solid {oreign
pressure and permeating the air with finely disperseci oil for lubricating cylinders, valves' air'controlled tools and
rhe iike.
the efiiciency of pneumatic
uJhes prooerly used to match the peninent operating conditions they will stabilize
systems and increese their life.
"r''
l nstallation;
- PRESSURE REDUCER
Sequence :n normal cases (in direction o{ arrow) OIL AND WATER SEPARATOR
l-UBRtCATOR. wirh the SHORTEST POSSIBLE DISTANCE towarci source.
Oil ancj water seParator:

like. which attack pneumatically con-
Compressed air contains conciensate, pipe line scale, rust panicles and the
trolled anC operated tools, pressure cylinCers, valves, etc. and have a disruptive influence on their function'
The purificarion of the compressed air is therefore an indispensable requirement, which is effected by an oil and
vJater s€paratof.
(standard 50'75 my) of sinter fil'
The delree of cleaning from solid and liquid particles depencis on the pore size
ter. Filters raith smaller pore size can be optionally installed'
Pressure reducer:
(for examp'
The line pressure of a compressed air system fluctuates in accordance with the size of the compressor
g5-j40 '140-230 psi etc.i. Presure reducerswill reduce this fluctuating line-pressure (initial pressure) to the
le or
C:sired operaring Pressure.
Lubricator:
and reliable lubri'
The lubricator enriches the compressed air with a fine oii fog and thereby.provides a constant
cation of pneumatically controlied air.operated tools, cylinders, valves eti..
Oil and water separaior:

lvlaintenance: Drain condensate daily, if possible. Clean filter insen regularly' :
Locsen screw connection, remove container, remove fastening nut from sinter
filter, take out
Disassembly:
filter into solution (for example gasoline, tri etc.). shake well and dry, then reinstall'
filter, ptace
. Watch olt ior Perfect sealing:
Pressure reducer: No maintenance required.

of pressure reducers
Maintenance units are normally using pressure reducerswith reversing controls. The advantage
reversing controls is tirat ifte pressure ciin be reduced witnout a need for bleeding air by simply turning
employing
pneumatic controls will be conducted into
the conrrol screw backwards. ln addition, the reactions which occur with
valve' which will in"turn protect the
the open air by the reversing controll, wl'rich serves simultaneously as a saiety
3ressur3 oau03.
Acijusting the pressure:
Prior to operating the compressed air line the pressure rcducer must h relieved by turning the control screw out.
Then the control screw is again turned in clockwise direction until the pressure gauge on the pressure reciucer in-
dicates the desired operating pressure.
Lubricator:
Models No.745 A and B, 750 A and B, 760 C.
Please note:
The operation of a standard lubricator depends on the underpressure which is created in the iight glass of the lu'
bricator by the air flow. A MINIMUM OPERATING PRESSUBE OF 7 psi is required. ln addition, the air consumP
tion (air flow) stated bn the table must be maintained.
lnstallation:
Filler screw forward (the lubricators operate in any directionl, check pipe line for cleanliness prior to installation
of lubricator (pipe line scale, thread-cutting chips, hemp, etc.).
gi1 grade:
2.6-7oE {16-55 cst) at sooc fiz2oFl.
ln special cases consult the lubrication engineering depanments of the oil companies, whose engineers are available
at any time ior non-binding and free-of-charge advice covering all lubrication engineering problems.
Filiing in of oil:
Disconnect air passage, remove filler screw, fill container up to filling mark (approx. 2/3). Close filler screw well again.
Dosing:
Set requireci oil quantity (drops per minute) during operation on dosing screw as required. Number of drops is shown
in si_oht glass.
' ",:
Operating pressilre for oil and water separator and lubricator:

with plastic container made of LURAN (blue) max. 142 psi
with plastic container made of CELLIDOR (yellow) max. 228 psi.
Operating te mrr€ ratu Fe:

with plastic container made of LURAN (blue) 10 to+sooc (50 to 122oF)
with plastic container made of CELLIDOR (yellow) 70oc (1sBoF).
Cleaning of plastic container:

Clean plastic containers with water, kerosene or gasoline only. NEVER USE BENZOLE, ACETONE' CLEANING
COMPOUNDS CONTAINING TRI {TRICHLOROETHYLENE) OR THE LIKE'
Minimum air con:umpticin of lubricators in m3/h should not iall belacr the values uncjerneath.
Pressure atE 2 4 6
lr''odel 745AR1/8" cu.m/h 2,5 3,4 4.5
Model 745B R114" cu.m/h 5,0 6,4 7,6
Model 750 B cu.mlh 5,0 6,4 I
o
Model 750 A cu.m/h 5,0 6,4
Model 750 C cu,mlh 21,O 26,0 40
Minimum air conermption was measureci with oil of 2.8oE (sOoC).
Oil for light loads Oil for lreavy loads

Aral CMS ?E E Aral CMU J,b E
BP HP 1O 2,7 E BP HP 20 4,2 E
Seramit 2 2,4 E DEA Seramit 4 4,8 E

DEA
Esso Lssttc 42 2,8 E Esso' Esstic 50 4,7 E
Gasolin TU 504 11 E Gasolin . TU 518 4,5 E
Mobil D.T.E. Oil Light ,o E Mobil D.T.E. Oil Meciium 3,9 E
Shell Tellus Ol 27 3.0 E Shell Tellus 29

ol 4,0 E
Valvoline ETC Light 3.0 E Valvoline ETC Lisht 10 4,5 E
Veedol Avalon 50 3,0 E Veedol Avalon 60 5,0 E

a
[\
^/l
c lamp i ng puIT)p
automat i c pnessune pnessune
,}
hydrau I i c c ontno i mai n-swi tch
(
.<.-.> N.C
back stop sheet-suppont electnonic
Explanation of
sVrnbols for folding rnachines
page I of 2 4. 12. 1991 Fi scher
L
a
q\ /
(
I\ ?
folding-leaf folding-leaf angle ?

up down
I t
^/ ^/
\ I \
upper uppen beam
ciamping
bearn
open i ng
stant / on
t:
stop / off all stop ad j ustment
Explanat jon of
R s sVrrtbols fon folding ntachines
paqe 2 of 2
4. 12. 1991 Fi scher
L
A
Irlax . p late-
vlonking length th ickness we ight
P
in
I
p0l^len
I'
i: nequ ined stnoke pnessuPe
l-]
ry
natune of cunnent
wonking voltage 1 ine-fuse
A.C
=flt=
nomina I altennat ing
cunnent cunnent contno l-tens ion
Explanation of
HA$ syrnbols fon type-plates
- 4.le.19-ql Flechen
****************rr*******************t(?t****t(******:k***:rc******rk**************
* Pro l ektverzeichnis Datum z t4 . LO .9 4 Seite : l-
* Pro j ektpfad /usr/arclTcs/
***********?t*********************************************Jr*****************
Projekt I oatenblock (mehrzeilig)

RAS74 -9 0l_1UC Proj . bez. : SWTVEL BENDING MACHINE RAS74. OO
23 Auftrag : 208V 60HZ USA; 2'SPTNDEL STOP; SIo
Zeichnung: s 74.00 / 90L1UC
Beschreib: SWTVEL BENDTNG MACHINE WTTH SERVO-HYDRAULTC DRTVE
RAS 74.00 WITH CNC-PROGRAM CONTROL MULTTBEND 9OOO
US-EXECUTION ; COLORMONfTOR ; 8mm STOP UPPERBEAM
BACK STOP WITH 2-SPTNDEL DC-SERVODRTVE;
SIO-CARD FOR STOP WIDTH UP TO 4OOONNI
***?k*t(*********:t:k**tr*******************************************************
Ende der Liste
tk*:k*tk**t *******************************************************************
* Blat--rrerzeichnis Datum i 14.Io.94 seite: L
l€**i.**:xlh*******************************************?k***********************
* Pro)eYt : RAS74-90L1UC * Reinhardt Maschinenbau GmbH
* Proj.bez.; SWfVEL BENDING MACHfNE RAS74.00 :i Richard-Wagner-Str. 4-l-O
* Zeletznung: S 74.00 / 91LLV3 * D-71-065 Sindelf ingen
x Alrfaraq : 208V 60HZ USA; z-SPTNDEL STOP; S* TeI.:0703L/863-O
r******:2* ******** * ********** ***** ** ****************** ** ** *******************
::::::==:=====================:=:=========:===:======:==:=:=========::=====
Ort I etattUezeichnung Inratt loaturn luane
::=:=---:::=:===::=:::=:::::=:==========:==========:::============:=========
Anlage:
::::::=-=:=========::===::::::========::=======:::=:::=:::===========:=====
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 07 .LA.94 KOO
CTRCUIT DIAGRAM 2 07 .LO.94 KOO
CIRCUIT DTAGRAM a
J 07 .1,O.94 KOO
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 4 07 .LO.94 KOO
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 5 07 .to.94 KOO
CTRCUIT DIAGRAM 6 07 .]-0.94 KOO
CTRCUIT DTAGRAM 7 07 .to.94 KOO
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 6 07 .1"0 .9 4 KOO
CTRCUTT DTAGRAM 9 07 .1"O.94 KOO
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 10 07.LO.94 KOO
CTRCUIT DIAGRAM t_ l_ 07 .LO.94 KOO
CIRCUIT DTAGRAM L2 07 .L0.94 KOO
CIRCUTT DIAGRAM 13 07 .L0.94 KOO
CTRCUIT DIAGRAM L4 07.LO.94 KOO
CONNECTION DIAGRAM l_5 07 .LO.94 KOO
CONNECTTON DTAGRAM 1,6 07 .LA.94 KOO I
CONNECTTON DTAGRAM t7 07 .L0.94 KOO

CONNECTION DIAGRAM L8 07 .LO.94 KOO
CONNECTION DIAGRAM 19 07 .LO.94 KOO
CONNECTTON DIAGRAM 20 07 .1-O .9 4 KOO
CONNECTION DIAGRAM 2t 07 .lj-O.94 KOO
TNSTALLATION SCHEME 22 a7 .LO.94 KOO
INSTALLATION SCHEME 23 07 .LO.94 KOO
Xtk*tk**t*************tr*?t****:l****:k?k**********)k*********t(*t(:k:k*)t*)t****tr*******
Ende der Liste
2 3 4 5 5 7
rl3 I l3 I t!
FF-
\,,
rp-
o2 03
\ l4
07
\ l{
i- t i- ^q
I
32-48R1288v ?,4-4F /?BBY ? I ?,4-4F/2@8U z
0l
IKI lKz lK6 lK7

t9.2 /3.5 t1.2 l{ /4.3 l4 31
IIOII FUSED EHPIH CONNECTOR

GPOUII D
XI XI
)
I
XI XI
X5
PE PE
ITEIZ-ZULE]TUI.IG
IIET CFBLE B8
4r5mm2
.
':HBLE 5Rf EIY D,J\,,If-T, MI 113 H5
209\.' 5OA TRREGE
0.tBKt.l 0.4 2tc^l
HYORRULIC
Z 08V;368i60H2;9,0K1{ FOLDIIiG BERIl LOHER BEHI'I
FOJ US I RDJUST
208 V;2,95fl;60H2; 28 8V;3,72R;68H Z;
Uttun Nn6a 0ltuo Nahc 8!r. Zal€hn.-Nr.i
07.la.94 -4. REINHERDT IlRSCHINENBRU CIRCUIT DIRGRRH s 74.OO ./ solluc

9.r- K00
laAsl
'trff D-7I865
GnbH
SINDELFINGEN
ProJ.ltb.z, nullr!g! Bl.1 I
14.18.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCIIINE RRS24.OA ?0BV 68HZ USR; Z-SPINBEL ST0P; SI0
^'
2 3 4 5 6 7 I lLr
lL3
I, T5
K2 F1 OUTPU
INOU -POl|IER
r8.2 +24V
XI t5
t3
{3
rp- 41
04 i-
\ l.l
Nut
--f
2,4-{F nl I
i0ev R! RI RI RI FI
/t3.a /t3.< /t3.4 /11.1 /t3.4
36
gc d3 o{ d5 d6
-,{
Ltj'
K5 K5
/t2.X /8-7
K4
/8,1
GI XI 2 XI 3
X5 2 X5 3
t3
rlt3
:$) * 52 Sl o-
.if; 22 Ir 22 \ l4
I'F I € R XI l8 XI 20 XI 6
I
rn
\=/ X5 t6 X5 l7 X5 l8 X5 26 X5 6
'$'
7
* )L
@
-x /n :1,1
/t\ * @
Y2 X- Y3 X- Y4 Y5 X- Y6 X-
?
Xlr x5l 1 Xit

- 21'/
-,L "rl
i
..
b
$
FOLDiIIb BEBII UPPER BENN
PRENSURI RtLIFSI
n D0l.lN OPtN
CIRCU,LRT]OI'I
iJ4
4--
RLL VELVES HRE PROVIDTD SCREEI.III'IC UIIIT!
'.,IITH
FI tNOU-.POHER.NEU
0.tur N!nc
KOTJ
K00
,A- REINHNRDT MRSCHINENBRU CIRCUIT DIFGRRH s 74.68 / 96ltUC
gct' 47.t4.94
ltlAsl
't'1f
GmbH
D-7IS65 SINDELFINGEN
.i
gt.? ?
I B.l4.94 SHIVSL BENDING HRCHINE RRS74,OO ?ABv 6DHZ USF; ?-SPINDEL 5T0P; 5I0
1\
tLl
2 3 4 5 6 7 I
ll ?
3
FUSGREI.IGE
FI , OUTPUTS
+?4VDC INOU_POIÎER
XI l5
f-
I
17
RI I
RI RI RI RI RI RI
/lx.1 /11.1 /ll.{ / L,1 /17,1 /t7.4 /13.a
i ssl 58 G2
d7 d8 ds Ll dl0 dll dt3 dt4
3
xl2 xt2
XI 7 XI I X2 ?4 X2 5 XI l3 XI l4
5 7 X5 I X5 t3 X5 t4
tK3
.6
*
X
e * s7
A.
*
X
r3 *.
V-
l\
e *X
2 2
Y7 Y8 Y9 Yta Yl5 Yr6
XI X5 X t, X XI rX5
t7- .')a a-s
t3_ ,). ,t.s
lff:t agf;3a.t
3l:34
-'r,r'
.i?, ,t'(1,
_-1-
.t/. PRERSURE LII.IIT BNCK STOP FLRPS
35BBR 500 tgq@ BLOCK UPPER BEAM
BFR
3O I
.135;6r rnz l960lb z rn2

FOLDING BERH NDJUSI LEFT RIGHT
* SREITTLIcHE vEr'lttlf r'tlT

VBRIST0R-LTDHnRPTER BtscHHLTEll HB BUF
RLL V8LVE5 FRE PROVIDED IÎITH SCREEI.IING UI.IITI D0l^tN UP
nndcrunq D.tur Nrh" D.tuo Naac B!r.

iHt INOU-PUHLH NLU KOO
67.18.94 K00
-ofrG. REINHRRDT MBSCHINTNBRU CIRCUIT DIRGRRM s 74.AA z soltUC
Bit.
lnA$t
w
GmbH P.oJrltb6r. R!ftr.!! 8L: 3
D.7IO55 sINDELFINGEN ?ABv 6AHZ U5fl; Z-SPINDEL 5T0P; SI0
14.10.94 SHIVEL BENDING MFCHINE RF574.06
2 3 4 5 6
lLl
tL2
lL3
+24VDC +24VI]C
Xl ls Xl ts
x?a 20 x28 +
I
RI RI R
/13,4 /13.1
72 76
dt5 dl6
:<?6 t9 x?a 2l
l4 l5
xl2 xlz I
tK7 lK6
X2 74 x21,,
.3 .2
* t * I
Yt8 @ Yts
x- 2
x- 2
V
tK6 tK7
X2 I X2
XI Xll
t! ,,)a ,r.t
e1fua., :L#: :i" \
t3:34 ltl34
.iF,
-'1- oo
-'r
,its, ,o
BRCK STOP FLRPS

B0l.il.l LOIÎER DERI{ UP
flOJUST 3AAB 35AA
al floderunc | o.tun Nrne nrtuh 0.r,
KOU
!ct. 47.to.94 K00
-dAo. REINHRROT HRSCHINTNBRU CIRCUIT DIFGRFI1 5 74.86 / gAilUC
dt I
IffASI
.W GmbH
D.7IS65 SINDELFINGEN
ProJ.tibrr. tilg! 4
.l I
Fd.uck! I 4.t6.94 SHIVEL BENDING HRCHINE RRS74.OA 20BV 60HZ USF; 2-SPINDEL 5T0P; 5I0
2 3 4 5 6 7
/4.? /4.8
2B 25 +
32 35 4t
5I0-15-l6TR
Fl4
E INGRENGE 2t ?2 24 25 22 28 ts 3t 34 36 37 3S 40 42
IIiPUIS
Iill IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 Il'16 il'17 It't8 INg INIA INil ItJle INl3 INl4 Ir{15 1Nl6
vA>
Nz.6Z
\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \l6 \ \ \ \ \
+(.f+tt
z 3
__ l,_ le 16
..J
\20
F 1.1
ii20 2B
\ XI t5
XI
ndcruno 0rto. Oaiu6 Nara

t. a7.18.94 K00 -4. REINHRRDT I1RSCHINENBRU
CIRCUIT DIRGRRM s 74.4A / golluc
t: Fnliea:
0c
tnAst GmbH
t.
I 4.1A.94 \d O-7I865 SINDELFINGEN
SHIVEL BENNING MRCHINE R8S74.AB 268v 60HZ USH; Z-SPINDEL 5T0P; 5I0
81.! 5
vot 77
2 3 4 5 6 7
tL3
,-? /3
2,4-44/248V
05
di,..
I { BBCESCHiRT'rT ISTT.TERT xl3
SCREEI''IE B RCTUHL VFLUE LI L2

BROSSEL
TRCHO- TFCHO HII.IIER- CHOKE
CENE I?R T OR CENTRRTOR B7 RIIS C HL RG
BRCK STOP
203V xt3 rK5
T2 /g.a
ltsv 3
E
4_
PEGLER COI.ITPOLLER RI
-U
OZ
0? e?g/tE0-t0 5
9q S]EUIRSPRIII,IUI'IG
?lgv xt2 xl2
GO NI CJPCUJT VOLTBGI
M2
-r v? 28 x? ?9
lK5 llll/trL.8
/9.1
RNSCHLf,G
VERSTELLUNG
BRC( STOP
AOJUSI
a\t
TI
2?EV
\
RBSCIIIRHUHC BN ill,KLEtlt.rE8
HI SCRIENID AT IlI,CLFI.IP8
/l 3.t
dt
v.8/t3 x8/ t5
soltHtRT
DESiREO VRLUE
g.lur
nnde.unq
Fil
ilrna
KOO
0atqi Na6c
itu REINI]RRDT IlRSCHINENBRU
B!2.
CIRCUIT DIFGRBI{ s 74.OA / gAilUC
9cr' a7.18.94 K00
lllAsl
rh!tr D-7I665
GnbH
SINDELFIN6EN Bl.: 6
lad.ucll t4.t6.94 SHIVEL BEI'IDING HRCHINE RNS74.BA ?ABv 6AHZ USR; Z-SPINDEL ST0P; 5I0
.:'
? 3 4 5 6 7
NOT_RUS
E}IERGENCY OFF
5?
T 3/8.1
2,{ -'r R/ 2 08 V XI 53
{"[{ XI 53
NOT
sr3B [---
-FUS
06i L UtF IER EI.lERCENCY OFF
M6 rHN 05
/6,1
XI 80
X4 6t
X
2zAU Q4
/Z,l la
TIN
TI sil E-E---
ll5 ?30 03 ON
/1.5
t3 2r
XI 59
X4
l.ll/16 02
..,: /1,3 l4 3a
X4 XI 62
230V TLEIiTROIIIK U. t3
RI il
L BTLOSCHIRIJ FI o7 I'l0T - FUs
ELECTROIIIC /1,2 l4
FI'ID SCREEI'I n ' . s13 [___ /8.2
K? KI
t3
EIIERGEIICY ElOP .7
t'- K8 RUS
F[ 352U /3.5 t1 sl2 [---
10., B3 I'IE T ZRIlSCHL USS
Z o F2 I
TIIT CFBLE OFF K3
I
. 220V-
/8-a
R2 t1
LI XI 87
Nl/17 -l
RC
XI 88 KI
X 5l
t3,t{
rIRCH TIlTFERTIEN DIESER
* ,k#2 .s
VIRBIII!UI.IG HIJSS DRFUER XI ..18.1

33:3{
t'l0t.ll T0R
I
E I I',IE ] SOLRTIONSUEBIR-
I.IFCHUIlC EII.IGEBFUT I'IERDENI
.14,
-1-
iE,?
6 l,IHtI.I RtI,IOVII'IG THIS DO + T t

KFL TL EI TI R
I,IPE RRT URFUEHL
PO5I5 TOR
IR
CONNEXION YOU HFVE
TO II'ISTRLL RI.I I5OLRI]ON TEIIPERRTURE DEVICE
!
l.lRT c H!
r@l0u/5.73 60f)2
Oatur Uatui Nahc 8er.

JlfrO. REINHRRDT HRSCHTNTNBRU CIRCUIT DIHGRNH s 74.44 / gAllUC ,
gct' 67.18.34 K00
IRASI
.n}@ D-7I065
GnbH
SINDELFINGEN
Projokib.z. flu{l.rrgl gl.: 7
t€dru.cl! I 8.10.94 9IdIVTL BTNDING MRCHINE RRS74.AA a0BV 6AHZ USR; Z-SPINDEL 5T0P; 5I0,,.,
S ' .r.1ir, . u.:,:;-8

2 3 4 5 6 7 I
KI K2 K3 I IEV-
53 /7.1 .2 .2 50 50
2? 33 31
t3
K34
/il.6 l,l
6l
XI 6S
X5 60
33
KI K3
/7.7 34 .2
SI
/2.4 lr
a XI 69
KC
.2
{a X5 46
XI 46
X4
HI
--l RC RC RC
-t RC
at RI at
I K2 K3 y.4
5a
K4 tirl K6f
f,e 80
I :.1
5l
13t4, t3 t3 . t,t .-- t3,t1

->.4
24-32 ,z.z u4-rn
t1
.3
/t3.2 z6jja d ,ffi, /?.1
33134- n-1,-y ,?
33!r{ R BFF LL 3l!34 /13,t
'1!')r., iY; .i'110 VERZ OEGERU IlG

o?(10
ffi,
oo
/tg.B K LEI'll'lE
I 2
6!-.:-*$ r7,7
IlTT BRUECKE
uj-:a I - 2=25 6mS
IFOLDII.lC BERII
COIIIROLL ON s.b+--c?
UPPER BtRIl Z- 3=5 00 mS DOI{N
CLOSE OHNE . BRUtCKt=100m5
Anderunq B:tun Nahr 0atuil Nroc Eet. ?lchn.-l{r.!

3
gcr. a7.10,94 K00 -4. REINHFRDT MFSCHINTNBRU CIRCUIT DIBGRRM s 74.A8 / golluc
IRASI
-Gff- GmbH
D-7IA65 SINDELFIN6EN ll.: I
t4.t6.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RF574.OO .208v 60HZ USH; 2-SPINDEL 5T0P; SI0
2 3 4 5 6 7 I
FI/II
XI 60
24VDC 2L+
X 25
XI 25
I
'l f" '--l voRl.rE x lz
ilov 2sv
51.
HTNTER- x? ?5
I
48 ffItSCHLRG
ai o--
C2 514
T3 RI F ROII T
24VDC
t: BBCK ST0P wr t--'-
67
-l i Br,;nEttZUtiG ^c RI
HIIITEN /11.1
2?
t5 13 316t4l
OV ! 515 +-- d0
LII'!IT
2.1 v Dc
BRC }i
X2 68
5rRohr{ErSLtR l.lv5 I
t3 C O I.IT FOLL ER
xt2
XI B3
T:'
tKt
.e
6
i:8/17
RI 8t SOLL I.IIR T
lK5 RC T UFL
6 vnr-ur Xl
X5
7.7
27
XI 5t 36 xl 30
13,la 13 , t4 ,,.
tts#2 ""
/6-l veRt 9I 0R- 2
i4-, /
/1.1
1,3
,-1;fi' /6.8 LEDRDBPTER
It'' s
/t.1
33:34 /6.2 -,)-
3l!34 X8/ l9
VRRISTOR
,i/10 .1)l1o ,t3 r l{
--t-
.4 --i'- SCREEIIING
,-1;fi' /11.4
UNIT
D( yr
3.b-lJ2
--r
ltirr REGLER-FI',ITRIEE
H INTTR-BNSCHLRG
RUI.I
ELII'TROI'IIK
RUI.I
PBOPORT IONfIL-VENTIL
GESCHI.{II'ID IGI(E ITSREGUL TERUI'IC
CONTROLLER
HY ORFUL IK ELECTROI'ItCS PROPORTlONRL VBLVE
BRCK STOP
HY DRFUL IC SPEED BDJUST
8.t. Zrlchn.-llrr
3 74.OO /
Snda.ue | 0.tun NaDa 0atun Nailc
BI RUN RELHIS I2U.65.5{ KOO
@7.t4.94 K00
-Fs. REINH8RDT I,IRSCHINENBRU CIRCUIT DIFGRRM
golluc
0c!.
IRASI GmbH Proj!ktb.!. o
t?d.uclt l4.14.94 \d D.7IO65 SINOELFINGEN SI.{IVEL BENDING MBCHINE RRS74.O8 e08V 6AHZ USfl; Z-SPINDEL 5T0P; SI0
2 3 4 5 6 7 I
24V11C+
24VnC+
Xl 2s
Xl ts
X l5
X8 2 X8 l4
ELEKTPOIIIX
KI8 Kll Kl2 Kt3 K3

,! 2l{ .3 ll{ .{ /4.2
X8 4 X8 t6
ll
xl2 xl2 xt2
X2 XE t6 X2 I xt l? XI t6
X5 l2
* a * t( 7s J.
Yll x- v Yl2 e Yl3 x- Yt4 x-
r$
TY
ri x-
rA
2 2 ?
x2 x2 x2 X5
XI 30
Xlr XI
ll2, 2r2 , |l2, ?t2 |
,---lJ' ,r-J3" ,i-.iJ' ,.uY" .rt' ZUSFTZEII.IRICHTUIIG
tzz
-r-iI 222 t22 222
,l*''
| | |
tzt -a-L?zt
l-- ,,T-i--l'' .7
24 i- I{ERI(ZtUG-
'31 BFCK STOP FLRPS FLO}I DIVIDER KL E t"il'lUt'tG
r 500 28gq 25@6
BRCK STOP FLBPS FLOI,I DI VI OER

5OB 2gaa ?5go
I
* sREr{ILICHE VENTILE HIT V8RIST0R-LEDBDFPTER BE5CHRLTET!
BLL VRLVES RRE PROVIDED HITH SCREEI,III.IG UNITI
Roderunq | 0rtsr Na6e 0atui N.n. B.z. t:

47.1a.94 K00
-ofts, REINHFRDT TIRSCIIINENBRU
CIRCUIT DIFGRBM s 74.9A / gAUUC
9e2.
lnAsl
rl'Itr
GmbH
O-7I855 SIHNELFINCEN Et,: l6
14.1a.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RRs74.OA 20BV 6AHZ USH; Z-SPINDEL 5T0P; 5I0
? 3 4 5 6 7 I
0BERI'lFl.jGE HHLT BEI'SCHLIESSEIt' 25mm
XI 60
ll8V"
K7
/t2.2
t3 t3 1l
K30 K3t K36 K7 K3t
.t l4 .7 l{ / t2.2 3{ .2
XI 78
XI 76
rl !3
tl K3t K33 K3A K3l
S2l o"- S2 K33 .t .2
HFiL T ET I
\ lt .5
22
t,l 3{
Z5m m
77 XI 79
K32 K33
.1 .5
RC
-l Rc RC
-t RC RC
FI RC
K30 K3l K32 ti K33 f K34 K35
_.!
X 5t
13 | t{ nt{ t3,11 t3;
,ffit
33!31
.6
its, * .3
.5
'ffi,.,
t.
t1
.5
.{
t!,11
,ffi2 /8.5 13,ta
,6fi2 ,{
3l'34 33 34 31r-lJz .t 33ll{ r!+i-Jr
oits,o, ,iv; oo
.6 -
13r14-:-
--r --r
4:lcr -
t3i{{
_+- /13.1
rKt ,?
-
-i-
a3
--1-
a1
5b.l--!.?
tSa3a
8b-i--q?
I
VTRRTEGELUNG OBER'.IRNGE'SCHLIESSEN'
HBLT,I.STUFE Btl 25nn UPPER EIRII
cL0sr
ndnrunq 0atun Nroc 0.tutr N.tr"
gcr. 47.1a.94 K00 -4, REINHfi RDT ITRSCHININBRU
Eaa.
CIRCUIT NIRGRRM s 74.@A / SAltuC

t!
IRASI GnbH
Ruft.rgl
l4.l a.94 td D-7I865 SINOELFINGEN
SNIVEL BENDING HRCHINE RRS74.AO 268V 6AHZ USfl; Z-SPINDEL 5T0P; 510
a
2 3 4 5 6 8
24V I]C
XI 25
FNSCHLUSS
GEBER
SIEHE ELFIT 2I
S7 r-
FUSSTRSTER
G
BI -rL
XI 44
RNISCHLBC
RUTO_STRRT
23
58 r-
G
FUSSTHSIER B? -Jl-
B IEGEI,IHNGE
XI 45
G
B3 _fL
OBERI,.IRI'IGE L II.IKS
nt
G
B4 -tL
OBERIÎFI'ICE RECHTS
XI 30
t3- 13 | l{
)' isfr, /2.3
4jiilz 't.r
31-i2a 3!13{ /11,1
13r44 '1.5 ,14-,0
-'tr
UPPER BEFI{ CLOSI

NUTOHRTIC
SIERT
0rt!r Nr6r Drtu0 ler,

Sndrunq
gct. 67.t6.94
Nailc
K00
iAs" REINHf,RDT T,IRSCHINENBRU CIRCUIT DIRGRHII s 74.A8 / golluc
IRASI
-W GnbH
D-7IS65 5]NDELFINGEN
ProJ.ltb.2. Buft.rg: 8t: 12
14.10.94 SHIVEL BENDING HRCHII'IE RRS74,68 eEBv 66HZ USF; 2-SFIN0EL ST0P; 5I0
X -o ,9 TrI
c FOLBINC STFM
tr t
I D0tlN
T
: ><
LN
tt )( ;4
(Jt ,9
x - frl
FOLt]iNG BERM ru
c EI1ERGENCY STOP
a o
c
6
xoJ x ,9 Trl
a
UPPER BERM
UP
-o u)
X;4
><
LN (Jl- & TFI trJ
UPPER 8IF11 u
cL0sE0
o
& rn
@
s{ 6
.- CONl ROL 6
s c9 ON
@ @ tJ)
c) \ x ,9 :D
rrl
6
t( z o o
o
o t lr UPPER BEBM
x
OPEN
Ll)
U
A
>< & r
;n UPPER BERrl flUI0118TIC Di
in
xLN n o
CL O5E S TOP
-
{ffi x ,9 n
@
uTi
L: r-l
-o
o
=
n
I
D
RUIOIlRIIC @ @ (n;5 vJ
STRRT
\=
!o X ,9
TFI
-D
s!
oa fFt
6o EHE RGTNCY @
6A
3
I
STOP x @
=3
E-n
'-= & ril
6
!6 a (9
X ,9 rFl t-i-i- 3
c3 IRRNSMI I TiR ELRCK
'2=
rnf FOLI]lNG BIRM
R tlJ U5I
OU IPU T
s-if 3?
,9
tr,
l'1
E
a1
n
a)
n
"";-
-i
* i
U) !-
c |
C) { @ stfni
3 GEBER
X14
ut- & n î
;:-,t- g #
E
r') f,l UNTE RhFNGE -
- 6t
n VER S TELL UNG
BL HCK
OUTPUI
!!
a6 a-i t
r'1
n
:o
= U) i,*
'F-o-+r rn
s-,h I
,-i- tq
a cs
><-x
!
O.Ht]JUSi SNIICH
nJru i; ^_i
Ir-l-- ti
6 BRCK SIOP BLRCK
,9
s@
OUIPUT I I-,1- * *
@ 6
o
(9
LN
z
i"-l- * *
! ,9 B-i
q-r-,;- g
N Tfl
b o f
cLn (sl
a o-l
.P X *-l-.**
@
ru
I
It
I -{ GND
*i
a 6 GND EXT
t a)
@ GND
Xx
d
r.l
t-
\-\
@O@
*-rr - i a\
=6
ttt xco xco EXT
e-4- 6 z
o !_!
.T
rn ;."+- = i
o ;-i
+?4V
;-rl:%
><
N
a
2 3 4 5 6 7 I
n < d? +9
'l
t16
3
+ 6 I
rlrr urrr G2
OPFY t- r'ErzGEPrET_l z
tLEkrRoxrc Az t0
fELEKlRoiltK--l Tr-0-l
tKl l<t Rt4 B IL DSCHiRI.I

RI TIONITOR
ll
0t
0? D] 04 05 06 07
F3
I2 lil
6513a S l3a BE DIENBLEI'.IDI
L? USIR I(EYS
o
II
PE-SCHIEIiE
IIOI.I FUSED
/5
\:./
13 G?
u'-o
EHt?TH C0l.ll.tECr0R 6, oo
I
sr3 ,a?o
5ll sl?
'€t
LI L2 Lf N Pf UI vt l{l U? va l{? U3 Y3 H3 ,li 2 3 6 7 I t3 ll ,+ t6 l8 20 23 e5 25 ;; is ?6 27 :a 3, 3s ls 3l 32 33 3{
rlLErlr-rEnH[0RDNUl]G Il.r 5CHRt" TSCI-lRRllfl Xl 38 39 1t 12 13 .l{ {5 .t6 s;l s, ,rl; 53 5B 59 6S afa 6r 62 6? 68 C3 7B 7l ?2 73 7E ?8 79 8A 8t 82 a2 B8
CLRI.IPING JBI,I iN COIlTROL CRBIIIE T XI
Fndrrunq I 0.lui Nan? 0atufr N.6" 8!r, Fnhgcl
-dAs- REINHSRDI MNSCHINENBRU CIRCUIT DIRGRRM s 74.4@ / gAilUC

E€ I. o?.t2.34 K00
lnAsl
-GF- D-7I065
GmbH
SINOELFITIGEN
81.: l4
14.10.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RRS74.OA ?ABv 66HZ USH; Z-SPIN0EL ST0P; Sl0 ?3
{
? 3 q 5 5 7 I
ELEKTRON]K
CONNECTION PENDFI'IT CONTROL STBTION FI.ISCHLIJSS NETZTEIL
ELEKTRON]CS
CONNECTION NET UI.IIT
c0t'lTRoL i ENERGENCY OFF C0l'lT P0L

ON OFF
5ll st2 sl3 HI CPUE N ROT BLRU GRBU

CR EN RED BLUE CRE Y
L_ rn
3 rl0v
l4t r2
I'loNi T 0R
220V 5V +l2V -lzv Giln
F"€y 804;15
z Pol.rtR ila 3a0t

LI a
d
u d
ft
(J NR
2a lr 3a 4a 5a tb 2b 3b 4b 5b I il8,
PLI,O: X4
.{ +t2v
- 2?0v @a
5 r"ll0
tb 4b 5b
PLUi x9
2a la 3a
T, 5a ?b 3b
r- 6118
I +5v
I Gilt]
ta
):l!62 6l 59 69 87 88
lt
220V-
KffBEL lBx0,5qmm
6ndcrunq I
I
Dltud lli6E
gct.
0atui
a7.t8-94
N!frc
K00
,4. REINHFROT I,IRSCHINENBRU
B.z.
CONNECTION DIRGRRI1 s 74.AA / gAlLUC
Bnl.gci
I
I
I
l4.l 0.94
-EF
IRASI D.7I065
GmbH
SINDELFINGEN
P.oJrkib!:.
sIÎIVEL BENDING HRCHINE RRS74.BO
luft..gr
208v 50HZ USF; Z-SPINIIEL ST0P; SI0
sl.:
.""! 2?
15
2 3 4 5 6 7
FOLDII.IG BEFH UPPER BENI1 PRERSURE LIIlII

POSISTOR
RELEFST 38 I35
HY DRFUL IC UP 80r.il'r 0Ptl:l CLOSE BRR BFR TR CHOIlE Tf R
CIRCULFT ION 435 lblin 2
l96A lblin 2
FOR BFCK SIOP
DRIVE IlOTOR
B8 MI \? Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 B7
>< X >< X >< >< ><
3r .l
* * le * x *
p
? U ? 2
I )
c
i
-
I
6 UZ
Ff,
L
'l
G9 i
9= I
i
sH i
inx
e= i
TLJ H B5a r{ I Fr.lul16
E; FN ilt,tlLEUilt
\?
=d
SC PE E IJI
B'rNr,cLFrlP
IJ';
S
3
>c
xl3 xt3
IU
JG
:
UJ
GJ
UI vl HI @G
d(
Nl/9 lit/8b
0.lui Nafrc B"z.
gct. 47.18.94 K00

-4, REINI]FRDT HRSCHINTNBRU CONNECTION DIRGRflM s 74.AA / gAltUC
tnA$t GnbH ProJ.ktbrz. l6
pd. lcl1 t 4.16.94 \d tI-7I065 SINDELFINGEN
SHIVEL BENDiNG MRCHINE RRS74.AO
E:
208v 60HZ USF; ?-SPINDEL 5T0P; SI0
2 3 4 5 6 I
t1il.tGEN- BIEGEI.IRNGEVERSTELLUNG OBER[ÎFNGE UN]ERIIqI'IGEN_ UN T E RH HI.IGENV IRS I EL LUNG
TEILER FOLDING BERTIRDJUST HFLI BEI BMI'I VERSTELLUNG GEBER
FL01.l
?26v GI BER SCHLIESSEN LOI.IER BERM LO'ÎER BERI.I ROJUST
BIVIDER TRRNSIITTTER RDJUST TRBI{SMITTIR
s2r
5t6 M5 SIB
Yl4 t13
><
,t
RC-
-rL t--
EL0Cr( -tL
+ +
I
I
i4
6
6
6
':5
!.5 U3 v3 ?s 79 38
xl u2 ve Jtz 25' tl 3g 7A ?8 79 t7 v3 7A l0
Bnderunq | !.tun Nr6c 0atui Na6c
9.2. 07.18.94 K00

-4, REINHf,ROT ilNSCHTNENBRU CONNECTION DIRGRRM s 74.06 / gAilUC
IRASI
w
GmbH
D-71865 SINDELFINGEN EL! l7
t4.t4.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RRS74.OA eOBV 6AHZ USF; 2-SPINDEL ST0P; SI0
2 3 4 5 6 7 I
FOLDII'IG BEBH UPPER BEFI.l UPPER BERM BLOCK
TURN OFF TURI.I OFF
SPEED FDJUST BENERTH EIlERGEIICY SIOP UP
I,IERKZEUG-
i-"- ----l
UP CL 05E D LEFT RIGHT KLEI{I'1UNG
YI I SI S2 S3 54 Yl6
Yr5 Yt7
><
a I
P X >< X
o
--11'?'T
2 L 2 2
1
(9
r:5
.Yl 33 ?5
Bnderunq !aluo 0rtu0

07.18.94 K00 -4" REINHSRDT }IRSCHINENBBU
CONNECTION DIRGRRH s 74.8A / g8ilUc
gc2.
lnAsl GmbH
14.16.94 \d D-71865 SINOELFINGEN

SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RRS74.AA e88V 68HZ USB; ?-SPINDEL 5T0P; SI0
IB
2 3 4 5 6 7 I
FUSSTRSIER
UPPER BERM OPEN FUTOI.IHIIC STHRT
RUTOI{RTIC SIOP
S7 s6 S8
t'- ll tz n+f n
i
:3 21 ?3 21
0alun Nta! 0atui

!ct' a7,ta,34
Nanc
K00
ifrc. RTINHFRDI I.IHSCHINENBRU CONNECTION DIRGRflM s 74.00 / 9Bltuc
IRASI
-5[F - GnbH
D-71865 SINDELFINGEN 8L:
14.10.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RRS74.OA ?Agv 6OHZ USfl; Z-SPINDEL ST0P; SI0
2 4
(SONDERIINRICHTUNG)
5 6 7 I
(OPTIONSL EXTRR)
NULLPUNKT
I NDUK T IVSCHFL TER FNSCHLRG
PNEUMRT IKVENTILE IKV ENT ILE
PNE UIl FT
FUER FNSCHLFEGf O-POiNT BEGRENZUI.IGS S CHRL T ER
- HNSCHLFIGE
PNEUI1BTIC VRLVES
INDUCTIVE SI,IITCH STOP
PNEUHRTIC VRLVES
FOR STOPS STOPS RNTRITB
LI}1IT SI.IITCH
RNSCHLRG VORNE HINTEN
56@ ta@a l5a a ?aa@ 2s86 3qaB 3500 DRIVE STOPS FRONT BBCK
Y9 Yl0 Yil Yl2 Y13 Yt8 Yls M2 sl0 sl4 sr5

X q< >< >< >< >.<
H
o 0
Z __F_
a3 {3
+
2 2 2 2 ?
lSTt
x?
VER IE ILEF.
kBsIEr,r Ft't
FNSCHL6G 75 29 ?5 !5 6t 25 68 67 + +
CLFHPITIG
JflH X2
B0t +
THE STOP
? 3 ll l{
e
6 .i t5 5 l3
siEuc[ER xlZ
XI
TSCIJRRNK
BOX
(Ftl36) (Rt /39) Kta/ilz t<ll/?t4 Yt?/|4 x?a/13 x?a/?l Rt tK1/zL x8/l
FI/55 Fl /58
Fndcruno 0e tsr Nrn" D.tuo Nane B!r.

0!t. q7.ta.94 K00
-4. REINHRROI I,IHSCHINENBNU CONNECTION DIRGRFIM 5 74,8A /- 96lltJ?
IRA$I
.W 0.7I955
GmbH
SINBELFINGEN rl.r 2B
28.1A.94 SI.IIVEL BENDING MRCHII.IE RH574,AA 268V 60lJZ USF; 2-SPINDEL 5T0P; SI0
2 3 4 5 c
B4
7 I
BI B2 B3
-l 50AJlUnin-
-l
cafiTlttmin.-l Pon42a 50EJzumin- Ponqza 400{_?0
UNIT FOR TOLD]NG BERI1 "t s I HHNbIII I TER FOR

3u TRHNSIIITTER FOR 3q
IIlPULSE,TRRNSIlITTER
BRCK STOP UPPER BTRI'1 R]CHT
Ed UPPER BEFM LEFT
== ==
J;
iJd rJd
Uii ut; U;
+ 1a E=
g'i gfi
OV tla 2 U"Z tJa0
BV tla I ua2 =u Ua0 @V ual Ua? iq Ua0
B n3 *H
c
Ho
+5V Ua 2 U"O +5V ual Ua? Lla
+5V Ual Ual Ua0
I I
I
_t_
elE e
El E E
I
i
*l:=
z E
i
le u =
O
J
l,;
u
i
s
l= t-
l:lr
;( I 9
xil lT, '
ts 5
lr 9
L 4
ris z i
t?
'1"'
X6
l* x7
t2 t,, I 3
z J
=
o J
=
L
t-_- I
t'
I
e -L
,2,
-i a2{ a32
STECKER H
e2 rE cG ? cl4 al4 al2 616 el0 t2
I tttrt PULG R
STTCKER F
STECKIR R STECKER F
BRUTCKE VOI'I
Ix PULG R PUL6 R E? 8UF
RX oHH
PULG R C4
LsBOB ELEKTROI1I}< LRBOD ELEKIRONIK LEGEI.I
STECKER R LFBOD ELEI(TROIIIII
LFBOD ELEK TROI''IICS LRBOD ELEKTROI'IIC5
LFBOI] ILIKTRONICS BUILD BRIDCE
PULG R BE TI.IEEN
LRBOI] ELEKTROI.IIK E2 FND. C4
LFBOD ELEKTRONICS
nndcrunq 0rtur Nrn! 0itu6 Ne6€
RX g7.ta.s4 K00 -4, REINHRROT HR6CHINENBRU CONNECTION DIRGRRM 5 74.40 / g8lluc
9C:.
lnAsl GmbH
2l
,.druckt I 4.1 0.34 M O-71965 SINDELFINGEN
SHIVEL BENDING MFCHINE RRS74,AA ?0BV 6AHZ USfl; 2-SPINDEL ST0P; SI0
!
c
Jog, l.5mm 2
a x },12
-ixl.:mm' Yq
x
3xl Yt0
I
Jxl.lnm' Yll
@ c
rd i a
z n
-!
2
E TO C) ,o d- -- l.5mm Yl2
* tr'l = Dg -- N
!
i,s
- o= !=
lxl.:mm' Yt3
@ E rl-- d*
fioEr
- o*
E"'EI
!o
n 3x _f mm - Yt8
6Z I
o
:- -xinii
sOor ?
6 GI z' r' nm Yt9
a
@ @ -th-=
st4
o5U
o
2
I
Z-
o z 5r5
o
n
d
5rE
dl=h
ilgelF [5 =o I
n -- -l x lxU.lqmn
2
-r HH I I O 8i
iJ=
gD
r
o
nE
ro
6t !! E= R BTL M']
UE
OO { I tJ
E@ JJ
H-3
=qt
sr6
r;
at
B 8,l.1 I
5x l,5mm
! 52r
9: Y?
Hg
</
r'1 f (Jl
r!, Y3
tE
rrl a ZUL t I TUNG
+ LTFI) CHSLE
f,, Y4
IJ f
t- s!
d) f,
I - C; Y5
o 3T
(- z. P5
tn I Y6
z. a)
TI r ...: 2
n
m
E
3x I.5nm \7
D Fl D 6
an
! YB
so b
o
I YI
ru :5 -n
D3
a
6 Yt7
o !-
(t z
I 6 q
o E-
s
I { 3 D@
n4
2xl
NI
b X I
5t,5e
c
(n
s u
r3 3
P ,3 7 4xl, 115 !
@
N s
a
!
I
,1,- ,1,- q/
(- rO,
E
rft
t- 5lB
(n ili-ili'
-t
o
-9
iliili
il::li
Yt4
U7
<)
itiiti 3x
Yl5
EEclltl'
a(!ru
Yl6
N
2 3 4 5 6 7
C2
I'IE T Z GERRET
FLOPPY-
_I2V (LFBOD)
LRUF- NETZGERFET + l2v
IÎERK NET UNIT +5V
CNO
FLOPPY 24V Gl'lD
v24 t]RlVE
SCHNITlSTILLE
FREI
INTERFFCT
(FREI)
RZ
CTSLP OBEE}If,IIGE
Llrll:s XII
TPBI|9ilI I I EF
LIPPEP BEFIl
LEF T
iEBEP 5 32POLIGER L FBOD

HI ilTtFnilSCHLCC STECT(ER R I'lc
IFNilSI'lITIEP
Bnak 5T0P COI.IUIC TOP HI TH RT J( A
FI
i:EPEP BITI:THNIICE 32P0Lt5
TRnrglil r rtR
FiL!III6 DTRH
Ytn lt't0u-P0l.lER I
iEEfP.rBtCHgl16E
PEI HT 5
TFnI3Hll IEp
tIFFI,P SENH
PI'HT
q. Elil BUS
X3/HL.l5 0r'l OFF
CII D
PHOENIXSTICKER VA
I,II T I(LTHHEII
EtDltilullcs- ;,1 g
XI
TFIELEBUS IIIT PHOENIX PLUG
BIttISiHIRIl V] t}EO CFBLE t'IITH CLFtlPS
l.ti B0HRD
Irl TH 5aFEil'l oootrotrooooo
B Otr trCRO
oo000 00Bo
o oo Booo SOLL'JER T
ooooo oooo
I^l
ooo
'v
ooo hvs
5T ROITREGLER
I FECLER-
RNSCHLFG
RUiI SCHUET:
RUII RILRlS E ICHSCHRL TER
I.IE I'I6E Il T E
FLOI.I DIVINIR
ILE R RN5CHLHG_
KLRPPE
CURRENT C OI.IT ROL LtR 24V O-RDJUSl SI.IITCH
BHCK gTOP FLFPS
X4 PEGULFTOR gRCK STOP K8 5rg
Kl3 Kl0,Klt,Kl2
R3 NI
I I r0,5nmZ
O:tun
nndirunq Detur N.o?
get. a?.t4.94
Naic
K00
ifro" RIINIIRRDT T|RSCHINENBRU INSTRLLFTION SCHET,IE s 74.44 / goilUC
tftAst
w
GnbH
El.:
D-71065 SINDELFINGEN 20BV 60HZ USfl; Z-SPINDEL ST0P; SI0
t4.l 6.94 SHIVEL BENDING MRCHINE RRS74,OA
********************************************t(******************************
:r G E R ii T E S T u C X r, r S T E * 14.L0.94 - Seite L
**
* Projekt : RAS74-9011-UC * Reinhardt Maschinenbau GmbH
* Proj.bez.: SWIVEL BENDING MACHfNE RAS74.00 * Richard-Wagner-Str. 4-l-O
:t Zeichnung: S 74.00 / 901-l-Uc :k D-7L065 Sindelfingen
,i Auftragf : 208V 60HZ USA; 2-SPINDEL STOP; S* TeI.:0703L/863-0
*********t(********************************rk********************************
eMK I sachnummer-T------
-f------
I I Benennung
I Ort I Hersteller I Technische Beschreibung
lanlase I
ler.eraa I
I
-l------ -f------
A1 L6627 4 rNou-PowER P3 t6/L6
+ LABOD INPUT.OUTPUT PLATTNE INOU P3 OE
l-6 EINGAENGE;l-6 RELATS AUSGAENGE
L3 .4 1- RUN RELAIS ; 40 POL.FLACHSTECKER
KLEMMENANSCHLUESSE
A3 l_3 l_l-4 l_ STROMREGLER

+ UNITEK MVSl
FUER PROPORTTONAL-MAGNETE BTS MAX. ]-r2A
9.6 SOLLWERT O-1OV
ANSCHLUSS-SPANNUNG 2 8V
Al_4 L64535 SIO-KARTE

+ LABOD EIN-UND AUSGANGSPLATTNE ;
HALBLETTERAUSGAENGE 24V DC;
5.5 TYP SIO 2;
1n KABEL UND STECKER;
BL l_t_413 8 TMPULSGEBER
+ GELMA MBB TYP: LG 41,2-250 /28 / LO2 ;250 IMPULSE
ABSCHIRMUNG N]CHT AM GEHAEUSE ERDEN
]-2.7
B2 L3l.489 IMPULSGEBER ROD 42OD
+ HETDENHATN IMPULSGEBER ROD 420D-00900 RV KV01,00; 5VDC i
900 TMPULSE PRO UMDREHUNG MrT. REFERENZTMPULS,.
1n KABEL OHNE STECKER;
B3 r27230 DREHGEBER ROD 420
+ HEIDENHATN IMPULSGEBER RoD 420; 5VDC i
5OO IMPULSE PRO UMDREHUNG;
1-2.7 1-m KABEL;
B4 I27230, DREHGEBER ROD 420

+ HEIDENHAIN fMPULSGEBER RoD 420; 5VDC ;
5OO IMPULSE PRO UMDREHUNG;
3.2.7 1m KABEL;
D1 92424 RELAIS
+ WOEHRLE RUECKFALLVERZOEGERTES RELAIS LtO /25O MILLISEK.
EU-RZM /L!0i l-l-0V AC;60H2;
8.5
Fortsetzung auf Seite 2

*****tt*********************t(***********************************************
'" GERATESTUCKLTSTE Projekt: RAS74-901-]_UC :-4.to.g4 - Seite
*********************************************rrrr****************************
2
:a------ -r------
eMK I sachnumrner I Benennung
Ittl
I Ort Hersteller
I I Technische Beschreibung
lAnlage I
I nr.etaa I
I
====:===={=======::::::=:{======::::======:=====::================:=====
I rr lez+23 | AUsLoESEGERAET
|
+ |
xr,oncxN. MoELLER I
nurs FoRM cDN; 1-1-5v ,5o / 6oHz
l= I ITHERMTSTOR-MASCHTNENSCHUTZGERAET
lt.+ | nurn KALTLETTER-TEMeERATURFUEHLER(erc)
G1 L2L9L8 NETZGER. SOND.24V 8A

+ FRET GEBR.GMBH& FEGSE 'J,45-3 6.l--01.,24V,8A, EINPHASEN; 44O. ..600V
S ILI Z IUMGLEI CHRI CHTER, BRUECKENSCHALTUNG
2.L VARISTOR GEGEN SPANNUNGSSPITZEN
RESTWELLIGKEIT KLETNER 52, KURZSCHLUSSCHUTZ
G2 92245 NETZGER+TRAFO
+ WOEHRLE NGS 242403. I ; STABILISIERT ; 8-24V EINSTELLBAR
TRAFO TO-24OVA-03
9.3 PRIMAER : L1,0 / L27 / 220V SEKUNDAER: 17 / 2a / 29V
Hl_ 158 69 6 BLENDENNIPPEL FARBL.

+ RAFI BLENDENNIPPEL FARBLOS i22 tsmmi
ART. NR. 912 1,.7 4502 . 1,O5 / t0O2 i
8.3
Hi- 1-58 69I LAMPENFASSUNG 22OY;
+ RAFT LAMPENFASSUNG 22OV / t, 2W ;
SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS;
8.3 ART. NR.91-2 5. 0007 O.02I i
HL L2J-820 GLUEHLAMPE].3 OVB9S
+ STEMENS AG
8.3
K1 83605 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH4 031-oAG2 ; 3 S+loE; 1l-0V ;50 / 6oHz
SCHNAPPBEFESTTGUNG
7.7
K2 83605 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH4 03 L-oAG2 ;3S+LoE; 1-10V; 50 / 6oHz
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
8.2
K3 4887 9 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TH4244-oAG2 ;4S+4OE; 1-10V; 50 / 6OHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
8.2

******tr***************tr*********************************:t******************
* GERATESTIiCKLISTE Projekt: RAS74-9o11UC L4.:-0.94 - Seite 3
tr***tr*rr********************************************************************
BMK Sachnumner Benennung

Ort Hersteller Technische Beschreibung
Anlage
B1. Pfad
K4 4887 6 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH4 02 2-OAG2 i 2S+2OE; 1-1-0V ;5O / 6OHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
8.4
K5 92074 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH2 031-OBB4 ,' 3 S+I-OE ;24YDC
SCHNAPPBEFESTTGIING
12.3
K6 83605 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TH4 03l--oAG2 ; 3S+]-oE; J-1-0V ;50 / 60Hz
SCHNAPPBEFESTTGUNG
8.7
K7 92074 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3THz 03 1-OBB4 ,' 3 S+l-OE i 24VDC
SCHNAPPBEFEST]GUNG
L2.2
K8 920I4 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TH203I--OBB4 ; 3S+1OE ;24VDC
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
9.5
Kt"0 483 49 RELAISPLATTE
+ LUETZE RPE-282S / 2w 24V Dc;ART.NR. 710755
MTT STECKSOCKEL FUER 2 KAMMRELAIS
ro.2 MTT 4 WECHSLERN ; SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
K11 483 49 RELAISPLATTE
+ LUETZE RPE-2E2 s / 2w 24v Dc;ART. NR. 710765
MTT STECKSOCKEL FUER 2 KAMMRELAIS
r-0.3 MrT 4 WECHSLERN ; SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
Kj-2 48349 RELAISPLATTE
+ LUETZE RPE-282S /21 24V DC;ART.NR.7L0765
MIT STECKSOCKEL FUER 2 KAI/D{RELATS
l_0. 3 MIT 4 WECHSLERN ; SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS
Kl-3 483 49 RELAISPLATTE
+ LUETZE RPE-282S / 2w 24V Dc;ART. NR. 7l-0765
MIT STECKSOCKEL FUER 2 KAMMRELA]S
t_0.4 MTT 4 WECHSLERN ; SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS

********lr*************Jr***************t(***********************tr************
* GERiiTESTUCKLISTE Projekt: RAS74-901-I-UC 14. i-0 .94 - Sei.te 4
********rr************trttrr**************:kt(tr*******t(**rt*t(*********************
BMK Sachnurnmer Benennung

Ort HerstelLer Technische Beschreibung
Anlage
81. Pfad
K30 83605 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH403l--oAG2 ; 3S+1oE; i-1-0V; 50 / 6oHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
l-1. l_
K3l_ 4887 9 SCHUETZ

+ SIEMENS 3TH42 4 4-oAG2 ; 4S+4OE ; 110V i 50 / 60HZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
lL.2
K32 83 605 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TH4 03 L-oAG2 ; 3 S+LoE; 1-1-0V ;50 / 6oHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
l.L.4
K33 4887 6 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TH4 02 2-OAG2 ;25+2OE; l"l-0V ;50 / 6oHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTTGUNG
t_t_. 5
K34 83 605 SCHUETZ

+ STEMENS 3TH4031--OAG2 ;3S+l-oE; l-10V; 50 /6OHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
1l-. 6
K36 4a87 6 SCHUETZ

+ STEMENS 3TH4O22-OAGZ i 2S+2oE;1-1-0V; 5o /6}HZ,
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
LL.7
L1 LL4547 DROSSEL
+ JAHNSMUELLER Er 105 A-4 ; BV.NR:271-48
6.6
L2 LL4547 DROSSEL
+ JAHNSMUELLER EI L05 A-4 BV.NR:27L48
6.7
M6 92425 FILTERLUEFTER
+ PFANNENBERG FLF 0l- ; fP54 ; L15VAc ; 2OW ; 6OHZ ; 0 | 224
MIT STANDARDFTLTERMATTE
7. 3

****trtr*Jr*t(***************************************************************** I
* GERATESTUCKLISTE Projekt: RAS74-9011UC 1-4.L0.s4 - Seite 5 i
*************************************************************************** l
::=:::==:{:===:==:==:==::{=:::::==:===========:::::::::======:========== r
l
lnux I sachnurnmer lnenennung

I
I
I
Ort I
Hersteller I technische Beschreibung
I
lAnlage I
I
I
I et. eraa I
========= {===:==:==::=:=={=======::==:::::::===========:::============== I
i
i
M6 ].22344 AUSTRITTSFTLTER i
l
+ PFANNENBERG AFF 01- ; rP 54 ; MIT STANDARD-FTLTERMATTE i
7.3 I
Nl- l_54533 REGLER l

i
+ UNITEK Q2 22o / I60-J-0 ;STEUERSPANNUNG 22oY ; I

l
6.4 I
I
I
I
QL 83600 HAUPTSCHALTER
+ KRAUS & NAIMER C42;CI3.2 00-6008 i 80A;2S I
I
V850D;K-GRIFF SCHWARZ G41.1

I
L. 1_
l
I
Q2 92422 MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER :
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER PKz 2/zM-40 + NHII-I-; 32-4oA I

!
;
.i
USA-AUSFUEHRUNG
1.3 t
I
i
Q3 873 L8 MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER I
I
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER PKZM 1-4 ; 2.4-4.0 A i

I
1.5 I
Q3 87339 HILFSSCHALTER
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER NHII-1--PKZM1;1S+1OE
L.5
Q4 87318 MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER PKZM l--4 ; 2.4-4.o A
=
2.r
Q4 87 339 HILFSSCHALTER
+ KLOECKN.MOELLER NHI l-1-PKZML ; 1-S+1OE
2.L
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER PKZM l--4 ; 2.4-4.O A
6. t_

********************************************:k******************************
* GERATESTUCKLTSTE projekt: RAS74-9Ol_tUc L4.Lo.gA - seite 6
********************************t(****)t:k*********************************rr**._
::======={===:====:==:::= { ==:====::===::===:==::=======:::=::=====:=:===
BMK Sachnummer Benennung
ort Hersteller Technische Beschreibung
AnIage I
i
81. Pfad 'lli
.l
Qs 87339 HTLFSSCHALTER
+ KLOECKN.MOELLER NHr l- L-PKZM1 ; l-S+l-OE
6.1
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER PKZM 1,-4 i .2.4-4.0 A
7.2
Q7 87 3L8 MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER PKZM L-4 ; 2.4-4.0 A
L.7
Q7 87 339 HTLFSSCHALTER
+ KLOECKN. MOELLER NHr1l--PKZMI; LS+LOE
1- .7
R1- l_l-4 54 8 BREMSWTDERSTAND
+ FRTZLEN EZB 100X3 5-1-0 ; 65W l_0 oHM
6.7
s1_ 68350 REIHENGRENZTASTER
+ EUCHNER RGBF 02 RL6-502
2 SCHALTELEMENTE
2.4
s2 68350 REIHENGRENZTASTER
+ EUCHNER RGBF 02 Rl_6-502
2 SCHALTELEMENTE
2.3
S3 86995 POSITIONSSCHALTER
+ SIEMENS 3SE3 l-2O-LD ; DfN EN 5004i_
SPRUNGSCHALTGLTEDER
3.3.2 ZWANGSOEFFNUNG
S4 13 5 31-5 DRUCKSCHALTER
+ SUCO TYP 9059 ; 1-0-1-00 BAR
L3.2

********rt**********************************************************tr*******
'K GERATESTUCKLISTE PTOJCKI: RAS74-90].].UC T4.LO.gA - SEitC 7
t(*******:k**************)rr**********tr****************************************
lnux lsachnurnmer Benennungr

Iort Hersteller
I Technische Beschreibung
lantuq" I
I nt.erao I
s6 45563 FUSS_SCHALTER
+ BERNSTETN F3-Ur_/Ut /UL UN NR. 606.36r_1. 026
3 PEDALE MIT UNFALLSCHUTZHAUBE
13.3
s7 45563 FUSS-SCHALTER
+ BERNSTETN F3-Ui-/Ul_/U]_ UN NR. 606 .36Lr. 026
3 PEDALE MTT UNFALLSCHUTZHAUBE
L2.2
S8 45563 FUSS-SCHALTER
+ BERNSTEIN F3-Ul-/U1lU1 UN NR. 606 .36L]-.026
3 PEDALE MTT UNFALLSCHUTZHAUBE
1"2 .3
st-0 t_09588 NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER
+ ifm efector fF-3 002-BPKG; L0-55VDC
S=2nm ; BUENDIG ; M1-2 X1- ; SCHLf ESSER
t-3.6 2m KABELLAENGE
s1-l_ 158693 SCHLOSSTASTE

+ RAFI SCHLOSSTASTE OHNE RASTUNG;
22,3mm1
7.7 ART. NR. 9t_2 l-. 3 004 5.204
sl_t- 158700 KONTAKTELEMENT 15

+ RAFI KONTAKTELEMENT J-S;
MIT SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS;
ART.NR. 9l-2 5. o0l-oo, 053 ;
sl_2 l-587 0l_ DRUCKTASTE ROT

+ RAFI DRUCKTASTE ROT;
22,3mm;
7.6 MTT ABDECKSCHEIBE;
ART.NR. 9l_2 r-. 3o04o. 554 / L303
sL2 158 69 9 KONTAKTELEMENT 1OE

+ RAFI KONTAKTELEMENT l.OE;
SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS;
7.6 MIT ZWANGSTRENNUNG;
ART.NR. 9r-2 5. 00100 .054 ;
s1-3 1_58695 PTLZSCHALTTASTE ROT

+ RAFI PILZSCHALTTASTE ROT;
22, 3mm;MfT ABDECKSCHEfBE;
7.6 ART.NR. 9L2 l-. 30043 .2o4 / 03Oli

************************:k***tr*****?k****************************************
* GERATESTIiCKLTSTE projekt: RAS74-901-1UC :- 4.ro.sA - seite 8
***************************************************************************
:==::===={:=:::====::===:}::====:::::====::==::::::::====::=:==::===::==
Isux I Sachnumrner I Benennung
Iort I Hersteller I Technische Beschreibung
lantaee I
I nr.eraa I
I
:::-===== {::==:=====:====+::===::=::===========::::====:=:==::===:=:==:=
I
sl_3 158 69 9 KONTAKTELEMENT ]-OE

+ RAFI KONTAKTELEMENT J-OE;
SCHRAUBANSCHLUSS;
7.6 MTT ZWANGSTRENNUNG;
ART.NR. 912 5. 00100 . O54 ;
S1-3A 7 8084 PILZDRUCKTASTER
+ SIEMENS 3SBl-0 00-1FC0l- i RoT ; NOT-AUS
DREHENTRIEGELUNG ; 3omn DURCHMESSER
7.7
S].3A l_2 t-8 5 L SCHALTELEMENT
+ STEMENS 3SBl-3 0O-oc; MrT HALTER
= ]- ZWANGSOEFFNER FUER
7.7 NOT-AUS FUNKTTONEN
sl_4 LL4L39 GRENZTASTER

+ CROUZET 83 732.3;250V 5A;ROLLENSTOESSEL
IP66 ; 2n
Ml-6XL ; KABELLAENGE
9.4
sl"5 L l_413 9 GRENZTASTER
+ CROUZET 83 732.3 i 25ov 5A;RoLLENSToESSEL
Ml6Xl- ; IP66 ; 2m KABELLAENGE
9.4
s t-6 109588 NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER
+ ifm efector IF-3 002-BPKG; 10-55VDC
S=2mm ; BUENDIG ; M1-2 X1 ; SCHLf ESSER
13 .5 2m KABELLAENGE
st_8 109588 NAEHERUNGSSCHALTER
+ ifm efector f F-3 002-BPKG ; 10-55VDC
S=2mm; BUENDIG;Ml2X1 ; SCHLIESSER
73 .6 2m KABELLAENGE
s2l- 86995 POSTTTONSSCHALTER
+ STEMENS 3SE3 12O-l-D ; DIN EN 50041-
SPRUNGSCHALTGLTEDER
LL. L ZWANGSOEFFNUNG
T1 2181 STEUERTRANSFORMATOR
+ FRET Q 250-89 . 00-320 / 945vA; 50 / 6oHZ;rPOo ;T4O /B
PRIMAER : 2 0 0-55 0V ; SEKUNDAER : L1-5 / 23 0V
7.2 GETRENNTE WICKLUNGEN, FUSSWINKELBEFESTIGUNG

**************************************************tr***tr********************
* GERATESTIiCKLTSTE projekt: RAS74-901-l_uc 1.4. ro.s4 - seite s
****************************:k***?k******************************************
:========+:::====:==:===={::=:::==:====:==:::==:::=::=::::::::==:==:====
lsux I Sachnummer l Benennung
I
Ort I
Hersteller I Technische Beschreibung
lanlase I
I at. rraa I
I
I
::=:===:= $:=:= =:= =====::: {::==:: =:= ==::==::::=::::=:
== = =
T2 L42201" EINPF.TRAFO 2O8V;
+ JAHNSMUELLER EINPFASEN TRAFO SOOVA;
UI 1-2 0 AL; BV-NR. 25 87 5 ;
6.1_ PRIM:2O8V;4t2A;
SEK: l-55-0-1-55V; 2 ,7A;
zr0 92428 NETZFILTER

+ SCHAFFNER FN 3522 3,0/03 ; 0,8W ; MAX.2SOV,AOOHZ
DAEMPFUNG UND UEBERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ
7.L
l_Kt_ 4887 8 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TF 4 4 22 -oAGz ; 2 S+2oE ; GR2 ; 1 t- 0V ; S0 / 6 oHZ
SCHNAPPBEFESTTGUNG
ot
1K2 920L4 SCHUETZ

+ STEMENS 3TH2 03 I--OBB4 ; 3 S+1oE ;24YDC
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
2tr
1_K3 920I4 SCHUETZ

+ SIEMENS 3TH2 03l--oBB4 ;
3 S+1oE ;24YDC
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
3.6
1Ks 44260 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH4 03 1-OBB4 /' 3 S+1OE ; 2 4YDC
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
9.4
t-K6 9201,4 SCHUETZ
+ STEMENS 3TH2 03 L-OBB4 ; 3 S+LOE ; 2 4VDc
SCHNAPPBEFESTTGUNG
4.2
l-K7 920L4 SCHUETZ
+ SIEMENS 3TH203 l--OBB4 ; 3S+1oE ; 2AYDC
SCHNAPPBEFESTIGUNG
4.3
Ende der Liste

SIEMENS
Seruomotoren 1HU3 05
Servomotors
Servomoteurs
Servomotores
Servomotori
lnstdllningsmotorer
Betriebsanleitung/lnstructions Bestell-Nr.iOrder No.: EWN 61 O.41 166121b
J
Bauforinen 1HUs 054
Types of construction
1HU3 0s6
Formes
Formas constructivas L_.1 1HU3 058
Forme costruttive
Utfdringsformer
l n
IM B5 IM V1 IM V3
Schaltung
Circuit diagram EEM@ 41, A2 MotoranschluB
Motor connection
@@Ern
Raccordement du moteur
a Sch6ma
Esquema
Schema
Koppling
2A1, 2A2
Conexi6n del motor
Collegamento del motore
Motoranslutning
Tachogenerator-AnschluR
Tachogenerator connection
Raccordement de la dynamo tachymetrique
Conpxi6n del generador tacometrico
Collegamento della dinamo tachimetrica
2N 2 A1
Takogeneratoranslutning
BR, BR2 BremsanschluB

Brake terminals
A2 Racqordement du frdin
Conexi6n del freno
Allacciamento del freno
Bromsanslutning
1,2 Thermowiichter-AnschluR
Temperature monitor connection
Cont16lilur de temp6rature raccordement
Conexi6n del termostato
Attacco per protezione termica
Temperaturvakt Anslutning
2
Fis. 1
AnschluB-fOr Drehmelder.und lmpulsgeber (s. a. lnformationsdienst E 31 1-1 23A). Respecto a la conexi6n del sincr6n y del emisor de impulsos v6ase la inlormacion
E 311-123A.
Terminals lorsynchro and pulse generator (seelnformation Bulletin E 311-123A).
Attacco per sincro e per datore impulsi, vedere bollettino informazioni E 31 1-l 23A.
Voirleuillet documentaire E 31 1-123Apour la connexion d'un r6solveurou d;un impulseur.
Anslutning fdr vridningsgivare och impulsgivare (se information E 31 1 -1 23A).
Beschreibung Description
Anwend ungs berei ch Application
Die Motoren sind selbstgekrihlt (Schutzart lP 54). Sie konnen in The motors are non-ventilated (degree of protection lP 54). The
ijberdachten Rdumen mit normalen klimatischen Bedingungen auf- machines can be installed in covered areas subject to normalclimat-
gestellt werden. Kilhlmitteltemperaturen bis 40 "C zulSssig. ic conditions. The maximum permissible cooling air temperature is
40 'c.
Die Motoren sind mit voller PaBfeder dynbmisch ausgewuchtet. Das The motors are dynamically balanced with full parallel key in position.
Au{- und Abziehen von Antriebselementen (2. B. Riemenscheibe. Fitting and dismantling transmission elements (for example, .belt
Kupplungsscheibe, Zahnrad) und Wdlzlagern ist grunQsdtzlich mit pulley, coupling flange, gear whee-l) and rolling-contact bearings
einer geeigneten Vorrichtung auszuftihren. Gewinde im Wellenende bhouid be carried out using suitabledevices. Use the tapped hole in
benutzen. the shaft end.
Montage lnstallation
Der Anbau muB so erfolgen, daB eine ausreichende Verlustabfuhr The motors must be installed such that adequate cooling is achieved
durch Strahlung und natijrliche Konvektion gewiihrleistet ist. An den by radiaiion and naturalconvection. High surface temp6.ratures may
Motoren konnen hohe OberflSchentemperaturen auftreten. Bei Be- occur on the motors. lf necessary, provide protection against
darf BeriihrungsschutzmaBnahmen vorsehen. touching.
Die Bedienungsoffnlngen am BS-Lagerschild (6.20) miissen fr-ir The service openings on the end shield - non-drive end - (6.20) must
Wartungsarbeiten zug6nglich sein be accessible for maintenance.
AnschlieBen (s. Fig. 1) Connection (see Fig. 1)

Vorsicht! Alle AnschluB- und Wartungsarbeiten nur im spannungs- Attention: All connecting and maintenance work must be carried
Iosen Zustand der Anlage vornehmenl Durch die Dauermagnet- out with the motor de-energized. With the permanent magnet excita-
erregung entsteht sowohl an den Motorklemmen als auch an den
Tachogeneratorklemmen eine Spannung, wenn der Ldufer gedreht
wirdl
MotoranschluB: Lduferspannung muB mit derAngabe auf dem Lei-
tion there is always a voltage at the motor terminals and iachogener-
ator terminals if the rotor is turned!
Motor connection: The armature voltage must agree with thatstated

I
stungsschild ribereinstimmen. Ausreichend bemessene AnschluB- on the rating plite. Connect adequately dimensioned connecting
leitungen an den AnschluBklemmen im Klemmenkasten, Schutzleiter leads to the terminals in the terminal box. Make sure the protective
an diese Klemme @ anschlieBen. FLir Zugentlasturig des AnschluB- earth is connected io the terminal marked @. Ensure there is
kabels sorgen. adequate strain relief for the connecting cable.
Tqchogene"ratoranschluB: Leistungsschild- und Schaltbildangaben Tachogenerator connection: Observe the data on the rating plate
beachten! and in the circuit diagram. Connection is by means of the sockets
AnschluB erfolgt mittels vorhandener Steckhiilsen an den Biirsten- provided on the brush holders. Crimp on the sockets with suitable
haltern. Steckhi.ilsen mit geeignetem Werkzeug.anquetschen oder tools or solder on. Ensure there is adequate strain relief for the
anloten. Fi.ir Zugentlastung der AnschluBleitung sorgen. connecting cable.
.
,.,:, ..
Wartung Maintenance
Vor Demontage des Moiors (2. B. Lagerwechsel) die urspriing- Before desmantling the motor (e.g. for changing the bearings),
liche Lage der Lagerschilde zum Gehiiuse markieren. mark the endshields and the frame to ensure that they are re-
f itted in the same position.
Kommutator und Kohlebtirsten Commutator and carbon brushes

ln regelmiiBigen, zeitlichen Abstiinden durch die Offnung des At regular intervals inspect the commutator through the opening
Kocherbtirstehhalters (Kohle vorher entfernen) Kommutator beob- of the cartridge-type brush holder (remove the brush first). For a
achten. Fi.ir weitergehende Begutachiung ist Abbau des Lager- more detailed evaluation it is necessary to remove the end shield.
schildes notwendig. Wenn Riefen oder Brandstellen an der Ober- lf scoring or burn marks on the surface of the commutator can no }
flbche des Kommutators nicht mehr mit feinem Schmirgelleinen zu longer be removed with fine emery cloth, the commutator must be
entfernen sind, ist dieser zu i.iberdrehen (Glimmerisoiierung zwi- resurfaced by skimming (undercut the mica insulation.between the
schen den Kommutatorlamellen sauber ausfrdsen. commutator segments).
Auswechseln der Kohlebtirsten: Die Motoren haben Kocherbiirsten- Replacing the carbon brushes: The mctors have cartridge{ype
halter. Nachprijfen der BLirsten nach ca. 1000 Motorlaufstunden brush holders. After 1000 hours of motor operation remove cap 7.13
durch Abschrauben der Kappe 7.13. Normalldnge der Brirste 25 mm, and check the length of the brush. The normal length is 25 mm. When
zuliissiger Abrieb bis auf 10 mm, dann Bijrsten erneuern. Nur gleiche they have worn down to '10 mm (minimum permissible value) the
Qualitet der Bursten, wie vom Werk geliefert, einsetzen. brushes must be replaced. Ohly use brushes of the same quality as
those provided by the works.
ln geeigneten Zeitabstdnden ist die Reinigung der Maschine zu It is also recommended to clean the machine at suitable intervals,
empfehlen, dabei ist insbesondere auf die Beseitigung eventueller taking particular care to remove any carbon dust deposits.
Kohlestaubablagerungen zu achten.
Die Schutzsenkungen fLir die Bijrstenkocher im BS-Lagerschild sind The protective recesses for the brush-holder boxes in the end shield
besondeis sauberzuhalten. Nach jedem Bi..irstenwechsel vor dem at the non-drive end are to be kept specially clean. When changing
Einlegen der Dichtung (7.14) Schutzsenkung sorgf dltig mit trockener the brushes, always clean the protective recess with dry com-
Druckluft ausblasen. pressed air prior to inserting the seal (7.14).
Lagerwechsel Ghanging the bearings

Die Motoren haben Lqger mit Dauerschmierung. The motors have prelubricated bearings.
Achtung! AS- und BS-Lager haben unterschiedliche GrciBen. lmportant: The drive and non-drive end bearings are of different
Es werden 2RS-C3-Lager verwendet. Die Dichtscheiben der slzes.
Lager mUssen aus warmebestiindigem Material (bis 180 oC) The bearings used are of type 2RS-C3. The sealing rings of'
sein. Bei Wartung des Kommutators sollten auch die Lager the bearings must consist of a material which resists heat up to
gewechselt werden. 180 "C. lt is adVisable to change the bearings each time
Fiillung des Fettraumes nach DIN 625 81.2. Fettsorte: Lithium- commutator maintenance is carried out.
Komplex-Fett, das der Laufpriifung B nach DIN 51806 geniigt, Fill the'grease chamber to approximately 35 o/o of its capacity.
z. B. UNIREX N3 (Fa. Esso). Type of grease: Lithium complex grease satisfying running test
B to DIN 51806, e.g. UNIREX N3 (Esso).
Tachogenerator Tachogeneraior
(siehe Betriebsanleitung 610.4 21)
1 17 4 / (see instruction 610.41 11 4/ 21)
Der Tachogenerator ist praktisch wartungsf rei. Er kann ohne Gef ahr The tachogenerator requires practically no.maintenance. lt can be
einer Entmagnetisierung demontiert werden. Die Kohlebiirsten nach dismantled without the risk of de-magneiization. When the carbon
Abnutzung auf etwa 7 mm, satzweise in gleicher Ausftihrung und brushes have worn down to approx. 7 mm they must be replaced in a
Qualitdt, wie vom Werk verwendet, auswechseln uhd einschlelfen. set. Only use brushes of the same type and grade as those
provided by the works. Bed them in.
Demontage des Liiufers (8.84): M6-Befestigungsschraube (8.85) Dismantling the rotor (8.84): Remove the M6 fixing bolt (8.85). lnsert
herausschrauben. Stahlstitt(4,8x30) biszumAnschlag in die Motor- steel pin (4.8x30) completely into the motor shaft (to protect the
welle einstecken (zum Schutz der Zentrierung.im Wellenende)- An centre hole in the shaft end). ln place of the fixing screw, screw in an
Stelle der Befestigungsschraube eine MB-Schraube (Mindestliinge MB bolt (minimum length 30 mm). ln this way the rotor is separated
30 mm) eindrehen und dadurch Laufer vom konischen Sitz auf der from the motor shaft (1:10 taper). Prevent rotor from turning by
Motorwelle (Kegel 1:10) abdriicken. Mitdrehen des Liiufers durch engaging the hexagon nut (19 mm across flats) on the rotor hub.
Halten am Sechskant (SW19) der Liiufernabe verhindern.
Bei Montage des Liiufers M6-Befestigungsschraube (8.85) mit When assembling the rotor apply 10 Nm torque to the M6 f ixing bolt
10 Nm anziehen. Maximale Rundlaufabweichung des Kommutators (8.85). Maximum radial runout'for the commutator is 0.04 mm.
0,04 mm.
Bremse Brake
Die Dauermagnet-Haltebremse arbeitet nach dem Ruhestromprinzip. The permanent magnet holding brake operates on the closed-circuit
Sie offnet bei Anlegen einer Gleichspannung von 24 V + 10 % . Die principle. lt opens when a d.c. voltage of 24 V +10 % is applied.
Spannung muB innerhalb des angegebenen Toleranzbereichs liegen, These voltage limits must be adhered to, otherwise the degree of'
da sonst die Betriebssicherheit gefdhrdet ist. Bei eingeschaltetem operational safety is reduced. When the motor is switched.on, the
Motor muB die Bremse immer erregt, d. h. geoffnet sein. Beim Aus- brake must always be energized, i.e. open. When the brake is de-
schalten der Bremse (entr6gen) oder bei Stromausfall wird die An- energ ized or. if the power fails, the a rmatu re d isk (2.20) is attracted by
kerscheibe (2.20) vom Dauermagneten angezogen und dadurch die the permanent magnet and arrests the motor shaft. Fof. brake
Motorwelle festgehalten. BremsenanschluB siehe Fig. 1. connection see Fig. 1.
Der BremsenanschluB erfolgt an der zweipoligen Reihenklemme The brake connection is made by means of a two-way terminal.block
(BR, BR2), die am St6nder (8.86) des Tachogenerators befestigt ist. (BR, BR2) which is mounted to the stator (8.86) of the tacho-
generator.
*
Demontage der Bremse Dismantling the brake
Achtungl Beim Abklemmen der Bremsenwicklung wird die Anker- Note: When the brake coil is disconnected the armature disk (2 .20)
scheibe (2.20) sofort angezogen. Wenn ein Drehen des L6ufers will be attracted at once. lf it is necessary to rotate the rotor (3 .00)
(3.00) oder der Ankerscheibe (2.20) notwendig ist, oder das Lager- or the armature disk (2.20), or the end shield ('1 .40) together with ihe
schild (1.40) mit dem Magnetkorper vom Liiufer abgezogen werden magnet body of the rotor must be withdrawn, the brake coil must be
muB, muB die Bremsenwicklung an Spannung gelegt werden. Eine energized. The use of force in separating the armature disk (2.20)
gewaltsame Trennung von Ankerscheibe (2.20) und Magnetkorper f rom the magnet body (2. 10) would cause the disk spring to become
(2. 0) f tihrt zur Verf ormung der Membranfeder an der Ankerscheibe.
1 deformed.
a) lnnensechskantschrauben (1.26) losen. a) Undo hex. socket screws (1.26).
b) Muttern (1.57) losen und AS-Lagerschild (1.40) abziehen. b) Undo nuts (1.37) and remove end shield - drive end - (1.40).
c) Bremse unter Spannung setzen, Bolzenschrauben. der Abzieh- c) Energize the briil{p.rele56ecoil'and screw !,he rods of the puller
vorrichtung in Gewindelocher des Magnetkorpers (2.10) ein- into the tapped holes o{ the brake (2.10). Position the puller,on
schrauben. Abziehvorrichtung auf den Wellenspiegel aufsetzen the shaft end face and tighten up. Withdraw magnet body (2. 10)
und anziehen. Magnetkorper (2.10) mit dem Lager etwa 20 mm together with the bearing by about 20 mm.
abziehen.
d) Bremsenzuleitung abklemmen und aus dem Gehduse herauszie- d) Disconnect the brake lead and withdraw from the stator hous-
hen. Magnetkorper (2.10) ganz abziehen. Abgezogenes Lager ing. Remove magnet body (2.10) completely. Do not reuse the
nicht wieder verwenden. bearing once withdrawn.
e) lm Bedarfsfall kann die Ankerscheibe (2.20) ausgetauscht wer- e) lf necessary, replace the armature disk (2.20). Remove the arma-
den: Die mit Loctite gesicherten Schrauben (2.22)losen und An- ture disk by undoing the screws (2.2).fhe screws are secured
kerscheibe abnehmen- with loctite.
Montage der Bremse Assembly of the brake
e a)
b)
Ankerscheibe (2.20) mit Schrauben (2.22) an der Bremsscheibe
(2.30) befestigen. Schrauben mit Loctite Typ 0572 oder Fluid D.
sichern.
Den Magnetkorper unter Spannung setzen und an die Anker-
a) Screw the armature disk (2.20) to the brake disk (2.30) using
b)
screwb (2.22). Secure the screws with type0572 orfluid D. loctite.
Energize the magnet body and position it against the armature

scheibe anlegen. Danach Spannung wegnehmen. disk. The brake release coil can now be deenergized.
c) Lager, (1.60) auf Welle warm aufziehen c) Pushthe bearing (1.60) onto theshaftwhilst hot.
d) Zentrierrand des erneut elektrisch erregten Magnetkorpers zum d) Re-energizethe brakeand centre the centering rim of the magnet
LagerauBenring vorzentrieren, um beim Aufziehen des AS-Lager- body against the outer bearing ring in order to ensure that the
schildes ein Verkanten zu vermeiden. end shield - drive end - is pulled on true.
e) Bremsenzuleitung durch die Bohrung ,,N'1 stecken und im Klem- e) Bring out the brake lead through bore "N" and connect to
menkasten an die Klemmen (BR, BR2) anschlieBen (s. Fig. 1). terminals BR, BR2 in the terminal block (see Fig. 1). Push the end
BS-Lagerschild an das Gehiiuse heranschieben. Bremse unter -
shield - non-drive end into contact with the stator housing.
Spannung setzen. Darauf achten, daB die Nordpolbohrung (N) Energize the brake release coil. Ensure that the north pole bore
im Gehiiuse frei von VerguBmasse ist und oben liegt. Eventuell (N) in the stator housing is f ree from casting compound and lies
VerguBmasse mit einem Schraubenzieher durchstoBen. at the top. Any casting compound fouling the hole should be
pushed out with a screwdriver.
f) ln eine cier Gewindebohrungen des MagnetkorperS (2.10) eine f) To facilitate f itting, screw a stud into the magnet body (2.10) and
Stiftschraube als Montagehilfe einschrauben. Dann das AS, then place the end shield - drive end - (1.40) over the shaft end
Lag.erschild (1.40) i..iber Wellenende und Stiftschraube aufschie- and stud. Attach the end shield to the stator housing using nuts
ben. Das Lagerschild mit den Muttern (1.37) und Federscheiben . (1.37) and spring washers (1.38).
(1.58) am Gehduse befestigen.
g) Magnetkorper (2.10) am AS-Lagerschild durch die lnnensechs- g) Attach magnet body (2.10) to the end shield - drive end - using
kantschrauben (1.28) befestigen. Anzugsmoment 2,9 Nm. hex. socket screws (1.28). Tightening torque 2.9 Nm.
h) Nicht mit Hammer auf das Wellenende schlagen. h) Do not hit the shaft extension wiih a hammer.
Nachr0sten der Bremse Subsequent fitting of the brake

Nachtriiglicher Finbau der Bremse in den Motor ist moglich. Brem- The brake may be subsequently installed in the motor. Brake
senbauteile und Einbauunterlagen im Werk anfordern. component parts and fitting instructions and drawings are obtain-
able from the works.
3
Description Descripci6n
Utilisation Aplicaci6n
Les moteurs sont d refroidissement naturel (indice de protection Los motores tienen autorrefrigeraci6n (clase de proteccion lP 54)
lP 54). lls peuvent 6tre install6s dans des locaux abrit6s, sous des y pueden ser instalados en locales cubiertos con condiciones cli-
conditions climatiques normales. Temp6rature maximale admissible m6ticas normales. Temperatura admisible del medio refrigerante:
du fluide refrig6rant 40'C. hasta 40'C.
Le_s moteurs sont 6quilibr6s dynamiquement avec clavette entidre. Los motores han sido equilibrados din6micamente con la chaveta
ll faut toujours se servir d'un dispositif appropri6 pour monter et completa ya montada. Los elementos de transmisi6n (p. ej..: poleas,
demonter les organes de transmission (poulid d courroie, plateau bridas de acoplamiento y ruedas dentadas) y los rodamientos
d'accouplement. roue dent6e, pignon, eic.) et Ies roulemenis. Utiti- tienen que ser montados y desmontados siempre con los dispositi-
ser le trou taraud6 du bout d'arbre. vos apropiados. Utilizar la rosca prevista en el extremo del 5rbol.
Montage Montaje l
Le montage doit 6tre effectu6 de maniere d assurer une dissipation El montaje debe hacerse de forma que, mediante la radiaci6n y la
calorifique suffisante par rayonnement et convection naturelle. La convecci6n natural, quede garantizada la evacuaci6n del calor
temp6rature superficielle du moteur peut atteindre des valeurs producido por las p6rdidas. Las superficies de los motores pueden t
6levees. Pr6voir au besoin des mesures de protection contre les alcanzar altas temperaturas, por lo que, caso dado, se deber6n
contacts directs. prever las protecciones necesarias contra contactos involuntarios.
Les ouvertures de visite du flasque-palier c6t6 B (6.20) doivent 6tre Las aberiuras previstas en el escudo porta-co.iinetes (6.20), lado B,
accessibles pour les travaux dtentretien. deben quedar accesibles para poder realizar trabajos de manteni-
miento.
Raccordement (voir figure 1) Conexi6n (v6ase fig. 1)

lmportant: ne proc6der aux travaux de raccordement et d'entretien Cuidado: Las conexiones y los trabajos de mantenimiento se
que si l'installation est hors tension. L'excitation par aimants per- deben realizar solo y cuando la instalaci6n est6 sin tensi6n. Debido
manents donne naissance d une tension aux bornes du moteur et a la excitacion con imanes permanentes, los bornes del motor.y del
d celles de la dynamo tachym6trique lorsqu'on fait tourner le rotor. generador tacom6trico esta16n baio tension siemore oue oile el
I
Raccordement du moteur: la tension rotoriQue doit coincider avec Conexi6n del motor: La tensi6n del rotor debe coincidir con la
la valeur figurant sur la plaque signal6tique. Raccorder des conduc- indicada en la placa de caracteristicas. A los bornes dispuestos en
teurs de section suffisante aux bornes de raccordement de la boite d la correspondiente caja se deben conectar conductores suficiente-
bornes; brancher ie conducteur de protection A la borne @. Pro- mente dimensionados; el conductor de protecci6n se conecta al
c6der ir l'arnarrage du cAble de raccordement. borne marcado con @. Prestar atenci6n a que el cable de aco-
metida no quede sometido a esfuerzos por tracci6n.
Raccordement de la dynamo tachym6trique: observer les indica- Conexi6n del generador tacom6trico: Observar las indicaciones
tions de la plaque signaletique et du sch6ma de branchement. hechas en la placa de caracteristicas y en el esquema de conexio-
Le raccordement a lieu aux porte-balais.au moyen de fiches Faston. nes. La conexi6n se hace con los casquillos previstos al efecto, ha-
Sertir ou souder ces dernidres avec ult outil appropri6. Proc6der d ci6ndolos encajar sobre los porta-escobillas; soldarlos o aplastar-
l'amarrage du cAble de raccordement. los con una herramienta apropiada^.El cabie de acometida no debe
quedar sometido a esfuerzos dortracci6h.
Entretien Mantenimiento
Avant le d6montage du moteur (par exemple en cas de rem- Antes de desmontar el motor (p. ej. para cambiar los cojinetes)
placement du palier), rep6rer la position initiale du flasque- marcar la posici6n actual de los escudos respecto a la caja del
palier par rapport d la carcasse. motor.
Collecteur et balais en charbon Colector y escobillas

Observer le collecteur d intervalles 169uliers par l'ouverture d'une Comprobar peri6dicamente el estado del colector, haci6ndolo a
cage de balai (apr6s avoir enleve le balai). Pourtoute inspection plus tr:av6s de los orif icios de los porta-escobillas (quitar primero las esco-
pouss6e, il faut d6monter le flasque-palier. Si les stries ou les traces billas). Para una inspecci6n m6s detallada, hay que quitar el escudo
d'amorgage d la surface du collecteur ne peuvent pas 6tre enlev6es
d la toile d'6meri fine, il faut reprendre ce dernier au tour (fraiser
porta-cojinetes. El colectortendr5 que ser repasado a torno cuando
en su superficie se aprecien estrias o quemaduras que no puedan ser
}
m6ticuleusement l'isolation entrelames en micanite). eliminadas con tela de esmeril de granulaci6n {ina (f resar minuciosa-
mente el aislamiento de mica que hay entre las delgas del colector).
Remplacement des balais en charbon: les moteurs possddent des Recambio de las escobillas: Los motores tienen porta-escobillas
cages de palais; v6rif ier les balais toutes les 1000 heures de marche tipo bolsa. Comprobar el estado de las escobillas despu6s de unas
du moteu r environ, en d6vissant le capot 7. 13. Longueur norma le d u 1000 horas de servicio, para lo qu.e hay que desatornillar la caperuza
balai 25 mm, usure admissible jusqu'd 10 mm r6siduels, en-deg6 de (7.13). Las escobillas nuevas tienen urra longitud de 25 mm. Des-
cette valeur remplacer les balais. Utiliser des balais de m6ine qualit6 gaste admisible hasta unos 10 mm; cuando hayan alcanzado esta
que ceux livres par l'usine. longitud, recambiarlas. Emplear escobillas que sean de la misma
calidad como la que suministra la f5brica.
ll est conseill6 de nettoyer la machine d intervalles convenables, en Recomendamos limpiar los motores en intervalos adecuados,
veillant particulidrement d l'6limination des d6p6ts de pouSsiere de prestando especial atenci6n a la eliminacion de los dep6sitos de
charbon. polvo de carb6n, que se hayan podido formar.
Les lamages pratiqu6s dans le flasque-palier c6t6 B pour les cages Muy importante es tambi6n Ia limpieza de los avellanados para los
soht d tenir en parfait 6tat de propret6. Passer le lamage au jet d'air porta-escobillas del escudo portacojinetes del lado B. Despu6s de
comprim6 sec aprds le remplacement des balais et avant de poser le cada cambio de escobillas y antes de colocar la junta (7.14), limpiar
joint (7.14). minuciosamente con aire comprimido seco dichos avellanados. 1
i
tl
i't,
Remplacement des roulements Recambio de los cojinetes
Les moteurs possedent des roulements graiss6s d vie. Los motores llevan cojinetes con lubrificaci6n permanente. itt
Attention: Les roulements c6te D et cdt6 N sont de taille diff6- Atenci6n! Los cojinetes de los lados A y B son de tamafio 1..
!. .'
I
rente. ll est fait usage de roulements 2RS-C3. Leurs d6flecteurs diferente. Se utilizan cojinetes 2 RS-C3. Las arandelas de ttl
doivent 6tre en mat6riau r6sistant A la chaleur (usqu'ir 1BO o C). hermetizaci6n de los cojinetes deben ser de materiales resisten-
Lors de I'entretien du collecteur, il faudrait aussi r6mplacer le's tes al calor (hasta 180 o C). Al efectuar los trabajos de manteni- l':
f.;
roulements. miento del colector, convendria renovar los cojinetes.
Remplissage de la chambre A graisse: 35 o/o environ. Graisse: Carga de la cavidad para grasar 35 0/o aprox. Tipo de grasa: I
graisse au lithium satisfaisant-d l'esSai de marche B selon A base de litio, que datisfaga la prueba de mariha B, segtn t, I
DIN 51806, par exempte UNTREX N3 (Esso). DIN 51806, por ejemplo, UNIREX N3 (Esso). rc,
Wr-
4 &i
SIEMENS
SiChgfhgitSinfOfmatiOngn fiir etektrische Betriebsmittel zum Einsatz in Starkstromantagen
Safety infOfmatiOll for electrical equipment for use in heavy current installations
InfofmatiOns relatives a la s€Curit6 de mat€riels electriques destin6s a etre utitses dans des instattations
d courant fort
lnfOrmaCiOnes de Seguridad para los equipos el€ctricos que se utilicen en instalaciones de energia
lnfOfmaziOni pef la SiCurezZo nell' impiego di dispositivi elettrlci in impianti ad alta tensione
StikerhetSinfOrmatiOfl iOr elektrisk utrustning som anvdnds i starkstrdmsanlliiggningar
Betriebsanleitung / lnstructions EWN-Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 61 0.42 356/ 21
DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Dieses I nformationsblatt m it den Warnhi nweisen This information sheet with its warning is in addi-
gilt als ZusaE zur produktspezifischen Betriebs- tion to the operating instructions for the individual
anleitung und muB aus Sicherheitsgriinden be- products and for safety reasons its contents must
sonders beachtet werden. be adhered to.
GEFAHR DANGER
a Diese eledrischen Haschinen
bzw. Ger5te sind Betiiehsmittel
zum Einsalz i n indusJriellen SJark-
The electric machines and cquip-
ment are Jor use' in industrial
heavy qutrent inatatlalions.
o
E
o
I stromanlagen.
lriebes haben diese Betriebsmll-
I During opetating this equipment
has bare pails which are live and
o
o tel gefdhrliche, spannungsfiih- o dangerous and may also have.
9"di
tqao= rende blanke Teile, ggl. auch be- 'moving ot totaling parts, For this
o
o oG wegte bzw. rotierende felle. Sie Jeagon, unauthorized removal ol
LoO
kiinnten deshalb, z. B. bei unzu- the necessary coyenl, impropef
II
6og
cFO I fr ssi gem Entlernen d er e rto rde rI i- use, incorrect operalion or insutli-
'i o!
=
< 6-
: l?
b9;.
E'S
chen Abdeckungen, bei unsach-
gemdBem Einsatz, lalscher Be-
dienung oder unzureichender
IT cient maintenance could lead Jo
seyerepeisonal iniury or prcperty
,d4mage.
= iil Wa rtu ng,schwercte g esui ndh eitli-
.E:i
o:o c;he oder materielle Sehdden ver-
o:6 utsachen.
o,-
Die liir die Sicherhelt der Anlage VerahtwortIiehen Those responsible ror the salefi of the insJallalion
c9E mdissea deshalb gewdhrleisten, daB must therelore ensure that
E b-
o{i.- - nur qualilizierte Perconen mit ArheiJen an den Ma- - only qualitied personnet are entrusted to work on
o.9J schinen bzw. Geriiten beauftragt werden, Jhe machines or equrpment,
a9! - diese Perconen u. a. die mitgelielerten Betilebs- - lhese pelsons alerays have at their disposal the
anleitungen und iibrigen Unterlagen der Ptodukt- operating instructions and other prcduct docu-
f
o
dokumentation hei allen entsprechenden Arbei- tllerltjtion supplied when they do such worlg and
F ten stets verliigba r haben u nd verpllichtet werden, thal they undertake to follow consistently any s:uch
diese UnJetlagen konsequent zu beachten, instructions,
a - Arbeiten an den Maschinen bzw. Gerdten oder in

deren Niihe tiir nichtqualilizierte Perconen unter-
sagt werden.
- non-qualilied perconnel are not pemitted to work
on ot neat the machines or.equipment
QualilizierJes Personal sind Personen, die, auf Gfund ihrer Qualilied perconnel are persons who, on account of their
Ausbildung, Erfahrung und Unterweisung sowie ihrer Kennt- training, experience.and instruction and their khowledge of
nisse tiber einschliigige Normen, Bestimmungen, U nfallverhU- relevant standards, specif ications, accident prevention re!ula-
tungsvorschrilten und Betriebsverhiiltnisse, von dem fiir die Si- tions and operating conditions, have been authorized by those
cherheit der Anlage Verantwortlichen berechtigt worden sihd, responsible for the safety of the plantto carry out the necessary
die jeweilp erforderlichen Tdtigkeiten auszufr.ihren und dabei work andwho can recognize and avoid possible dangers (see
mogliche Gefahren erkennen und vermeiden konnen (Defini- also IEC 364 for definitions of specialist personnel).
tionen fiir Fachkrefte siehe auch DIN VDE 0105 oder
rEc 364).
Unter anderem sind auch Kenntnisse tiber Erste-Hilfe-MaB- A knowledge of first aid is also required as is infor:mation about
nahmen und die 6rtlichen Rettungseinrichtungen erforderlich. local rescue facilities.
Ftir Arbeiten an Starkstromanlagen ist das Verbot des Einsat- The stipulation that only qualif ied personnel may work on heavy
..zes nichtqualifizierter Personen z. B. in DIN VDE 0105 oder current installations is included for example in IEC 364.
IEC 364 geregelt.
/!\ wnnnunc E'*i'i:"i:i3il;""'.;i:"li;ggi I wnnr,rrruc,i,f"";"2itr?!,rif!?iiifi,E?!;

beiten der Arilage sowie alle Arbeiten zu lransport, and all work concerning tdnspofi, assembly, commis-
tontage, Installation, Inbetriebsetzung, Wartung und sioning, maintenance and tepafu is done by qualilied
neparatuten von qualifiziertem Perconal ausgeliihrt perconnel orchecked by responsible gkilled perconnel.
bzw. durch vc'rantworlliche Faehkrflue konJrolliert wer-
den.
Particular note ,ri.rst be ta!<en of the roilwingt
- die Sechnischen Daten und iiber die zul6ssi- - fihe technical data and infiomation on permissible
ge. Vewendung (HonJage., Anschlu0l Umgebungs- use fassembly conditionsr. connection: conditions,
tO Siemens AG 199O 1
und BetriebshedingungenJ, die u.a. im Katalo:g, den ambient and opetating conditions), which are contai-
Auttragsuntertagen, der Betfiebsanleitung, den ned in the calatog, otder docurienls, operating
Schildangaben und der iibrigen Erzeggnisdokumen- instructions, rating plate and gther product documen-
tation enthalten sind,
- die allgemeinen Errichtungs- und Sichetheitsyor- - ?r!'""XLn.,r"I erection and satety regutations,
schriften,
- die drtlichen, anlagespezilischen Bestimmungen und - Ilhe local, plant-specific specllications and require-
Erlordernisse, t'tents,
- det fachgerechte Einsat2 von Wetkzeugen, Hebe- und - The proper use of tools,lifting gear and transporl deyi.
Tra nspo rtei n fi c htu n g e n, ces,
- die Benutzung persiinlicher. Schutzausstattu ngen, - The use oI personal protective gear.
- Montagebedingungen fiiir Ger€te, die ggl. eitsfre- - Installation instructions lor equipment which may be
chend IPOO (ohne Abdeckungenl ausgelietert wer- supplied to IPOO (without coverc). In operation, this
den: Im Betrieb muB der ertordeiliche Beriihrungs- equipment m ust have the necessary shock prctecJion
schutz vorhanden bzw. eine geliihrlici;he Anndheriig Jitled or accessmust be prevented whichcould resul?
verhindert sein. in dangen
Die Betriebsanleitungen kiinnen aus Griinden derhber- These instructions cannot Ctaim to cover aII details of
sichtlichkeit nicht aIIe Detailinformationen zu miigli- possible equipment vafiations, not in partlcuiar can
Ghen Bauvarianten enthalten und kiinnen insbesondere they provide lor every possihle example of installation,
nicht jeden denkbaren FaII der Aufstellung, des Betrie- operation or maintenance, 7his means thal the instruc-
bes oder der Wadung befiicksichtigen. DemgemdB sind tions lor machines or equipment lor industrial applica-
in den Betriebsanleitungen im wesentlichen nur solche tions normally include only Jhe dircctions to be followed
Ilinweise enthalten, die bei bestimmungsgemiiBer Ver- by qualified perconal (see aboye) where the equipment
wendung der Maschinen oder Gerdte in indusJrielten is used for its delined purpose.
Einaatzbereichen liir qualiliziertes Personal (siehe
ohenl erlorderlich sind.
Falls im Sondertall hei heabsichtigJem Einsatz der lI in special cases itis intendedto usethe machines
Haschinen oder G.9rd'te in nieht industriellen Berei- or equipment in non-industrial areas and therefore
chen eventuell erhiihte Anlorderungen geatellt weh requirements may be morestringent, e.g. protection
dery E. B. Beriihrungsschutz gegen Kindertinger
o. 5.1, miissen diese Bedingungen bei der tontage
durch zusdtzliche SchutzmaBnahmen anlagensCi-
against conlact by children fingerc, ecJ., compliance
with such requirements im,ust be assured during
installation by providing additional protective mea=
I
ti g gewd h rl ei stet we rde n. sures on site,
Bei diesbeziiglichen Unklarheiten, insbesondere bei It therc ate any uncertainties in this respect, part-
fehlenden produktspezilischen Detail-Inlormationen, icularly in the event ol missing product-related inlorma-
mdissen die ertordeilichen Kldrungen iiber die zustdn- tion, clarilication musl be obtained via the appropfiate
dige SlEUEMS-Vertriebsstelle heibeigeliihrt werden, SIEfiENS sales olfice, Please always indicate the
Bitte hierzu grundsdtzlich Maschinen- bzw. GerdJe- machine or equipment type and serial numben
Typhezeichnung und Fertigungsnummer angeben.
..!!. .....
ES WIRD EMPFOHLEN, FUR PLANUNGS., MONTAGE.,INBE- WE WOULD RECoMMEND nsiiiNo,FoR THE Ass|srRrucE
TRIEBSETZUNGS- UND SERVICE-AUFGABEN DIE UNTER- AND SERVICES OF THE COMPETENT SIEMENS SERVICE
STUTZUNG UND DIENSTLEISTUNGEN DER ZUSTANDIGEN CENTRES FOR PLANNING, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING
SIEMENS-SERVICEZENTREN IN ANSPRUCH ZU NEHMEN. AND SERVICING TASKS.
HINWEIS: Fiir allgemeine Arbeiten, z.B. zumPrUfen eingehen- NOTE: For general work such as checking of incomming deli-
der Lieferungen (Transportschriden), zum langfristigen Einla- veries (damage in transit), storing and preserving for prolonged
gern und Konservieren von Maschinen, zur Fundamentprri- periods of time, foundation testing, fitting of couplings, installa-
fung, zum Aufziehen von Kupplungen, Aufstellen und Ausiich- tion and elignment of machines, etc., further detailed informa-
ten von Maschinen, lnstallationsmaBnahmen u.v.a., sind wei- tion is given in the SIEMENS installation instructions which can
tere Detail-lnformationen in den SIEMENS-Montageschriften be obtained from the sales offices.
oder Arbeitsrichtlinien enthalten, die erforderlichenfalls riber
'die Vertriebsstellen bezogen werden konnen.
A }
/! \ wnn ruu ruc ""!"i::;::r::i:i!i::;:::X;Z:
henen Wartungs-, I nspektions- und RevisionsmaBnah-
/f\ WARNING 7:he specitied-
inspection and ovethaul mea-
mai-ntenance,
sures must be canied oui regulaily by traiied service
'men legelmd''lig von routiniertem Senrice-Peronal perconnel in order to avoid any intefiuptions or break-
durchfiihren zu lassen (siehe obenl. downs (see above). Deviations trom the normal perlor-
Verdnderungen gegeniiber dem Normalbetrieh (hiihere mance (higher powet input, higher temperatutea or
Leistungsaulnahme, Temperaturen oder Schwingun- vibrations, unusual noises or odourc, reactions by moni-
gen, ungegftihnliche Gerdusche oder Geriiche, Anspre- toring equipment, ect.l indicate that proper fiunction oJ
chen der U.berwachungseinfichtungen usw.l lassen er- the unit is impaired, In order to avoid taults, which might
kennen, dag die Funktion beeinkechfigt ist, zut VemeL directly or indirectly cauae serious damage to propCrty
dung von Stiirungen, die ihrerceits mittelbar oder un- or injury to persons, the responsible maiitenance per-
mittetbar schwere Perconen- odet Sachschdden bewir- sonnel must be notilied immediately
ken kiinnten, muB das zustendige Wartungsperconal
dann umgehend verctflndigt werden.
/i\ tM ZuETFELSFALL DtE ENTSIIEaHENDEN BE- A rFrN DOttBT,SWTTCHOFF7:HEEOUTpMENtIfrtHE-
zI T TR,EBST'/ITIEL SOFORT ABSCHALTEN! / I\ DIATELY.
HINWEIS: Es wird darauf hingewiesen, daB der lnhalt der Be- NOTE: The contents of the operating instructions and product
triebsanleitungen und Produktdokumentationen nicht Teil ei- documentation shall not become part of or modify any prior or
ner fruheren oder bestehenden Vereinbarung, Zusage oder ei- existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The Sales
nes Rechtsverhdltnisses ist oder dieses ablindern soll. Sdmtli- Contract contains the entire obligations of Siemens. The war-
che Verpf lichtungen von Siemens ergeben sich aus dem jewei- ranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole
ligen Kaufvertrag, der auch die vollstiindige und allein gUltige warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not
, Gewdhrleistungsregelung, enthiilt. Diese vertraglichen Ge- create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
wahrleistungsbestimmungen werden durch die Ausfrjhrungen
dieser Anleitungen und Dokumentationen weder erweiiert
noch beschrdinkt.
4
FRANQATS ESPANOL
La pr6sente fiche d'information, qui comporte les Esta hoja informativa con indicaciones de peligro,
marques d'avertissement, s'inscrit en compl6- es complementaria a las instrucciones de servicio
ment d la documentation du produit et doit 6tre especificas del producto y su contenido debe
respect6e dans tous ses points pour des raisons observarse especialmente por razones de seguri-
de s6curit6. dad.
DANGEN
Les machines et appareils 6lectrh PELIGNO
ques sont des mat6riels destin6s Las mdquinas y aparatos el6ctri-
I 6tre utilis6s dans des installa- cos torman parte de inslalacio-
I tione industrielles A courant fort.
Ces mat6riets comportent des I nes induslriales de energia el6c-
trica, DuranJe su sewicio tienen
a parties aclives nues ef aventuel- o algunas partea descubiertas
Iement des piEces en mouvement sometidas a tensiones peligro-
ou en totation susceptr'bles de sas, pudiendo haber olras sujetas
r
constituet un danger en courc de a movimiento o totaci6n. Por es,te
1l
I
rt fonctionnement, lls pourraient
par cons6quenJ occasionner des
I6sions corporelles 0r6s grayes ou
des dommages mat6riels impor-
tants, par exemple en cas dtenld-
motivo, pueden dar ofigen
siempre a graves dafroa persona-
Ies o materiafes sr, por ejemplo,
se eliminan indebidamente las
cubieftas necesafias, se ftace
ve m ent i ntem pestr'f des rec ouv te- uso indebido de las mismas, se
ments n6cessaires, en cas dtutili- manejan ert6neamente o no se
sation non approprl6e, en cas de practican en ellas las sulicientes
manoeuvte incorrecte ou en cas operaciones de mantenimiento.
de carence au niveau de ltentre-
tien,
I Il incombe par cons6quent aux responsables de la
s6curi!6 de ltinstallation de laire en sorte
- que seules des personnes qualili6es soient chah
g6es de ltex6cution de travaux sur fes machines
Los responsables de la seguridad de la instalaci6n
tienen que garantizar quet
- solo se encatguen los trabajos a realizar en las
ou.aut les appareils, mdquinas v aparatos a.petsonas caliticadas
- que pour ltex6cution de tous les travaux cone-
spondanls, ces peftionnes disposent en pema- - que dichas personas aI realizar los correspon-
nence de Ia notice de rnise en oeuvre livr6e avec Ie dientes ttabaios tengan siempre a su disposici6n
ptoduit et des autres 6l6ments de Ia documenta- y se comprcrmetan a ohsewar consecuentemente
tion du produit et qu,elles soient tenues de se con- Ias instrucciones de seruicio suministradas y Ia
tormer strictement d cette documentation, et derhds documentaci6n especilica de los ptoduc-
- qu'il soit interdit aux personnes non qualiti6es d'e- tos,
x6cutef des ttavaux sur les machines ou appareils - Se prohib-a.trabaiar qn las mdquinas y.aparatos o
ou d leur voisinage. en sus proximltades:a perconas no calilicadas.
Far PEREONNEL QUALIFTE il faut entendre les personnes PERSONALCALIFICA,DO son aquellas personas que por su
qui, au vu de leur formation, de leur exp6rience et de leur infor- formaci6n, experiencia e indtrucci6n asi como por sus conbci-
mation ainsi que de leurs connaissances des normes et regle- mientos sobre las normas, determinaciones, prescripciones
ments applicables, des prescriptions de pr€vention d'acci- sobre prevencion de accidentes y sobre las condiciones del
dents et des conditions d'exploitation, ont et6 habilitees par le servicio correspondientes, estan autorizadas por el respon-
responsable de la 'Securit6 de I'installation a executer les sable de la seguridad de la instalaciOn a ejecutar las activida-
taches necessaires, et qui soient en mesure de reconnaitre des des necesarias, reconociendo y evitando los posibles peligros
dangers 6ventuels et de les €viter (pour les ddfinitions relatives (sobre las definiciones de personal especializado consultese
a la competence des personnes, voir aussi DIN VDE 0105 ou DIN VDE 0105 o CEI 364).
cEr 364).
t ,| Elles doivent aussi avoir des connaissances de secourisme
ainsi que de connaissances des 6quipements de sauvetage se
Entre otros, hay que tener conocimiento sobre los pri6eros
auxilios a prestar y sobre los equipos de salvamento locales.
trouvant sur plaie.
$ L'interdiction de confier des travaux sur des installations A cou- En las normas DIN VDE 0105 o en CEI 364 se regula la prohibi-
rant fort d des personnes non qualifiees est reglementee, par ci6n de emplear personas no calificadas para trabajos en
exemple dans DIN VDE 0105 ou CEI 364. instalaciones de energia electrica.
fiiI
/\
/!\ nrreNnoN'"?:,i:";:f;":;:i$i:"":,1:ii:;
tous tes travaux de Eansport, de manutention, de mon-
A
/! \ pn EcAUcroN EZ1S ff,{o"J#!ii!i"g1""ff"l,?;
cacion de Ia instalaci6n asi como todas las operacio-
tage, dtinstallation, de mise en service, de maintenance nes de tfansporle, montaje, instalacidn, puesta od ser-
et de r6paration sont suppos6s 6tre ex6cut6s par'des vicio, mantenimiento y reparacidn cotten a cargo de
peisonnes qualilt6es ou sous Ie contrdle de personnes perconal caliticado y se realizan bajo eI control del per-
com peJentes respo nsa bies. sonal especializado responsable.
Dans ee conierte, il a lieu det Ilay que observar especialmentet
- tenir compte des caracJ6ristiques techniques et des - fos dalos tdcnicos e indicaciones sobre eI empleo
condiJions dtulilisation (condilions de monlage, de admisible (condiciones de montaje, de conexi6n, del
raccordement, d,environnement et de servicel qui ambiente y del seruiciol, contenidas, entre otrcs, 6n el
tigurent entre aulres au catalogue, dans la notice de catelogo, en la documentaci6n del pedido, en las
mise en oeuvre, sur fes plaqueltes signal6tiques et inslrucciones de senticio, en rdtulos y en IC demds
dans les autres 6l6ments de Ia documentation du pro- docu me ntac i 6 n del pro,du cto.
duit
- se contomer aux ragles'g6n6rales dt6tablissements - L?s prescripciones generales de instalaci6n y seguri-
et de s6curit6, dad.
respecter les prescriptions et contraintes locales
- sp6ciliques Las determinaciones y condiciones exigidas especi-
- ticas
d itinstallation, de la instalaci6n y locales.
- veiller I I'utilisation adAquate des outils ainsi que des - EI empleo convefiente de henamienlas y equipos de
6quipemenb d9 levage et de manuJention, el eva c i 6 n y tra nspo tte.
- veiller d Putilisation des 6quipements de ptotection
personnes, - El uso de los equipos de protecci6n personal.
des
conditions de montage pour des appareils qui seront - Gondiciones de mgntaie para los apatatos que pudie-
- ran haberce suministrado con el grado de protecci6n
6ventueltement mis d I'expedilion en degr6 de protec'
tion IPOO (sans recouvrementsJ.'en setvicer la protee' IPOO (sin envolventesJ, Dutante eI seruicio tiene que
tion requiie contre les contacts dt-tects doit 6tre assu' existir Ia protecci6n necesaria contta contactos
"' r6e et ine approche dangereuse doit 6tre 6vit6.e. casuales o impeditse Ia aproximaci6n peligrosa.
Pour des raisons de clart6, Ia documentation ne con' Para mayor claridad, Ias instruccioaes de servicio no
tient pas tbutes les inlomations de d6tail relatives aux incluyen todas las infiormaciones detalladas de las
vafiantea de conliguration possibfes i elle ne peu^t pa_s variantes constructivas posibfes y, especialmentet no
non plus abotdet loutes les situations susceptibres d-e pueden considerar lodos los casos imaginables de
se pi6senter lors de ttinstallation, de I'exploitation et de colocaci6n, de sewicio o de mantenimiento. Por esfe
Ia maintenance. Dtune fiagon g6n6ralet Ia documenta- motivo, las instrucciones de servicio incluyen €D €s€rt-
tion ne contient donc que des i nlormations ndcessaites cia solo aquellas indicaciones que eI perconal calili-
au petsonnel qualili6 (voir ci-dessusl, lorcque les cado (v6ase mds arribal necesita si las mdquinas o
machines et appareits sont utilis6s dans des applica' aparatos se utilizan para eI lin industrial a que estdn
tions industrielles, cantorm6ment d I'usage auquel iI deslinados.
sont destin6s.
Si, dans un cas sp6cial' iI serait envisag6 d'utiliset Si, en casos especiales se pretende utilizar las
lesmachines ou appareils dans des application non mdquinas o aparatos luera del dmbito indusJrial y
industrielles oit ils leraient 6ventuellement l'obiet hubiera que cumplir condiciones mes'seYeras- (p-ot
d'exigences pfus s6vdres (par exemplet protection eiemolo.-oroteccian confia contactos con los dedos
contie les contacls des doigts d'enfant avec les pi6' ie tos ninos o simitaresl estascondicionestendrdn
ces sous tension ou les pidces en mouvement in' que quedar garantizadaa por parte del clientgt adi'
t6rieures d l'enveloppe ou autresJt ces conditions iionindo mCdidas de proteccidn durante eI mon'
doivent 6tre garanties sur l'installaliont lors du mon' taie.
tage, par des dispositions de.s6curit6 additionnel'
fes,
Si hubiese dudas at tespectot especialmente si talta-

sen detatles inlormatiios especilicos del producto,
habfia que establecer las aclaraciones necesarias a
trav4s de Ia olicina de SIEIIIENS competente. Se ruega
tundamentatmente quet se indiquen Ia denominaci6n
del tipo de las miquinas o apatatost asi como su
nrtmeto de labricaci6n.
EN CE QUI CONCERNE LES TRAVAUX D'INGENIERIE, DE MON- AL EFECTUAR LABORES DE PLANIFICACION, MONTAJE,
TAGE, DE MISE EN SERVICE ET DE MAINTENANCE, NOUS PUESTA EN MARCHA Y SERVICIO SE RECOMIENDA HACER
RECOMMANDONS DE RECOURIR A L'ASSISTANCE ET AUX USO DE LA ASISTENCIA Y COLABORACION DE LOS CEN-
PRESTATIONS DE SERVICE DES CENTRES SAV SIEMENS TROS DE SERVICIO COMPE,TENTEE.DE SIEMENS.
COMPETENTS.
NOTA; En ce qui concerne les travaux generaux, par exemple INDICACION: Los impresos SIEMENS de montaje' que en caso
u le controle des livraisons (constatation des dommages occa- necesario pueden adquirirse en las delegaciones correspon-
sionnds en cours de transport), le stockage et la conservation d dientes, contienen otras informaciones detalladas para los tra-
s lonq terme de machines, le controle des fondations, le montage bajos generales, por ejemplo, comprobaciOn de los sumini-
rl d'adcouplements, la mise en place et I'alignement de machi- stros recibidos (dafl os de transporte), almacenamiento prolon-
l- nes, les irlvaux d'installation, etc., les instructions de montag-e gado y conservdci6n de maquinas, comprobaciOn de cimenta- '
i- SIEMENS, qui sont disponibles dans les agences SIEMENS, 6ione6, calado de acoplamientos, emplazamiento y alineaci6n
s fournirons de plus amples renseignements. de mdquinas, operaciones de instalaciOn y otras tareas diver-
e sas.
A
's
S.
IA nrreNroN :':i :::::::,i! l:':: |i"",":'L:l
personnel dtentretien exp6ilment6 Ie s4in dtex6cuter
/l\
rrr
pRECAUCIO;1;
-
Para prevenir perturbaciones
esnecesafioqueelperconalde
sewicio experimentado (v6ase mds anlbal efiect,[re
r6gulidrement les travaux de maintenance, dtinspec' rcgularmeite las operaciones presefitas de manteni-
i- tidn et de r6vision prescrits (voir plus hautl. Les anoma- mlento, inspecci6n y revisi6n' las alteraciones
n Iies par rappoft au tonctionnement nomal (puissances respeito aI seruicio normal (mayor consumo, incr_e'
absorb6es, tempetatutes 'ou vibrations pfus 6lev6es' mCnto de tempetaturas o de vibracioiest ruidos u olo'
bruits ou odeurs inhabituels, entr6e en action des 6qui' tes no habituales, actuaci6n de los equipos de vigilan'
t- pemenls de surveillance, etc.l laissent supposer qqe Ie cia, etc.l, dan a conocer que el tuneionamientg este difi'
't- ionctionnement'est compromis. Atin d'6viter des inci' cultado. Paru evitar pertutbaelones que, a gu vea, pue-
,- dents susceptibles d'occasionnet directement ou indi' den motivar directa o indirecJamente gtaves dafios per'
rectement des l6sions corporelles ou des dommages sonafes o matefialest hay que avisar inmedialamente
te matiriels,Ie personnel comp6tenJ pour Ia maintenance aI perconal de mantenimiento competeite.
doit OJre averti imm6diatement,
A EN CAS DE DOttlE' PROCEDER InMEDIATEITENT A EU CASOS DE DI'DA' DESCONECTAB INNEDTA.
/f\ A LA rttsE A L,AFiRET DEs IralERrELs coFFE- ./ !\ TATIEUTE Los ooHPoNENTES aFEcraDos.
to sPorvD lt tlil
el.
eI ATTENTION: tr,|orc uttiron" l'attention sur le fait que le contenu INDICACION: Se hace notar que el contenido de las instruccio-
ts de de la doiumentation du produit ne fait pas partie d'un nes de servicio y de las documentaiiones de los productos no
is accord, d'une promesse ou d'un rapport juridique int6rieurs ou son parte componente de convenios, concesiones.o relacio-
en vigueur; elle n'a pas non plus pour objet d'y porter amende- nes iegales pasadas o existentes, ni pretenden modificarlas'
ment. Toutes les obligations de SIEMENS decoulent du marche Todos los compromisos adquiridos por Siemens resultan del
conclu, qui stipule aussi les clauses de garantie completes et correspondiente,contrato de compraventa el cual contiene la
valables a titre exclusif. Les pr6sentes instructions et docu- regulaciOn completa y 0nica vdlida del compromiso de
:h mentations ne sauroltt ni 6tendre ni restreindre les clauses de ga-rantia. Las detbrminaciones contractuales sobre la garantla
garantie contractuelles. no quedan ampliadas ni limitadas por el contenido de estas
le instrucciones y documentaciones.
4I
ITALIANO SVENSKA
ll presente foglio informativo con gli awisi di Detta informationsblad med varningsanvisninga r
allarme vale come supplemento aggiuntivo alle giiller som tilliigg till den produktsp-ecifika drifts-
istuzioni specifiche pei Puso di ogni apparecchia- instruktionen och mAste ges spe6iell uppmdri-
tura e, per motivi di sicurezza, deve venire attenta- samhet av sdkerhetsskiil.
mente rispettato.
PER'COLO FANA.
I macchinafi e Ie apparecchiature De eleldrfiska maskinerna och
eleltriche sono strumentl impie- apparalena dJ utrustning' liir
gati in Impianti industriali sotto- aniiindning i industfiella -stark-
I posti ad aIJa tensione, Durante iI
funzionamenJo tali disposltlvi I striimsanl5ggningan llnder dfil-
ten har dessa uttustningenhetet
O possiedono parti perlcolose, sia
perch6 posJe souo lensione e non
o tarllga, spflnni ngsfiirand-e blanka
de_talieh i vissa laII dven rdrliga
I
isolale, sia. petche. in moto, eller roterade delan De kan deriitt
Iineare o rotalorio. Esse quindl liircrcaka allvailiga perconeller
s9n9 in grcdo di causate gravis- mateilalskador, t ex. om erfiorder-
simi danni,a penlone o cose, se, liga beriiringsskydd avldgsnas i
ad esempio, le ptotezloni n6ces- strid mot giillande bestdmmelser,
sarie vengono fimosse, in caso di
utilizzo non adeguato, di sewizio
non correuo o di non sufficienle
manuJenzione.
P_er-questo motivo I iesponsabili per la sicurezza
+ vid osakkunnig
riickligt underh&ll.
De som ansvarat fdr anliiggningen m&ste dlirtiir
anvdndningh
felaktig maniivrering eller otiL
deltlimpianlo .devono garantire chie sekerstetla att,

- ai macchlnafi od aIIe apparechlature elettriche - enbart hralilicerad petsonal tiIIflE arbeta med
vengano assegnate solo pertone qualificate maskinerna och uttustnlngsenheterna.
- tali.percone possano non solo sdmpre dispofie dessa
- jande penEonet alendigt har tillgdng tiII medfiil_
loresso Jutte le relative postazioni di lavoro-delle driftinslrhhionei, oeh iiviig firoduktdoku-
isttuzioni per ltuse ortCinati e di ulteriore docu- menlation vid alll arbete pC utruhtningen och
menhzione sul ptodotto, ma anche ctre ne osaer- Cliiggs att i varje detalj tiitia invisniniiriZi derna
vino consequentemenlc' i contenuli dokumenlation.
- le layorazioni ai macchinari elo appareechi o - ol<valilicerad petsonal ej tiilCts arbeta med maskh
nel_Ievicinanze di essi vengano interdini a perso- netna och apparatema, eller i
nale non qualilicato. deras nerhet.
Per perconale qualilicato si intendono quelle persone che, Kvalificerad personal ar persone-r som pa qrundval
per la loro .formazione, esperienza e istrirzione, nonche le av
utbildning, erfarenhet eller instr,uktioneTsamtkirns[ap rorande
conoscenze delle relative norme, prescrizioni, provvedimenti tillam pliga normer, bestammelser, olycksfattstoresiiriiteiocfi
per la prevenzio.ne degli incidenti e sulle condizibni di servizio, driftsfdrh6llanden har bemyndigats av sdikerhetsansvarig chef
sono stati autorizzati dal responsabile della sicurezza dell,im_ att. u tf ora rf ord erl ga arbeisu pF gitter oc n Oa rviO ian u p-pf atta
pianto ad eseguire qualsiasi necessaria attiviia eO in questa .e
i
essere_in grado di riconoscere ed evitare ogni possibile peri_ 9-c.l .q!qvtg_ !1ojliga risker (definition av fackpersonat se tiven
DIN VDE 0105 etteer tEC 364).
colo. (Definizione per il personale tecnico, vedi ancheVDE b1O5
o IEC 364).
Fra l'altro si richiedono anche nozioni di pronto soccorso e Bland annat erfordras iiven ktinnedom rorahde fdrsta hjiilpen
sulle misure di salvataggio in loco. och om lokala riiddningsanordningar.
Per lavorazioni in impianti ad alta tensione, il divieto di impiego F,or arbetet pA starksirdmsanltig-gningar regleras forbudet
di personale_ non _qualif icato e, regolamentato, ad esehpio,
. rorande anvandning av okvalificerad personal t.ex. i DIN VDE
nelle norme DIN VDE 0105 o tEC 364. 0105 eller IEC 364.
A Ot1=NZIONE Viene .richiestg

-9h9r i tonda- /f\
A
VARNING Det fiitulseffs an principieilJ
detl'impianto,.e^"o;!""{r:!l:i,?';:lr:Jci;:!;:r:?- met samt alla arbelen med transpott, instailation, idritt-
tazrone, messa in setyizio, manutenzione e fiparazioni tagni ng, u nderhdll och_ reparation u*iirc av l<valiticerad
Y9qgano eseguiti da pensonale qualilicato e contrcllati pefsonal eller kontrolleras av ansvarig lackperconal.
d_al personale tecnico responsabile.
A questo riguardo occorie in particolar moclo ossey- Ddrvid rniste man Iramtiir altt ge akt p&t
Yate,
- cl-gti teg4ici e specitiche sull'ufilizzo consentiJo (con- - tekniska data och uppgilter riirande till&ten anvdnd-
dizioni dl montaggio, collegamento, ambientati e di ning (monterings-, anslutnings-, miliij- och drittsvill-
sewizioJ, che sono tra ItaIJro conteiule nel calalogo, korl, som bl.a. linns i^katalogei, or&erhandlingarna,
nei dati di progetto, nel manualedi senizio, neidatii,i driftsinstruhionen, p& skylJai oih iivrig ptodulddokuL
targa ed in ulteriori documentazioni sul piodotto menlationi
- generali presefizioni di costrazione e sicurezza - de allmlinna installatioas- och sdkerhetstiireskfiI-
temai
- provvedimenti e fichieste locali, speciliche delltim- -Iokala, anliiggningsspecilika beslSmmelser och
pianto krav;
- Idonee modalita' di impiego di uJenslli, sollevatofi e verhyg, lyft- och
trasporlalofi
:- !\ryi:gg delle personati dotazioni protettive
nodatite di monteggio di apparecchiature. che ven-
gono i iissa Ievere-
-consegnale in confiormita' con Ip6lO Isenza driften mdste det
|op_erturcr, du@nte iI sewizlo dcye essere dispbnibile
r-a-neeessaria eller anordningar
protezione da conhtto e deve essere som liirhindrar personet komma i ndrheten dv
taaetdetto un accostamenao pericotoso. utrustningen.
5
Le istruzioni sul lunzionamento dette apparecchialure Fiir iiverckddlighetens skull kan driltsinstruklionerna
non possolo, pena una mancata globalite, contenere inte alltid innehllla all detaljinlomation rdrande miij-
nel dettaglio tutte Ie i nlormazio ni sulle possibili varianti Iiga konstruHionayarianten och kan lramliir allt inte ta
costruttive, net tanto meno ogni pensabile cdso ntel hdnsyn tit, ana tenkbara slag av lnstallation, dritt och
montaggio, nel servizio.o nella manuten2ione. Nei erh Cl l, 5 t Iu n d a i n n eh lll er d riltsi n stru ktio ner na. i a I I -
un d
manuate solamente Ie istruzioni necessarie aI perso- menhet barc sidana anvisningar som kteys fiir l<valiti-
nale..qualificalo per un adeguato utilizzo di macihinari cerad perconal (se ovanl i samband med korrekt
o di apparecchiature in aree di tavoro industriali. anvindning av maskiner eller apparater i industriella
sammanhang.
di installazioni di macchinari od
Se in casi speciali Om av maokiner eller apparater enstaka taII
apparecchia-ture non in aree indusitriali, yengano anvends utanliir industriomrAden och det,fe medliir
eventualmente poste ulteriofi condizioni (es.: prcte- skefpb knv (t.ex, beriiringssl<ydd liir barnl, ei
zione da contatao per le diJa di bambini, etcl, tali nreste dessa villkor aekersftiltas genom montering
condizioni devono venire garantite dall, impianto in av extta skyddsanordningar.
fase di montaggio atlrayerso misure di prctezione
aggiuntive.
ln mancanza di chiarezza, specialmente con mancanti Ta kontakt med ndrmaste SIEMENS-kontor vid oklarhe-
intormazioni dettagliale sul padicolare prodotto, ter i detta avseende, tramfiir allt avsaknad av produkt-
occofie provvedere aI chiarimento necessafio attra- specilik detaljinlormation. Ange ddruid Upbeteckning
verco Ie strufture commerciali SlE[tEMS.competenti. Si och tittyetkningsnummer liir beriirda maskiner eller
prega di indicare chiaramente iI codice del macchina- apparatet.
rio o della apparecchiatura ed il relativo numero di pro-
duzione.
PER IL PROGETTO,IL MONTAGGIO, LA MESSA IN SERVIZIO ED VID PLANERING, MONTERING, IDRIFTTAGNING OCH SERVI-
IL SERVICE, SI CONSIGLIA DI RICHIEDERE IL SUPPORTO
L'ASSISTENZA DEI CENTRI SIEMENS COMPETENTI.
NOTA: Per attivitd generali, come, ad esempio, I'accurato test

E CEARBETE AR DET LAMPLIGTATT UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH
DE TJANSTER SOM UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH DE TJANSTER
SOM KAN ERHALLAS FRAN SIEMENS SERVICECENTRA. I
OBS: F6r allmanna arbeten, t.ex. kontroll av mottagna leveran-
del mate1iale consegnato (danni da trasporto), I'immagazzi- ser (transportskador), lAngtidslagring och konservering av
naggio a\lungo termine e la conservazione di macchinari, le maskiner, kontroll av fundament, pedragning av kopplingar,
prove di base, la stesura dei collegamenti, la messa in opera e uppstiillning och riktning av rnaskiner, installationsAtg€irder
la messa a punto dei macchinari, le norme di installazione e etc. galler ytterligare detaljinformation, som finns i SIEMENS
molti altri, sono disponibili ulteriori informazioni, contenute monteringsanvisningar, som kan erhAllas f rAn fdrstiljningskon-
nelle pubblicazioni SIEMENS per il montaggio e reperibili su toret.
richiesta presso le rispettive agenzie.
/l\
,/ ! \ Aff eN2lg NE Al ii-ne d_i evitare gua.sti, e neces-
,/!
A
\ vn n r,r r nrc r:;,i,r1!;i1i"::,"""": ;l}:;!f,::
mentedarpe*","r"ai1.'ii,J"Jia"'iii"!fJ1SpE!!!fr [; inspektions- och revisionsdtgd rder regelbu "ndet utliiras
operazioni di manutenzione, ispezione e revisione (vedi av ertaren serviceperconal. Vid iakttagelser som ej
soprat. Variazioni rispefto aI normale Junzionamenio stemmef iiverens med normal drilt (t.ex. hiigre ellekt-
(assorbimento di potenza maggiorato, temperature, iii rb ru kn i ng, f iirhiijd tem p e ratu rer, yi b ratio n er, ova nli ga
vibrazioni, tumofi, etc, o segnalazioni da parte deltrim- ljud'etc., eller ndr sl<yddslunktionet t6set uu linns det
pianto di sicarezzal lanno prevedere che iI Junziona- anledning att misstdnka att even |unhionen pdverkats.
mento sia non corretto, Per impedire guasti, che pos- Fiir aft undvika stiirningar, som i sin tut man medfairu
sono recare direttamente od indireftamente gravi danni a I Iv a rI i g a p e rso n-et I e r m ate fi aI s ka do r, m este de a nsva -
a persone o cose, iI perconale addetto alla mariuten- rig sewiceperconal kailas in utan driijsmdl
zione deve venire tempestivamente in ormato.
A IN CASO Dt DUBBTO DTSATT|VARE THMEDTATA- /\ \. KOPPLA OTTIEDELBABT //FRAN U71BUSTNINGEN
./ ! \ HEN'iE GLI UTENSIL' SOSPETII
NOTA: Si fa inoltre presente, che il contenuto del manuale e
delle documentazioni r:elative al prodotto non fa parte di
/. I WD VARJE N/J',STANKE.
OBS: lnnehAllet i driftsinstruktioner och annan produktdoku-
mentation skall inte anses ingA som en del av tidigare eller giil-
e
accordi, impegni o rapporti giuridici, n€ precedenti n€ attuali e lande overenskommelse, utfdstelse eller rattsfdrh6llande och
che tale situazione non pud cambiare. Tali impegni da parte di ej heller iindrar detta. Alla f6rpliktelser fran Siemens sida grun-
SIEMENS risultano nel contratto di vendita corrispondente, das pA det berdrda kopeavtalet, som ocksa innehAller fullsttin-
contenente anche certificati di garanzia completi ed autono- diga och oinskrankta uppgifter rdrande garantiAtaganden.
mamente validi. Tali certificati di garanzia regolati da contratto Dessa avtalsenliga bestammelser 16rande garantiAtaganden
non vengono n6 ampliati nd limitati dalla stesura del presente varken kompletteras eller inskriinks av framstallningarna i
manuale. driftsinstruktioner och annan dokumentation.
Herausgegeben vom / lssued by

Bereich Antriebs-, Schalt- und lnstallationstechnik / Drives and Standard Products Group
Elektromotorenwerk Bad Neustadt a. d. Saale (EWN)
Anderungen vorbehalten Subject to change without prior notice
Sous rdserve de modifications' Sujeto a modificaciones
Con riserva di eventuali modifiche FOrbehall 2indringar
' Siemens Aktiengesellschaft EWN-Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 61 0.42356/21
Bestell-Ort: EWN
Dynamo tachym6trique (voir 61 0.41 i7 4/ 2i) Generador tacom6trico (v6ase 610.41 174121)
La dynamo tachym6trique est pratiquement exempte d'entretien. El generador tacom6trico no requiere, pr5cticamente, ningrin man-
Elle peut 6tre d6mont6e sans risque de d6saimantation. Lorsque les tenimiento. Puede ser desmontado sin peligro de perder su imanta-
balais en charbon sont us6s jusqu'A une longueur r6siduelle de 7 mm ci6n. Las escobillas de carb6n tienen que ser sustituidas por juegos
environ, remplacer le jeu complet par des balais du m6me type et de de la misma ejecuci6n y calidad Que las suministradas por la f6brica,
m6me qualit6 que ceux d'origine, et les roder. en cuanto se hayan reducido por desgaste a unos 7 mm. Esmerilar
las escobillas nuevas.
D6pose du rotor (8.84): d6visser la vis de fixation M6 (8.85); Desmontaje del rotor (8.84): Desatornillar el tornillo de fijacion M6
engager A fond la pige en acier (4,8x30) dans l'arbre moteur (pour (8.85). lnsertar hasta el tope en el 6rbol del motor una espiga de
prot6ger le centrage du bout d'arbre). Visser une vis MB (longueur acero (4,8x30) para proteger el centraje del extremo del 5rbol. En
minimale 50 mm) d la place de la vis de f ixation, pour d69ager le rotor lugar del tornillo de fijacion, atornillar un tornillo MB (longitud
de son sidge conique sur l'arbre moteur (conicite 10 %). Emp6cher minima: 30 mm), extrayendo asi el rotor de su asiento c6nico sobre
le rotor de tourner en le retenant par le six pans (cote sur plats 19) de el Srbol del motor(conicidad: 1 ;10). Para queel rotornopueda girar,
son moyeu. Lors du montage du rotor, serrer la vis de fixation M6 retenerlo por la pieza hexagonal de su cubo (ancho de la llave: 19).
(8.B5) avec un couple de 10 Nm. Excentricit6 maximale du collecteur Al volver a montar el rotor, apretar el tornillo M6 (8.85) con 10 Nm.
0,04 mm. Excentricidad m5xima del colector: 0,04 mm.
Frein Freno
Le frein de retenue ir aimants permanents se serre en absence de El freno de retenci6n, de imanes permanentes, funcio-na segin el
courant. ll se desserre lorsqu'on applique une tension continue de principio de la corriente de reposo. Se abre, aplicando una tensi6n
24 V, +10 %. Cette tension doit se trouver A l'int6rieur de ces continua de 24 V + 10 % . La tensi6n debe quedar dentro de estas
i
tol6rances, sinon la s6curit6 de fonctionnement ne serait plus tolerancias para no poner en peligro la seguriCad de servicio.
assur6e. Lorsque Ie moteur est sous tension, le frein doit toujours Siempre que el motor est6 conectado, el freno deber5 estar
6tre excit6, c'est-A-dire desserr6. Si l'on coupe I'alimentation du frein excitado, es decir, suelto. Al desconectar el freno (desexcitar) o al
(d6sexcitation) ou en cas db panne de courant, l'aimant permanent fallar la corriente, el disco de la armadura (2.20) es atraido, frenando
attire le disque d'armature (2.20), ce qui bloque l'arbre moteur. Voir asi el 6rbol del motor. Respecto a la conexi6n del freno v6ase la fig. 1.
la figure 1 pour le raccordement du frein.
Ce dernier est raccord6 au bloc de jonc{ion bipolaire (BR, BR2) fixe El freno se conecta al borne en serie, bipolar (BR, BR2), que se
I au stator (8.86) de la dynamo tachym6trique.

D6montage du frein
lmportant: lors du d6branchement de l'enroulement du frein, le
disque d'armature (2.20) s'attire imm6diatement. S'il faut faire
encuentra fijado al estator (8.86) del generador tacom6trico.
Desmontaje del freno
Atenci6n: Al desconectar el devanado del freno, el disco de
armadura (2.20) ser6 atraido inmediatamente. Si fuese necesario
la
tourner le rotor (5.00) ou le disque d'armature (2.20) ou s'il faut hacer girar el rotor (3.00) o el disco (2.20) o si hubiese que extraer
retirer le flasque-palier (1.40) et la culasse magn6tique (2.10) du del rotor el escudo porta-cojinetes (1.40) junto con el im6n, habrS
rotor, il y a lieu de mettre I'enroulement du frein sous tension. Toute que aplicar tensi6n al devanado del freno. Si el disco (2.20) se
s6paration forc6e du disque d'armature (2.20) et de Ia cuiasse separa a la Iuerza del im6n (2.10), se deformar6 el resorte de
magn6tique (2.'10) provoquerait la d6formation de la membrane membrana del disco.
m6tallique mont6e sur le disque d'armature.
a) Desserrer les vis ir six pans creux (1.26). a) Aflojarel tornillo (1.26) de hex6gono interior.
b) Desserrer les 6crous (1.37) et retirer le flasque-palier c6t6 A b) Aflojar las tuercas (1.37) y quitar el escudo porta-cojinetes ( 1.40)
(1.40). del lado A.
c) Mettre le frein sous tension; visser les tiges filet6es du dispositif c) Conectar el frerib'a'la r<jl6.y atoinillar los pernos del dispositivo
d'extraction dans les trous tarauci6s de la culasse magn6tique de desmontaje en los orificios roscados del imAn (2.10). l{acer
du frein (2.10). AppliqLrer le dispositif d'extraction sur le bout encajar este dispositivo sobre el Srbol y apretarlo. Extraer la
d'arbre et serrer la vis. Retirer de 20 mm environ la culasse ma- parte fija del im5n (2.10) unos 20 mm, junto con el cojinete.
gn6tique (2.10) avec le roulement.
d) D6brancher les conducteurs d'alimentation du frein et les sortir d) Soltar los conductores y sacarlos de la carcasa. Extraer ahora
du carter. Retirer entidrement la culasse magn6tique (2.10). Ne totalmente Ia pieza (2.10). El cojinete extraido no se debe volver
pas 16utiliser le roulement extrait. a emplear.
e) Au besoin, il est possible de remplacer le disque d'armature e) Si fuese necesario, se puede recambiar ahora el disco (2.20).
(2.20); dessener A cet effet les vis (2.22) bloqu6es au loctite et Aflojar los tornillos (2.22), que est6n fijados con "Loctite", y
retirer le disque. extraer el disco.
Montage du frein Montaje del freno
a) Fixer le disque d'armature (2.20) au disque de freinage (2.30) i) a) Fijar el disco (2.20) con los tornillos (2.22) ala parte rotatoria del
Jl b)
l'aide des vis (2.22). Bloquer les vis au loctite type 0572 ou fluid D.
Mettre la culasse magn6tique sous tension et l'appliquercontre
le disque d'armature. Couper la tension.
freno (2.30). Fijar los tornillos con "loctite", tipo 0572 o fluid D.
b) Aplicar una tensi6n al im6n y acercarlo al disco de la armadura;
a continuaci6n, volver a quitar la tensi6n.
c) Emmancher A chaud le roulement ('1.60) sur l'arbre. c) Calar en caliente sobre el 5rbol el cojinete (1.60).
d) R6alimenter la culasse magn6tique et pr6centrer son bord de d) Volver a excitar el6ctricamente el im6n y centrar previamente el
centrage par rapport A la bague ext6rieure du roulement, afin borde de centraje de 6ste respecto al anillo exterior del cojinete,
d'6viter toute d6formation lors de l'emmanchement du flasque- para evitar que el escudo porta-cojinetes del lado A se iueda
palier c6t6 A. ladear al montarlo.
e) Faire passer les conducteurs d'alimentation du frein par le trou e) lntroducir los conductores del freno por el orificio "N" y conec-
< N > et les raccorder, dans la boite d bornes, aux bornes BR et tarlos, en la caja de bornes, a los bornes BR y BR2 (ver fig. 1).
i BR2 (figure 1). Approcher du carter le flasque-palier c6t6 B. Acercarel escudo porta-cojinetes del lado B a la carcasa y poner
l
Mettre le frein sous tension. Veiller d ce que le trou du p6le nord el freno bajo tensi6n. Prestar atenci6n a que el orificio "N1',
(N) du carter ne soit obstru6 par aucun compound et dr ce qu'il se hecho en la carcasa para el polo norte, quede en la parte supe-
trouve en haut; s'il y a lieu. percer la masse compound avec un rior y que no quede obturado por la masilla compound; caso
tournevis. dado, limpiarlo con un destornillador, empujaniJo la masilla
hacia afuera.
f) Visser une vis sans t6te d titre d'auxiliaire dans l'un des trous f) Para fa-cilitar el moniaje, atornillar un tornillo en la parte fija del
1 taraud6s de la culasse magn6tique (2.'10). Emmancher Ie flas- freno (2.10) y meter el escudo porta-cojinetes (1.40) del l;do A
:l que-palier c6te A (1.40) sur le bout d'arbre et la vis sans t6te. sobre el extremo del iirbol y dicho tornillo. Fijar a la carcasa el
Fixer le flasque-palier au carter a l'aide des 6crous (1.37) et des escudo porta-cojinetes con las tuercas (1.37) y las arandelas
g).
rondelles 6lastiques (1.38). el6sticas (1.38).
i
,j Fixer la culasse'magi''eticjue (2:10) au flasque-palier c6t6 A au g) Fijar la parte fija del freno (2.10) al escudo porta-cojinetes del
moyen des vis d six pans creux (1.28). Couple de serrage 2,9 Nm. lado A con los tornillos de hex5gono interior (1.28).-Momento
:,i
. i.J de apriete: 2,9 Nm.
'j h) Ne pas donner de coups demarteau sur le bout d'arbre. h) No dar golpas de martillo sobre el extremo de 6rbol.
':l! Pose ult6rieure du frein Montaje posterior de un freno
.u ll est possible de monter ult6rieurement le frein sur le moteur. De- El freno puede ser montado tambi6n posteriormente en el motor.
' ,i!
.i mander A l'usine les 6l6ments du frein et les sch6mas de montage. Pedir a la f6brica las piezas necesarias y los planos y descripciones
i pertinentes.
fl
r'n
t{
.,*
:d 5
Descrizione Beskrivning
Campo d'impiego Anvdndning
I motori sono raffreddati a ventilazione naturale (sistema di prote- Motorerna 5r sjiilvventilerade (skyddsform lP 54). De kan uppsidllds
zione IP 54). Essi possono essere installati in ambienti al coperto i overtdckta rum med normala klimatiska {orh5llanden. TillSten kyl-
dove le condizioni climatiche siano normali. Per il refrigerante d medelstemperatur hogst 40'C.
ammessa una temperatura massima di 40'C.
I motori sono equilibrati dinanricamente con chiavetta piena. La Motorerna iir dynamiskt utbalanserade med full passkil. Montering
calettatura e l'estrazione di elementi di azionamento (p.e. puleggia, och demontering av drivningselement (t.ex. remskiva, kopplings-
disco di accoppiamento, ruota dentata) e di cuscinetti a rotolamen- skiva, kugghjul) och rullager skall utforas med en diirlor avsedd
to, vanno effettuate esclusivamente con gli appositi altrezzi, utiliz- anordning. Hiirvid anvbndes giingan i axeliinden.
zando la filettatura nell'estremitir d'albero-
lnstallazione Montering
L'installazione va effettuata in posizione tale da garantire una suffi- Monteringen m6ste genomforas s5, att tillrdckligt bortforande av
ciente dissipazione del calore per mezzo di irradiazione e di forlustviirme garanteras genom strSlning och naturlig konvektion.
convezione naturale. I motori possono presentare temperature P5 motorernas yta kan hoga temperaturer upptriida. Vid behov an-
superficiali elevate. Se necessario si adottino accorgimenti pro- v6ndes beroringsskydd.
tettivi contro contatti accidentali.
Le aperture d'ispezione sullo scudo di supporto lato opposto Betjdningsoppningarna pA B-sidans lagerskold (6.20) mSste vara
all'azionamento (6.20) devono rimanere accessibili per operazioni tillgAngliga f or servicearbeten.
di manutenzione.
Collegamenti (v. fig. 1) Anslutning (se {ig. 1)
Attenzione! Qualunque lavoro di collegamento o di manutenzione OBSI Alla anslutnings- och underh6llsarbeten f6r endast utforas i
va eseguito solo dopo aver tolto la tensione all'impiantol Se il rotore spzinningslost tillst6nd! Genom permanentmagnetiseringen upp-
viene girato, si forma una tensione sia ai morsetti del motore sia a st6r en spdnning bSde pA motorkliimmorna och pA takogenerator-
quelli della dinamo tachimetrica a causa dell'eccitazione dovuta ai kldmmorna nbr rotorn vridsl
magneti permanenti.
Allacciamento del motore:
Motoranslutning: Rotorspiinningen mSste stdmma overens med
C
La tensione rotorica deve coincidere con il valore indicato dalla
targa dei dati. Ai morsetti all'interno della morsettiera fissare i con- uppgiften p5 miirkplSien. Tillrdckligt dimensionerade anslutnings-
duttori di alimentazione, sufficientemente dimensionati, e al mor- lddningar anslutes till anslutningskliimmorna i uttagslSdan, skydds-
setto @ collegare il conduttore di protezione. Prowedere alla riten- ledaren anslutes till kl?imman mbrkt @. Sorj for dragavlastning av
zione dlel cavo di alimentazione, contro trazioni. a nslu tningska beln.
Collegamento della dinamo tachimetrica: Attenersi alle indicazioni Takogeneratoranslutning: Uppgifterna p5 mbrkplSten och i kopp-
della iarga dei dati e dello schema. ll collegamento vien fatto per lingsschemat beaktas!
mezzo delle boccole ad innesto sui portaspazzole. Le boccole di Anslutning sker med hjdlp av de bifogade hylsorna vid borsthSllarna.
collegamento vanno schiacciate con apposito utensile oppure Hylsorna pressas fast med ett ltimpligt verktyg eller lodas. Sorj for
saldate. Assicurare il cavo contro trazioni. dragavlastning av anslutningsledningen.
Manutenzione Skiitsel
Prima di smontare il motore (per es. quando vengono sosiituiti i Fcire demontage av motorn (t. ex. vid lagerbyte) markeras lager-
cuscinetti) contrassegnare la posizione originaria degli scudi di skoldarnas ursprungliga liige i fdrh6llande till motorstommet.
supporto rispetto alla custodia.
Commutatore o portaspazzole Kommutator och kolborstar

Ad intervalli di tempo regolari, attraverso l'apertura del portaspaz- Kontrollera kommutatorn i regelbundna tidsintervaller genom
zole a faretra (dop6 aveitolto le spazzole), ispezionbre il commuta- oppningen i borsthAllaren (koien borttagna). For noggrannare
tore. Per un'ispezione pirir approfondita d necessario smontare lo kontrolI m&ste lagerskolden demonteras. Om repor eller brand-
scudo di supporto. Se rigature o punti di bruciatura sulla superficie stiillen p5 kommuiatorns yta ej kan avliigsnas med fin smdrgelduk,
del commutaiore non possono esser tolte con tela smeriglio, ilcom- mSste denna omsvarvas (glimmerisoleringen meilan kommutaior-
mutatore dovrA venir iornito (l'isolamento in mica tra le lamelle del
commutatore va f resato e smussato accuratamente).
lamellerna urf rdses noggrannt).
}
Sostituzione delle spazzole: Bvte av kolborstar: Motorerna har specialborsth6llare Borstarna
I mbtori sono muniti di portaspazzole di tipo a faretra. le spazzole kontrolleras efter ca. l000driftstimmargenom demontage av kApan
devono essere revisionate dopo circa 1000 ore di marcia del motore, 7.13. Borstarnas normalldngd 25 mm, iillSten forslitning till 10 mm,
dopo aver svitato la cappa 7 .13. Lunghezza normale delle spazzole: diirefter bytes borstarna. Siitt enciast in borstar av samma kvalitet
25 mm. E'ammessa un'usura {ino a l0 mm, poi vanno sostituite. som levererats frSn fabriken.
lmpiegare solamente la stessa qualitit dispazzole gid adottata origi-
nariamente dalla fabbrica.
E' consigliabile procedere alla puiizia della macchina ad interva'lli di Det rekommenderas att rengora maskinen i ldmpliga tidsintervaller.
tempo adeguati, badando in particolare a togliere ogni eventuale Ddrvid skall siirskilt eventuella koldammavlagringar avldgsnas. .
deposito di polvere di carbone.

Gli incavi di protezione per le faretre delle spazzole nelio scudo di i
Skyddsforsdnkningarna for borstarna lagerskolden nq B-9i{an
supporto lato opposto all'azionamento devono essere tenuti pa.rti- m5ste h6llas sairsliilt rena. Efter varje borstbyte blAses skyddsfor-
colarmente puiiii. Dopo ogni ricambio celle spazzole. pulire sankningarna noggrannt rena med torr tryckluft innan tdtningen
accuratamenie l'incavo con aria compressa iecca, prima di appli- (7.14) inldgges.
care la guarnizione (7.14).
Sostituzione dei cuscinetti Lagerbytd

I motori sono muniti di cuscinetti a lubrificazione permanente. Motorerna har lager med permanentsmorjning.
Attenzione! I cuscinetti sul lato azionamento e sul lato opposto Observera! Lagren pA A- och B-sidan dr olika stora. Lagren iir av
hanno grandezze differenti. Vengono impiegati cuscinetti typ 2RS-C3. Lagrens tdtningsbrickor m6ste bestd av vdrme-
2RS-C3. Le rondelle di guarnizione dei cuscinetti devono essere btistiindigt material (upp till .180 "C). Vid kommutatorrevision
di materiale resistentealle alte temperature. (fino a 180 "C). bor dven lagren bytas.
Quando si effettua la manutenzione del commutatore, si
dovranno sostituire anche i cuscinetti.
ll vano per il grasso va riempito per il 35 o/0. Qualitit di g rasso: Fyllning av fettrummet ca. 35 o/0. Fettsort: Litium-kompl ex-fett
qrasso kompi-ex al litio, che abbia superata la prova B della som uppfyller lopprov B enl. DIN 51806, t. ex. UNIR EX N3
iorma DIN St AOO, p.e. UNIREX N3 (Esso). (Esso).
6
Di namo tachimetric? (vedere 61 0.41 17 4 / 21) Takogenera lor (se 61 0.41 17 4/ 21)
La dinamo tachimetrica non ha praticamente bisogno di manuten- Takogeneratorn er praktiskt taget underhAllsfri. Den kan demonteras
zione. Pud essere smontata senza pericolo che si smagnetizzi. Le utan iara for avmagnetisering- Kolborstarna utbytes satsvis i samma
spazzole usurate fino a 7 mm vanno sostituite al conipleto e. poi utforande och kvaiitet som anvdndes av fabriken efter nedslitning till
smerigliate. S'impiegherir solamente la stessa qudlitd ed esecuzione ca. 7 mm och inslipas:
di spazzole adottate dalla fabbrica.
Smontaggio del rotore (8.84):
Togliere la vite di fissaggio M6 (8.85). lnserire lo spinotto d'acciaio Demonterinq av rotorn (8.84): M6-fastsettningsskruven (8.85)
(a,6x30) nell'albero delhotore fino al riscontro (per proteggere la skruvas ut. S"tAlstift (4,8 x 30) instickes till anslaget i motoraxeln (som
zona di 'centraggio sull'estremitA d'albero). Al posto della vite di skvdd av centrerinqen i axelSnden). I stiillet for fastsiittqingsskruven
fissaggio, avvitare una vite MB (lunghezza minima 30 mm) e con essa inskruvas en I'rlB-ikruv (minsta l:ingd 30 mm), varigenom rotorn
staccare il rotore dalla sede conica sull'albero (conicitA 1 : 10). lmpe- trycks av det koniska siitet pA motoraxeln (kona 1:10). Rotorn for-
dire la rotazione contemporanea del rotore tenendolo fermo hihdras att vrida sig genom fasth6llning vid rotornavets sexkant
all'estremitA esagonale del mozzo (SW 19). (sw 1e).
Nel montare il roiore, serrare la vite di fissaggio MO (8.85) con una Vid montering av rotorn Stdrages M6-fastsdttningsskruven (8.85)
coppia di 10 Nm. Oscillazione massima radiale del commutatore med 10 Nm. Max. rotationsavvikelse hos rotorn 0,04 mm.
0,04 mm.
Freno Broms
llfreno di ritenuta a magneti permanenti funziona secondo il principio Permanentmagnetbromsen arbetar enl. vilostromsprincipen. Den
della corrente di riposo. Siapre quando viene applicata una tensione oppnar, d2r en likspanntng pb 24 V +10 % p6liigges. Spdnnin-
continua di 24 V +10 o/o. La tensione deve mantenersi entro i qbh m6ste ligga inom det angivna toleransomrAdet, dA i annat
limiti di tolleranza indicati, attrimenti puo venir compromessa la f;ll driftssekerheten riskeras. Vid inkopplad motor meste bromsen
sicurezza di funzionamento. Ouando il motore d inserito, il freno alltid vara magnetiserad, d.v.s. oppen. Vid fr5nkoppling av bromsen
dev'essere sempre eccitato, ciod aperto. Ouando si disinserisce il (avma g netiseiing) eller vid strom bortf a ll d ra ges ankarskiv an (2.20)
freno (diseccitazione) o se viene a mancare la corrente, il disco mot pelmanentmagneten, varigenom motoraxeln fasthAlles. Broms-
d'armatura (2.20) viene attratto dal magnete permanente e in tal anslutning, se fig. 1.
modo trattiene l'albero del motore.
ll collegamento del freno d segnato in fig. 1.
llfreno-d collegato al morsetto bipolare (BR, BR2) fissato allo statore Bromsanslutning sker over en tvSpolig kliimma (BR, BR2), som 6r
a (8.86) della dinamo tachimetrica.

Smontaggio del freno
Attenzione! Appena si disconnette l'avvolgimento delfreno, l'arma-
monteraC p5 takogeneratorns stator (8.86).
Demontering av bromsen
OBSI De bromslindningen lossas Stdrbges ankarskivan (2.20)
tura a disco (2.20) viene attratia immediatamente. Se si rende ne- omedelbart. Om rotorn (f .00) elter ankarskivan (2.20) mSste vridas,
cessario ruotare il rotore (3,00) o l'armatura a disco (2.20), oppure se eller om lagerskolden (1.40) med magnetkroppen mSste dragas av
si deve estrarre dal rotore lo scudo di supporto (1.40) con il corpo rotorn, mSite bromslindningen s6ttas under spiinning Vid anvdnd-
magnetico, bisognerd metter sotto tensione l'avvolgimento del ning av vErld deformeras membran{.iiidern p6 ankarskivan.
freno. Un distacCo forzato del disco (2.20) dal corpo magnetico
(2.10) porta ad una deformazione della molla a membrana sull'arma-
tura a disco.
a) Svitare la vite ad esagono cavo (1.26). a) Sexkantsskruvarna (1.26) lossas.
b) Svitare il dado (1.37) ed estrarre lo scudo di supporto lato azio- b) Muttrarna (1.37) lossasochA-sidans lagerskold(1.40) avdrages.
namento (1.40).
c) Mettere il freno sotto tensione, avvitare il bullone dell'estrattore. c)' Bromsen sattes "ijhaeris'trjd nnirigj bch avdra g ni n gsdonets b ultar
neifori filettati del corpo magnetico (2.10). Applicare l'estrattore inskruvas i de giingade hSlen hos magnetkropperr (2.10)' Av-
sullo specchio dell'albero e serrare. Estrarre il corpo magnetico dragningsdonei sbtles pA axeln och Stdrages. Magnetkroppen
(2.10) con il cuscinetto. per circa 20 mm. (2.10) med lagret avdrages ca. 20 mm.
d) Disconnettere il cavetto che alimenta il freno ed estrarlo dalla d)' Bromsens tilledning .lossas och utdrages ur k5pan. Magnet-
carcassa. Asportare completamente il corpo magnetico ll kroppen (2.10) avdiages helt. Avdraget lager anviindes ej 6ter.
cuscinetto estratto non va piil utilizzato.
e) Se necessario, l'armatura a disco (2.20) puo essere sostituita: e) Vid behov kan ankarskiva n (2.20) utbytas: De med Loctite
svitare le viti assicurate con loctite (2.22) e logliere l'armatura. sdkrade skruvarna (2.22) lossas och ankarskivan avtages.
Rimontaggio del freno Montering av bromsen
a) Con leviti (2.22) fissare l'armatura a disco (2.20) al disco delfreno a)' Ankarskivan (2.20) fdstes p5 bromsskivan (2.30) medtljdlp av
(2.30). Asslcurare le viti per mezzo di loctite di tipo 0572 o fluidD. skruvarna (2.22). Skruvarna sdkras med loctite typ 0572 eller
el
1
b) Mettere sotto tensione
c)
il corpo.magnetico ed applicarlo
all'armatura. Poi togliere la tensione.
Calettare a caldo il cuscinetto (1.60) sull'albero.
b)
c)
fluid D.
Magnetkroppen siittes under spanning och laigges mot ankar-
skivan. Ddre{ter borttages spbnningen.
Lagret (1.60) uppvdrmes och sdttes p5 axeln.
d) Centrare il bordo del corpo magnetico nuovamente eccitato, d)' Centreringskanten hos den pA nytt elektriskt magnetiserade
rispetto all'anello esterno del cuscinetto, per evitare che nel- magnetkroppen forcentreras till lagrets ytterring for att forhindra
l'operazione di calettatura lo scudo di supporto lato aziona- att A-sidans lagerskold vid pAsiittning kommer snett
mento si trovi inclinato.
e) lnfilare il cavetto di alimentazione del freno attraverso il foro "N" e) Bromsens tilledning stickes genom hAlet "N" och anslutes till
' e collegarlo ai morsetti BR, BR2 della morsettiera (v. fig. 1). kldmmorna BR, BR2 i anslutningslSdan (se fig. 1). B-sidans lager-
Spingeie lo scudo di supporto lato opposto all'azionamento skold skjutes fram till k&pan. Bromsen sattes under s-pdnning.
u6rsd la cdrcassa, facendo attenzione che il foro del polo. nord Kontrollera. att nordpolshSlet (N) i kSpan iir fritt fr6n fyllmassa
(N) della carcassa sia libero da materiale di tenuta e che si trovi och iir riktat upp5t. Eventuell fyllmassa stotes ut med en skruv-
in aho. Si stacchi un'eventuale otturazione materiale solidificato mejsel.
perforando con un cacciavite.
f)' in uno dei fori f ilettati del corpo magnetico (2. 10) inf ilare una vite f). For att underliitta monteringen inskruvas en stiftskruv i ett av de
prigioniera come aiuto per il montJggio. Poi infilare lo scudo di giingade hAlen hos magnetkroppen (2.10). Diirefter skjutes
'supporto
lato azionamento (1.40) al di sopra dell'estremite . A-sidans lagerskold (1.40) over axeldnden och stiftskruven.
d'albero e della vite prigioniera. Con dadi (1.37) e rondelle Lagerskolden fastsdttes p5 k6pan med hjelp av muttrarna (1.37)
ela'stiche (1.38) fissare lo scudo di supporto alla carcassa. och fjederbrickorna (1.38).
g) Fissare il corpo magnetico (2.10) suilo scudo di supporto lato g)
' Magnetkroppen (2.10) fastsettes pA A-sidans lagerskold med
'' bzionamento'p"r m"e.to deila viie ad esagono interno (1.28). hjelp av seikantsskruvarna (1.28). Atdragningsmoment 2,9 Nm.
Coppia di serraggio 2,9 Nm.
h) Non battere col martello sull'estremitd d'albero. h) Sl5 ej med hammaren p5 axeldnden.
Montaggio successivo del freno Komplettering bv broms
ll freno pud esser montatb anche in un secondo tempo. Si richie- En inbyggnad av bromsen i motorn i efterhand 5r mojlig. Bromsdelar
dano alia fabbrica I pezzi che formano il freno e la relativa docu- och monieringsanvisning bestdlles f rAn fabrik.
mentazione.
Bestell-Nr./Order No.: EWN 610.41 166/21 b

Siempns Aktipnoosallsr:hnft Printed in the Federal ReDublic of Germanv
Ersatzteile* Spare parts* Pi6ces de rechange* Piezas de repuesto* Pezzi di ricambio* Reservdelar* D = Diese DichtflSchen sind bei Montagearbeiten vor dem Wiedezusam-
1-00 Lagerung, A-Seite 1.00 Drive end bearing assembly
menbau zu reinigen und mit Loctite 0572 oder Fluid D zu bestrei;il;-;:,
1.00 Paliercdt6A 1.00 Coiinete,ladoA 1.00 Supporto lato azionamiento 1.00 Lager,A-sida keine Gewdhrleistung der Schutzart lP 54.
.40 Lagerschild .40 End shield .40 Flasque-palier .40 Escudo portacojinetes .40 Scudodisupporto .40 Lagerskold D = During seruicing, these surlaces should be cleaned and coated with
.53 Hiilse .53 Sleeve .53 Douille-entretoise .53 Casquillo .53 Boccola Hylsa Loctite 0572 before reassembly, otheMise there can be no guarantee of
.60 Wiilzlager .60 Rolling-contactbearing .60 Roulement d billes .60 Rodamiento .60 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .60 Rullager type of p.otection lP 54.
.80 Lagerdeckel innen .80 lnternal bearing cover .80 Couvercle interne de palier .80 Tapa interior del cojinete .80 Coperchio del cuscinetto interno BO lnre lagerlock (bortfaller vid D - Lors du r6assemblage, ces surfaces d'etancheite sont d nettover et a
(enttSllt bei Bremseneinbau) (not included if brake is litted) (supprime si le frein est mont6) (se suprime si se monta el freno) (manca se il freno d incorporato) bromsmontering) enduire de Loctite 0572, sinon le deg16 de protection lP 54 n'est pas bssu16,
2.OO Bremse, komplett 2.00 Brake, complele 2,00 Frein complet 2.00 Freno completo 2,00 Frenocompleto 2.00 Broms, komplett D = Antes de ensamblar, durante los habajos de montaje, se limpiar6n
.10 Magnetkdrper .10 Magnetbody .10 Culasse magn6tique .10 Cuerpo de los imanes .10 Corpo del magnete .10 Magnetkropp estas superlicies de junta y se untar6n con Loctite 0572, ya que de omitirlo
.20 Ankerscheibe .20 Armaturedisc .20 Disque d'armature _20 Disco de la armadura .20 Anello d'armatura .20 Ankarskiva no queda garantizada la clase de protecci6n lP 54.
und Bremsscheibe (2.30) and brake disc (2.50) et disque (2.30) y disco del freno (2.30) e anello del freno rotante (2.30) och bromsskva (2.J0) D = Durante lavori di montaggio, prima di esser rimontate, queste superfici
3.00 Lauler, komplett 5.00 Rotor, complele 3.00 Rolorcomplet 3.00 Rotor complelo 3,00 Rotorecomplelo 3.00 Rolor, kompleti di tenuta devono esser pulite e spalmate con Loctite 0572. Altiimenti non pud
.70 Kommutator .70 Commutator .70 Collecteur .70 Colector .70 Commutatore .70 Kommutator
esser garantifa la protezione lP 54.
4.00 Stendergehause 4.00 Statorhousitg 4.00 Carcassestatorique 4.00 Carcasa del eslalor 4.00 Carcassa dello statore.
D = Dessa tatningsytor mAste vid montagearbeten fcire ateringbyggnad
4.00 Statorhus rengoras och instrykas med Loctite 0572. I annat fall kan skyddsfbrnr [P 54
.08 Bolzenschraube .08 Screwed rod .08 Tigefilet6eauxdeuxexh6mites .08 Perno roscado .08 Tirantefileitato .08 Bultskruv ej garanteras.
5.00 Klemmenkasten, komplett 5.00 Terminalbox,complete 5,00 Boileabornescomplate 5.00 Caia de bornes completa 5.00 Morseltieracompleta 5.00 Uttagsleda,komplett
.11 Klemmenbrelt, komplett .1 1 Terminal board, complete .1 1 Plaque A bornes compldte .11 Regleta de bornes completa .1 1 Basetta portamorsetti completa .11 KlEmmor, komplett
.66 VerschluRstopfen .66 Plug .66 Bouchon .66 Tap6n de cierre .66 Tappo filettato .66 Andf cirslutningspropp resp.
.68 Stopf buchsenverschraubung .68 Compression gland .68 Raccord i presse-6toupe .68 Atornilladura prensaestopas .68 Pressacavo tijtningshylsa
.83 Dichtung zu 5.84 (nicht dargestellt) .83 Sealfor5.84(notshown) .83 Joint pour 5.84 (non repr6sent6) .83 Junta para 5.84 (no representada) .8J Guarnizione oer 5 84 .68 Forslruvning
.84 Klemmenkasten-Deckel .84 Terminal box cover .84 Couvercle de boite e bornes .84 Tapa de la caja de bornes (non rappresentata) .85 Tdtning fcjr5.84 (visasej)
6.00 Lagelung, B-Seite 6.00 Non-drive end bearing assembly 6.00 Palierc6i6 B 6.00 Cojinete, lado B ,84 Coperchio della morsettiera .84 UttagslSdans lock
.10 Wiilzlager . l0 Rolling-contact bearing .10 Roulement A billes 10 Alojamiento de las escobillas 6.00 Supporto lato opposto 6.00 lager, B-sida
.11 Federscheibe .11 Springwasher .1 1 Rondellelessort .11 Escobilla de carb6n all'azionamento .10 Rullager
.12 Ausgleichsscheibe .12 Shim .12 Rondelle-entretoise .12 Arandela de compensacion 10 Cuscinetto a rotoldmento .'11 Fjiiderbricka
.20 Lagerschild .20 End shield .20 Flasque-palier .20 Escudo portacojinetes 11 Rondella elastica .12 Utjdmhingsbricka 6.83
.83 Dichtung zu 8.84 (nicht dargestellt) .83 SealforB.S4 (not shown) .83 loint pour 8.84 (non repr6sent6) .83 Junta para 8.84 (no representada) .12 Rondella di compensazione .20 Laoerskdld
.84 Deckel .84 Cover .84 Couvercle .84 rapa .20 'Scudo di supporto .83 Tatning fdr 8.84 (visas ei)
7.00 Biirstenhalterung, komplett 7.00 Brush holdergear, complete 7.00 Porte-balaiscomplet 7.00 Portaescobillas completo .83 Guarnizione per 8.84 .84 Lock
.10 Biirstenkocher .i0 Brush cartridge (non rappresentata)
10 Cage .10 Alojamiento de las escobillas
Coperchio
7.00 Borsthellare, komplett
.11 Kohlebiirsten .11 Carbonbrush 11 Balai en charbon .11 Escobilla
.84
.10 SpecialborsthEllare
.12 Verbindungskabel .12 Connecting cable 12 Ceble de raccordement .12 Cable de empalme 7.00 Portaspazzole complelo
.11
I
Kolborste
I
.13 B0rstenhalterkappe .13 Brushholdercap 13 Bouchon viss6 .13 Cobertura del portaescobillas .'10 Portaspazzole a faretra .12 Fiirbindningskabel
.14 Dichtung .14 Seal 14 loint .14 lunta .11 Spazzole di carbohe .13 Borsthbllarkipa
5.86
8.00 Einbauten 8.00 lnternals 8.00 El6mentsincorpo16s 8.00 Elementos suplementarios .t2 Cavo di colleoamento .14 Tiitning
Abdeckkappe Cover .13 Cappa del po"rtaspazzole 5.84
.01 .01 .01 Capot .01 Tapa
.14 Guarnizione
8.00 lnbyggnader
.02 Dichtung .o2 Seal .02 loint .o2 Junta
.04 Zwischenplatte .04 lntermediate plate 8.00 Elementi incorporali
.01 K6pa 5.i1
.04 Plaque interm6diaire .o4 Placa intermedia .02 T6tning
,06 Stecker .06 Plug .06 Connecteur .06 Clavija .01 Coperchio .13
.08 Dichtung .04 Mellanplatta
.08 Seal .08 loint .08 lunta .02 Guarnizione
.20 DrehmeldermeRgetriebe .06 Stickkontakt
.20 Synchro gear .20 R6solveur avec 16ducteur .20 Transmision de medida del sincro .04 Spessore .14
.30 lmpulsgeber .30 lmpulse generator .30 lmpulseur
.08 TAtning 6,86
.30 Emisorde impulsos .06 Presa .20 Vexel Idr vridningsgivare 7.1i
.31 Haube f0r lmpulsgeber .31 Hood for impulse generator .31 Capot pour l'impulseur rotatif Cubierta para emisor .08 Guarnizione
Dichtung
.3'1 .30 Impulsgivare
Seal .32 loint Junta .20 Riduttore di misura del sincro .31 Kbpa fcir impulsgivare
.34 Zwischenplatte .34 lntermediate plate .34 Plaque interm6diaire .34 Placa intermedia .30 Datore impulsi .32 Tdtning
,80 Tachogenerator, komplett .80 Tachogenerator, complete .80 Dynamo tachymekique, complet Coperchio del datore impulsi 12
.80 Generador tacom6lrico completo .31 .34 lvlellanplatta
.84 TacholSuler .84 Tachogenerator rotor .84 Rotor de la dynamo tachymetrique .84 Rotor del generador tacom6trico .32 Guarnizione .80 Takogenerator, komplett
.86 Tachostender ,86 Tachoqenerator stalor ,86 Stator de la dynamo tachymdtrique
.90 Kohlebiirste .90 Carbon bnrsh
.B6 Estator del generador tacom6trico .34 Spessore .84 Takorotor 8.85
.90 Balai en charbon .90 Escobilla de carb6n .80 Dinamo tachimetrica .86 Takostator
.84 Rotore della dinamo tachimetrica .90 Kolborste 8.8a
.86 Statore della dinamo tachimetrica 11
.90 Spazzole di carbone
Beispiel:
Fi?ilF. rsusoza
li"ll1ll" nr. E r67 4567 89ool
Laoerschrld I 4(,
Exempel:
N
Normteile sind nach Muster im freien La piezas normalizadas, pueden adquinrse /v
-f)
Handel zu beziehen. en el comercio segin muestra.
The standard parts can be procured Le parti sono normalizzata e reperibili
according to samples from local dealers. secondo campione in commercio-
On se procurera dans le commerce les Normerad del kan erhSllas i fria handeln
2.
pieces normalis6es sur le vu d'un 6chantil- enl m6nster.
lon. D
I, a Lagertyp
Type of bearing
1.28
10
1.26
8.89 DrN 931
DtN 625
D
1.28
2.22
8.1 1 DIN 6912 8.09
5.38
8.85 DIN 6885
/ 4.oB
8
5.25
5.86 DtN 84 8.07
6.86
7.O4
8.03
8.07
8.09
8.89
1.38 DIN 125 o
9 Treibhiilse
10 Spindel
l!! or^rss+ F.
8.88 DrN 127 S @ D

9 Drivino sleeve
10 Spindie
9 Douille d'emmanchement
8.30
10 Tige 8.09
* Ersatzteile vom Werk lieferbar. 9 Casquillo de empuje
10 Husillo
*" Spare parts to be ordered from our works.
*
*
Peuvent etre fournies par l'usine comme pidces de rechange.
Se suministra por la f6brica en calidad de pieza de repuesto.
Viene tornito come pezzo di ricambio dalla fabbrica. 1.37
1.38 Campana di spinta
10 Perno lilettato * ?2?59
* Kan bestelles som reserudel fr&n fabriken. 1,26

9 Drivhylsa
10 Spindel
7 8
SIEMENS
Tachogenerator lHU1 052
Tachogenerator
Dynamo tachym6trique
Generador tacom6trico
Dinamo tachimetrica
Takometergenerator
Betriebsanleitu ng/l nstructions EWN-Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 610.4117 4/21 e

Die Betriebanleitung mit Angaben zur
Warnung Sicherheit (gelb) muR mit beachtet wer-
A Warning Please also observe Operating lnstruc-
tions (yellow) with special notes on safety.
den. /!\
Beschreibung -
Description
-
Anwendungsbereich Application
Der Gleichstrom-Tachogeneratorwird zur Drehzahlistwerter- The direct-current tachogenerator is used to measure the
fassung bei Ein- und Mehrquadrantantrieben eingesetzt. actual value of the speed of single and multiple-quadrant
Anbau an elektrische Maschinen B-seitig ohne gesonderte drives. lt is attached to the non-drive end of electrical machines
Kupplung. without a separate coupling.
Aufbau Construction
Der Tachogenerator entspricht den VDE-Bestimmungen. Der The tachogenerator is in accordance with VDE specifications.
Tachogenerator hat AuBenpolerregung durch Dauermagnete. The tachogenerator has a stationary permanent-magnet field
Der Tachol2iufer gibt eine drehrichtungsabhAngige Gleich- system. The armature produces a direct voltage, the polarity of
o spannung ab. Die Tachospannung ist Uber HeiBleiter tempera- which is dependent on the direction of rotation. Temperature
E
O
o turkompensiert. compensation of the tacho-generator voltage is provided by
dO
d!.i N.T.C. thermistors.
aaa
;-{
au)a A Bei laufender Hauptmaschine liegt an den A When the main machine is running, on lad
,//l\a \
Warnung Warning
,// ;I\ \
-lJ
a 9'g
o Klemmen bzwwiikelendendesiachoge- a voltage is present at the terminals or the
c€o neratorsSpannung. winding ends of the tachogenerator.
'-o@+ oi
< 6: Technische Daten Technical data, ,.":, .'t::'
(Bei Nenndrehzahl und NennbUrde, wenn nicht anders ange- (at rated speed and rated burdenunless.otherwise specified)
geben) - -
:.>
6Pb
9- a Nenn-Gleichspannung 20v Rated voltage 20 V DC
;aE Nennstrom 1,5 mA Rated current 1.5 mA
a;. Nenndrehzahl 1000/min Rated speed 1000 rev/min
.13.3
EbE Nennbiirde 13,3 ko Rated burden k(}
rLE Span nunQstoleranz *80/o Voltage tolerance -f 8 o/o
_eE; Tem peratu rkom pension * 1 o/o Spannungsabweichung im Temperature compensation Voltage deviation of + I 0/o in the
<9 !
Temperaturbereich + 20 . . . 100oC temperature range + 20 to 100 o C
f
o
F Scheitelwelligkeit der < 1,0 0/o Ripple factor of the 1.0 o/o
Linearitdtsfehler Span- < 0,20/o ) im gesamten Linearity error volt 0.2 o/o in the whole
= 0,20/o .l
Reversierfehler nung Drehzahlbereich Reverse operation age 0.2 o/o speed range
erro r
Drehzahlbereich 0 bis 8000/min Speed range 0-8000 rev/min

(in beiden Richtungen) (in both directions)
Maximaler Strom 10 mA Maximum current 10 mA
lsolie rstoff klasse F Class of insulation F
Bauform tM 5210 Type of construction rM 5210
Schutzart lP 55 (mit Abdeckkappe und bei Degree of protection lP 55 (with cover cap and appro-
entsprechenden Anbauverhiilt- priate mounting position)
nissen)
Tachospannungshohe und Temperaturkompensation sind flir The tachogenerator voltage level and the temperature
die Nennb0rde von 13,3 kr) optimiert. compensation give optimal results with a rated burden of
13.3 ka
Hinweis: Bei Anderung der Burde (zulZissiger Bereich: 1O ko= Note: With a different value of burden (permissible range:
10-80 kO) the voltage level is different and the temperature
Re
= 80 ka) trittder
schlechterung
eine Anderung der Spannungshohe und Ver-
Temperaturkompensation auf. compensation is less accurate.
Bei Messungen am Tachogenerator nur hochohmige MeBin- High-resistance measuring instruments only (R, : 100 kA/V)
strumente (Ri : 100 kOlV) verwenden. must be used for measurements on the tachogenerator.
lnstandhaltung- Maintenance
Uberpri.ifung Ghecks
Kontrolle von Bursten- und Kommutatorzustand jeweils bei lnspect the brush and commutator conditions during the
Wartung der Hauptmaschine (nach 3000 bis 5000 h). Maximale maintenance of the main machine (after 3000 to 5000 h).
BUrstenstandzeit ca. 10000 bis 15000 h. Maximum service life of brushes approx. 10000 h to 15000 h.
O Siemens AG'1982
Pflege (Wartung) siehe Fig. 2, 3 Servicing (see Figs. 2, 3)
Burstenwechsel durchfuhren, wenn Bursten der Hauptma- Change brushes when the brushes of the main machine are
schine gewechselt werden. BurstenbUgel von 8.90 ausklinken, changed. Disengage the brush holders of 8.90, remove any
BUrstenreste entfernen, B0rstenapparat und Kommutator von brush remains, clean the brushgear and the commutator of
B0rstenstaub saubern, Tachogenerator ausblasen, neue carbon dust, clean the tachogenerator with compressed air,
B0rste mit Brirstenbugel (8.90) einklinken. engage the new brush holders (8.90).
lst der Kommutator riefig, muB er 0berdreht werden. Kleinster Skim the commutator if it is scored. The minimum permissible
zuldssig AuBendurchmesser 38 mm; Rz : 3...7 um. lsolation outside diameter is 38 mm; Rz : 3...7 pm. Undercut the
zwischen den Kommutatorlamellen sauberausfrasen. Maximal insulation between the commutator segments. The maximum
zulassige Rundlaufabweichung am demontierten Tacholdufer permissible radial eccentricity of the dismantled tacho-
0,02 mm. generator rotor is 0.02 mm.
lnstandsetzung Repair
Abbauen (Demontage) des Tachogenerators (s. Fig. 1, 2, 3) Dismantling the tachogenerator (see Figs. 1, 2, 3)
Nach Abnehmen der Abdeckkappe, Losen der Steckverbin- After removing the cover cap disconnecting the push-on
dungen (V), Kennzeichnen der Leitungen und axialem Ausklin- connectors (V), marking the leads and the axial disengagement
ken der.BUrstenbrigel wird der Stainder durch Losen der zwei of the brush holders, the stator can be dismantled by undoing
Zylinderschrauben M5 (8.89) demontiert. the two cheese-headed screws M5 (8.89).
Demontage des Tacholaufers (8.84): M6 Befestigungs- Dismantling of the rotor (8.84): Unscrew the M6 fixing screw
schraube (8.85) oder sonstiges Befestigungselement heraus- (8.85) or other fixing element. lnsert the steel pin "G" (4.8x24)
schrauben. Stahlstift ,,c" (4,8x241 bis zum Anschlag in die completely into the motor shaft (to protect the centre of the shaft
Motorwelle einstecken (zum Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellen- end). ln place of the fixing screw or other fixing element, screw
ende). An Stelle der Befdstigungsschraube oder des sonstigen in an M8 bolt (S) of minimum length 30 mmJ or screws
Befestigungselementes eine M8 Schraube (S) (Mindestkinge according to the lnstructions for the main machine. ln this way
30 mm) oder Schrauben nach Angaben in der Betriebsanlei- the rotor is separated from the motor shafi (bevel 1:10). The
tung der Hauptmaschine eindrehen und dadurch Ldufer vom rotor hub has a hexagon bolt (19 mm between flats) which
konischen Sitz auf der Motorwelle (Kegel 1 ;10) abdrLicken. Mit- should be engaged to prevent the rotor from turhing.
drehen des Laufers durch Halten am Sechskant (SW 19) der
Liiufernabe verhindern.
Anbauen (Montage) des Tachogenerators (siehe Fig. 1)

Der Tacholziufer (8.84) wird mit der Doppelkonuswelle gemiiB
Skizze auf das konische Wellenende A der Hauptmaschine
geschoben und mit der lnnensechskantschraube M6 (8.85)
Assembly of tachogenerator (see Fig. 1)
The tachogeneiator rotor (8.84) is fitted onto the tapered shaft
end A of the main machine by means of the double taper-
I
socketed shaft as shown in the drawing and secured in place
oder einem Bef estigu ngselement gemiiB der Betriebsanleitung with an internal hexagonal bolt M6 (8.85) or a fixing element
f0r die Hauptmaschine befestigt. Anziehdrehmoment fUr (8.85) according to the lnstructions for the main machine. The
oder das entsprechende Befestigungselement: Nach der tightening torque for (8.85) or the respective fixing element is
Betriebsanleitung der Hauptmaschine oder bei fehlenden dies- according to the lnstructions of the main machine. lf there are
bezriglichen Angaben .10 Nm. Maximale Rundlaufabweichung no specifications in this respect,lhe tightening torque is 10 Nm.
des Kommutators 0,04 mm. Maximum permissible run-out of the commutator 0.04 mm.
Dann wird der Stander (8.86) am Zentrierrand des Lagerschil- Tlre stator (8.86) is positioned on the centering edge of the end
des (6.20) oder am Flansch der Zwischenanbauten (2. B. Dreh- shield (6.20) or on the flange of the intermediate units (e.9.
melder-MeBgetriebe) montiert. Die Bursten werden nach der resolver.) The brushes are fitted after the,stator has been fitted
Standermontage durch axiales Einklinken der BUrstenbiigel into place by axial engagement ot the brush holders of 8.90 (cf.
von 8.90 montiert (siehe,,Pflege [Wartung]"). Auf einwandfreien "Servicing"). Make sure that the brush holders are correctly
Sitz der Bijrstenbugel achten. fitted.
Das LZiufer-Sttinder-System kann frei kombiniert und aus- Parts of the rotor-stator system can be combined or exchanged
getauscht werden. without restriction.
Elektrischer AnschluB des Tachogenerator (s. Fig. 3) Electrical connection of tachogenerator (see Fig. 3)
Elektrischer AnschluB erfolgt uber Steckverbindungen 2Al Electrical connection is made by push-on connectors 2A1
(Plus-) und 2A2 (Minus") an den B0rstenbtigeln von 8.90. (positive.) and 2A2 (negative-) to the brush holders of 8.90.
' bei Rechtslauf des Anlriebs 'with clockwise rotation of the drive
Hinweis: Temperaturkompensation muB in Serie mit der Minus- Note: lt is important that the temperature compensation unit is
burste geschaltet sein. Nach Moglichkeit abgeschirmte Leitun-
gen verwenden.
connected in serieS with the negative brush. Where possible,
screened leads should be used. I
A AttentlOn
_. respecter les regles de s6curit€ 6non- Hay que observar tambi6n las lnstruccio-
.// .l\ \- c€es A la notice d'instructions jointe Aviso nes de Servicio (amarillo) con indicacio-
(jaune) nes sobre seguridad.
Description Descripci6n
Utilisation Empleo
La dynamo tachymetrique est utilis6e pour la saisie de la El generador tecomdtrico de corr;ente continua se emplea para
vitesse instantanee des entrainements uniquadrants et multi- registrar las valores efectivos de las velocidades de giro de los
quadrants. Elle se monte sur les machines elebtriques cote B, accionamientos de uno o m6s cuadrantes. Se monta en el lado
sans accouplement separe. LCA de las m6quinas eldctricas, sin acoplamiento especial.
Constitution Gonstituci6n
La dynamo tachym6trique est conforme aux prescriptions VDE. El generador cumple las prescripciones VDE. El generador
EIle a une excitation par aimants permanents fixes sur le stator. tacometrico tiene excitacidn de polos exteriores mediante
L'induit d courant continu d6livre une tension continue fonction imanes permanentes. El inducido suministra una tension
du sens de rotation. La tension tachymdtrique est compensee continua, dependiente del sentido de giro. Esta tension tiene
en temperature par I'intermediaire de thermistances C.T.N. una compensacion de la temperatura a traves de resistencias
de coeficiente negativo.
._
A AnenUOn Lorsque la machine principale tourne, les Si marcha la mdquina principal, los bor-
.// .l\ \
bornes ou les extr6mit6s de bobine de la /i\^ Aviso nes y los extremos d6 las bo6inas ael
dynamo sont sous tension. / I\ generador tacom€trico estaren bajo ten'
ston.
2 -
Caract6ristiques techniques Datos tEcnicos
(sauf indication contraire, d la vitesse et a la resistance de (referidos a la velocidad y carga nominales, siempre que no se
charge nominales) haya indicado lo contrario)
Tension continue nominale 20V Tensi6n nominal continua 20v
Courant nominal 1,5 mA lntensidad nominal 1,5 mA
Vitesse de rotation nomirrale 1000 trlmin Velocidad nominal de giro 1000 r/min
Rdsistance de charge nominale 13,3 ko Carga nominal 13,3 kO
Tolerance de tension * 8 o/o Tolerancia para la tensidn -l- 8 o/o
Compensation.en temperature ecart de tension l- 1 0/o dans Compensaci6n de la temperatu ra l- 1,00/o de diferencia de la
la gamme de temPerature tensidn en la gama de
de+20a100oC temperatura + 20 . ., 100 oC
Ondulation crete a crCte -< 1,0 0/o
Erreur de linearit6 de la 0,2 0/o sur toute Ondulaci6n cresta ) dela << 1.0 o/o '\
Erreur de marche ten-
= la plage Error de linealidad ! ten- 0,2 o/o para toda la gamma
dans les deux sens sion < o,2 0lo de vitesse Error reversible J sion < 0,2 o/o t de velocidades
Plage de vitesse 0 a 8000 trlmin (dans les' Gama de velocidades 0-8000 r/min (en ambas
deux sens de rotation) direcciones)
Courant maximal 10 mA lntensidad mdxima 10 mA
Classe d'isolation F Clase de aislamiento F
Forme tM 5210 Forma constructiva tM 5210
Degre de protection lP 55 (avec capot et pour un Grado de protecci6n lP 55 (con caperuza y
montage approprie) condiciones de montaje
adecuadas)
La valeur de la tension tachymetrique et la compensation en
temperature sont optimisees pour la r€sistance de charge El nivel de tensidn y la compensacidn de la temperatur se han
nominale de 13,3 ko. optimizado para la resistencia nominal de 13,3 kO.
Notar en cas de modification de la r6sistance de charge (plage iAtenci6n! Si se modif ica la resistencia (gama admisible: 10 kO
s Ru s B0 kO), se modificard tambi6n el nivel de tensiOn y se
) e admissible: 10 kJ?< R" s B0 kp)' il y a modification de la valeur
de la tension et alteration de la compensation en temperature-
Pour les mesures effectuees sur la dynamo tachymetrique,
utiliser uniquement des appareils de mesure a tres grande
empeorara la compensacion de la temperatura.
Para efectuar mediciones en el generador tacom6trico,
emplear sOlo instrumentos de alta resistencia (Rr:100 k9lv).
r6sistance interne (R' : 100 k3?/V).
Entretien Gonservaci6n
Cont16les Pruebas
Verifier l'6tat des balais et du cbllecteur lors de l'entretien de la Comprobar el estado de las escobillas y del colector junto con
machine principale (au bout de 3000 a 5000 h). Dur6e el mantenimiento de la maquina principal (despues de unas
maximale de vie des balais: 10000 h a 15000 h environ. 3000 a 5000 h de servi.oig')., D.qr:aci0n maxima de las escobillas:
10000 h...15000 h apiox.
Soins (voir Fig. 2, 3) Mantenimiento (vease la fig. 2, 3)

Remplacer les balais quand on change ceux de la machine Cambiar las escobillas cuando se renueven las de la maquina
principale. D6cliqueter les 6triers porte-balais de 8.90, enlever principal. Extraer los portaescobillas de 8.90, sacar de ellos los
les residus de balais, nettoyer (depoussierer) balais, ressorts restos de las escobillas y limpiar todas las piezas asi como el
et guidages ainsi que le collecteur. Passet le compartiment du colector. Limpiar tambien todo el generador tacometrico con
collecteur au jet d'air comprim€. Encliqueter le balai neuf avec aire comprimido. Colocar ahora las nuevas escobillas con su
porte-balais (8.90). Si le collecteur est strie, ilfaut le reprendre porteascobillas (8.90). Si el colector tuviese estrias, repasarlo
au tour. Diamdtre extrieur minimal admissible: 38 mm; Rz: 3 a a torno. Diametro exterior minimo admisible 38 mm; Rz:3...7
7 pm. Fraiser mdticuleusement I'entrelame en micanite. Faux p,m. Fresar minuciosamente el aislamiento de mica que hay
rond maximal admissible du rotor de la dynamo d6monte: entre las delgas del colector. Excentricidad radial mdxima
0,02 mm. admisible en el rotor desmontado del tacogenerador 0,02 mm.
{} Remise en 6tat Reparaci6n

D€montage de la dynamo tachymotrique (voir Fig. 1, 2, 3) Desmontaje del tacogenerador (v€anse las figs. 1,2, 3)
Retirer le capot et les connecteurS (V), reperer les conducteurs Despues de quitar la caperuza, se afloja la uni6n enchufable
et d6cliqueter les balais dans le sens axial. Desserrer les deux (V), se marcan los conductores y se sacan, en sentido axial los
vis a tete cylindrique M5 (8.89) et d6poser le stator. portaescobillas. Aflojando ahora los dos tornillos cilindricos
Depose du rotor (8.84) de la dynamo tachymetrique. Desserrer M5 (8.89), se puede extraer el estator.
I et extraire la vis de fixation MO (8.85) ou tout autre element de Desmontaje del rotor (8.84): Quitar el tornillo M6 (8.85) o del
I f ixation. Engager une pige en acier (6 4,8 x24) dans I'arbre du elemento de fijaciOn e insertar la espiga de acero (G) de
4!
moteur et l'enfoncer jusqu'A la but6e afin d'assurer la 4,8x24, hasta le tope, en el eje del motor (para proteger el
protection du centrage en bout d'arbre. Degager le rotor du punto de centraje en el extremo del eje). En lugar del tornillo o
sidge conique de I'arbre du moteur{conicit6 10 0/o) en vissant del elemento de fijacidn, se coloca un tornillo MB (S) (longitud
une vis M8 d'extraction (longueur minimale 30 mm), ou autre vis mfnima 30 mm) o el, tornillo indicado en las instrucciones de
conforme aux instructions de la machine principale, a la place servicio de la mdquina principal, haciendo asi que el rotor se
de la vis' de fixation MG ou de l'6l6ment de fixation suelte de su asiento cdnico sobre el eje del motor (conicidad
correspondant. lmmobiliser le rotor en rotation au niveau du six 1:10). Para que el rotor no pueda girar, se sujeta con una llave
pans (cote surplats 19) du moyeu. (boca 19) que se aplica sobre el hexagono del cubo del rotor.
Montage de la dynamo tachymetrique (voir Fig. 1) Montaje del tacogenerador (vease la fig. 1)
Emmancher le rotor de la dynamo (8.84) par son arbre a El rotor (8.84) se encaja, con su eje de doble cono, sobie el
al6sage biconique sur le bout d'arbre (A) de ra machine muR6n conico (A) de la maquina principal, como puede verse
principale suivant le croquis et le iixer a I'aide d'une vis six pans en la figura; se fija con el tornillo de hexdgono interior M6
creux M6 (8.85) ou autre element de fixation prescrit par les (8.85), o con el elemento indicado en las instruciones de
instructionS de service de la machine principale. Couple de servicio de la m6quina principal. El par de apriete de (8.85) o
serrage de (8.85) ou de I'element de fixation correspondant, del elemento de fijacidn figura en las instruciones de servicio
confoimdment aux instructions de service de la machine de la maquina principal en la que se monte. Sifaltase este dato,
principale, ou, a defaut d'indications en ce sens, 10 Nm. se aplicaran 10 Nm. Excentricidad de giro mexima del colector:
Excentricite maximale du collecteur 0.04 mm. 0.04 mm.
3
Monter ensuite le stator (8.86) dans le centrage du flasque- A continuacion, se monta el estator (8.86) sobre el borde de
palier (6.20) ou sur la bride des 6lements interm6diaires centrado del platillo (6.20) del cojinete o sobre la brida de los
rapportes (par ex. r6solveur). Aprbs le montage du stator, on equipos intermedios (p. ej.: mecanismos de medicidn del
montera les balais par encliquetage axial des 6triers porte- avisador de giro). Una vez montado el estator, se insertan las
balais de 8.90 (voir.Soins"). Veiller au bon positionnement des escobillas aplicando en sentido axial el portaescobillas de 8.90
porte-balais. (v6ase "Mantenimiento,,). Prestar atenci6n a que el
protaescobillas descanse correctamente.
Le systeme rotor-stator peut Ctre combind a volonte et El sistema "rotor-estator,' puede ser combinado e inter-
remplace librement. cambiado a discrecion.
Raccordement 6letrique de la dynamo tachym6trique (Fig. 3) Conexion el6ctrica del tacogenerador (vease la Fig. 3)
Effectuer les connexions par connecteurs que l'on raccordera La conexidn el6ctrica se hace con ayuda de uniones en-
aux points 2Al (positif.) et 2A2 (negatif-) des porte-balais chufables que se fijan al borne 2A1 (positivo-) y al 2A2 (nega- :
(8.e0). tivo') de los portaescobillas 8.90. I

I
'pour rotation a droite de l'entrainement ' al qirar el accionamiento a derechas ,|
Nota: La compensation en temperature doit etre branch6e en lndicacion: Prestar atenci6n a que la compensaci6n de la i
s6rie avec le balei n6gatif. Utiliser si possible des cables temperatura quede conectada en serie con la escobilla i
blindes. negativa. A ser posible, emplear Unicamente conductores
blindados. I
Devono essere rispeftate le istruzioni di

Attenziong esercizio contenenti awertenze riguar- A Varning Beakta driftsinstruktion med sikerhets-
anvisningar (gul).
danti la sicurezza (giallo) /!\-
b
Descrizione Beskrivning
lmpiego Anvdndning
I
I
La dinamo.tachimetrica serve a rilevare il valore istantaneo Likstrdms-takometergeneratorn anvdndes vid en- och fler-
negli azionamenti ad uno o piU quadranti. Essa viene installata
su macchine elettriche, lato opposto all'azionamento, senza
innesti particolari.
kvadrant drivanordningar for miitning av varvtalets ArvArde.
Den monteras pe b-sidan av elektriska maskiner utan stirskild
koppling.
I t
t
I
l
I
I
Costruzione Konstruktion
La dinamo risponde alle norme VDE. La dinamo tachimetrica ha Takometergeneratorn uppfyller VDE-besttimmelserna. Tako-
eccitazione a poli esterni mediante magneti permanenti. metergeneratorn har ytterpolsmagnetisering, genom perma- i
L'indotto eroga una tensione continua dipendente dal senso di nenta magneter. Likstr6msankaret avger en av rotations- I
rotazione. Per la tensione tachimetrica vi e una compen- riktningen beroende likspiinning. Takometersptinningen iir I
sazione della temperatura realizzala con termistori. te.nperatu rkom penserad over termistor. t
:
Quando la macchina principale 6 in mar- 71 Med roterande huvudmaskin ligger spdn- I

t
Attenzione cia, i morsetti o le estremitd dell'awolgi- /l\ \- Varning
,/;
ning pA takometergeneratornC klSmmor
mento della dinamo tachimetrica sono resp. lindnings5ndar.
sotto tensione.
Dati tecnici Tekniska data
i
(a velocitd e carico normali, se non e indicato diversamente) (Vid miirkvarvtal och mdrkbelastning, om ej annat angives)
Tensione nominale continua 20 V DC Miirkliksptinning 20 V- I
Corrente nominale 1,5 mA MarkstrOm 1,5 mA
No. nominale di giri 1000 giri/min Mtirkvarvtal 1000
.13,3
r/min
Carico nominale 13,3 ko M€irkbelastning ko
Tolleranza di tensione -1- B o/o Sptinningstolerans t 8 0/osptinningsavvikelsei
olo
Compensazione della + 1 0/0 scostamento di Temperaturkompensation *'l

temperatura tensione nel campo di tem- temperatu romrAdet
peratura+20..-100"C + 20 . .. 1000c
Ondulazioni di cresta
Errore di linearitd
Errore di inversione
della
ten-
I sion
\
<
<
<
1.0 o/o .
O.2o/o \ in tutto il campo
0,2 olo I di velocitd
TopvAgighet
Linearitetsfel
Reverserfel I
hos < 1,0
\ spiin- < 0,2
ningen < 0,2
o/o
o/o
o/o
over hela
varvtalsomredet
I
Campo di veiocitd 0-8000 giri/min (in entrambi VarvtalsomrAde 0 till 8000 r/min (i bAda
i sensi di rotazione) rotationsri ktn ngarna)
i
Corrente massima 10 mA Maximal str6m 10 mA

Classe d'isolamento F lsolationsklass F
Forma costruttiva rM 5210 Utfdrandeform tM 5210
Sistema di protezione lP 55 (con cappa e condi- Skyddsform lP 55 (med kApa och motsva-
zioni di montaggio idonee) rande pAbyggnadsf6r-
hAllanden)
ll valore della tensione tachimetrica e la compensazione della Takometeispanningen och temperaturkompensationen ar i
temperatura sono oitimizzati per un carico nominale di13,3 kO. optimerade fdr mtirkbelastningen pA 13,3 ks?. i. l
Nota: Se il carico viene modif icato (campo ammissibile: 10 kQ< Obs: En andring av belastningen (tillAtet omrade: 10 kg < RB < i,,l
RB < B0 kg) subentra una variazione del valore di tensione ed 80 kO) medfor en ?indring av spanningen och en forsiimring av .b,
un peggioramento della compensazione di temperatura. tem peratu rko m pensatio n en.
Per effettuare misurazione sulla dinamo tachimetrica vanno Vid matningar pe takogeneratorn fAr endast hdgresistiva ft1
impiegati solamente strumenti di misura ad alta resistenza mditinstrument anvandas (Rr : 100 kolV)' zu
j
(R,: 100 kalv). H
Manutenzione Sktitsel
lspezione Kontroll
Controllare lo stato delle spazola e del commutatore ogni volta
che viene effettuata la manutenzione della macchina principale rru:;ll*lil,"lffili4li,#ffi
livslZingd hos borstarna' c
53"'*.%?t"il11"il4;:1
(dopo 3000-5000 ore). Durata massima delle spazzole: ca'
10000 ore.. .15000 ore.
4
SIEMENS
SiChgfheitSinfOfmatiOnen fiir elektrische Betriebsmittel zum Einsatz in Starkstromanlagen
Safety infOfmatiOfl for electrical equipment for use in heavy current installations
lnfOrmatiOns relatives a la S6Curit6 de materiels €lectriques destin€s a €tre utilsos oins oes installations
d courant fort
lnfOfmaCiOnes de SegUfidad para los equipos electricos que se utilicen en instalaciones de energia
lnfOfmaZiOni pef la SiCUfeZZ?, nelrimpiego didispositivi elettrici in impianti ad alta tensione
SiikefhetSinfOfmatiOO fdr elektrisk utrustning som anvdnds i starkstromsanlltiggningar
Betriebsanleitung / lnstructions EWN-Bestel r./Order No.: 61 0.42356/ 21
DEUTSCH ENGLISH
Dieses lnformationsblaft mit den Warnhinweisen This informataon sheet with its warning is in addi-
gilt als ZusaE zur produktspezifischen Betriebs- tion to the operating instructions fortha individual
anleitung und muB aus Sicherheitsgriinden be- products and for safety reasons its contents must
sonders beachtet werden. be adhered to.
le GEFA'IR
Diese elehrtschen fraschinen
hzw. Ger?ite sind Betriebsmittel
zum Einsatz in industriellen Stark-
DANGEN
The electiic machines and eguip-
ment are Jor use in industrial
heavy cufient ,nstattations.
!
a
o
o
sttomanlagen. W*hrend des Be-
triebeb haben diese Betfiebsmit-
I During operating this equipment
has bare parts which are live aod
ri -9 tel. geliihrlicher. spannungsriih; a dangerous- and may. also have
Q"qi
aaa rende blanke Teile, ggt. auch be- mouing ot'totating parts, For this
o o= wegte bzw, rotierende 7er7e, Sie reason, unauthorized removal. of
I
t re aecessary .covers, improper
Ir,
o!o kdnnten deshalb, z. B, bei unzu-
Idssigem Entlernen der erlorderli- use, incorrect operation or insufli-
'- ots chen Abdeckungent bei unsach- cient maintenance could lead to
=bId-
< geme0em Einsatz, Jalscher Be- severe petsonal injury or property
j l= dienung oder unzureichender , ,damage.
I6.; W a rtu ng, sc hwe tste gesu ndheitli -
rgN che oder materielle Schdden ver-
5*5
-: a
o*
ursachen,
o:-
Die tiir die Sicherheit der Anlage Verantworilichen Those responsible lor the safety oJ the installation
{ do rniissen deshalb gewdhrleisten, dail must theretore ensute that
o{i.- - nur qualilizierte Perconen mit Arbeiten an den Ha- - only qualilied personnel are entrusted to work.on
EL= schinen bzw. Gerdten beauttragt werdent the machines or equipment,
o9J
<g - diese Perconen u, a. die mitgeliefierten Betriebs- - these persons always have at thefu disposat the
o anreitungen und iibrigen Unterlagen der Produft- operating instructions and other product docu-
I
o
dokumenbtion bei allen entsprechenden Arbei- men|ation supplied when they do such worlg and
F ten stets verliighar haben und verpfichtet werdent thal they u ndertake to lollow consistently any such
diese Unteilagen konsequenl zu beachten, insltuctions,
- Arbeiten an den.Maschinen bzw'.Gerliten oder in - non-qualilied personnel are not permitted to work
f(l deren Ndhe fiir nichtqualitizierle Personen unter-
sagt werden,
on or near the machines or equipment.
Qualiliziertes Personal sind Peisonen, die, auf Grund ihrer Qualilied peFonnel are persons who, on account of their
Ausbildung, Erfahrung und Unterweisung sowie ihrer Kennt- training, experience and instruction and their knowledge ot
nisse Uber einschlSgige Normen, Bestimmungen, Unfallverhu- relevant standards, specif ications, accident pi'evention regula-
tungsl/orschriften und Betriebsverhaltnisse, von dem f Ur die Si- tions and operating conditions, have been authorized bythose
cherheit der Anlage Verantwortlichen berechtigt worden sind, responsible for the safety of the plaritto carry out the n.eceSsary
die jeweils erforderlichen Tiitigkeiten auszuftihren und dabei work and who can recognize and avoid possible dangers (see
mdgliche Gefahren erkennen und vermeiden konnen (Defini- also IEC 364 for definitioris of specialist Oersonnel).
tionen fur'Fachkrtifte siehe auch DIN VDE 0105 oder
rEc 364).
Unter anderem sind auch Kenntnisse Uber Erste-Hilfe-MaB- A knowledge of first aid is also required as is information about
nahmen und die 6rtlichen Rettungseinrichtungen erforderlich' local rescue facilities.
F0r Arbeiten an Stdrkstromanlagen ist das Verbot des Einsat- The stipulation that only qualified peisonnel may work on heavy
zes.nichtqualifizierter Personen z. B. in DIN VDE 0105 oder current installations is inclUded for'example in'lEC 364.
IEC 364 geregelt.
/!\allwnnrurruc,*':"T1itr7!,',rf!',,i.l3,Elr7!i
/r\
and wotk conceming transport, commis-

assembly,
sioning, maintenance and repair is dcine by qualilied
personnel orchec*ed by responsible skilled perconnelt
den.
Hierbei sind insbesondere zu beachtent Particular nole must be taken ot the |ollwing
die technischen Daten und Angaben iiber die zulSssi'
- ge -'7he technical data and intormation on permissible
Verwendung Inonfalge', AnschluB'1 Umgehungs' use {assembly conditlons, connection conditions,
@ Siemens AG 1990
,1
und BetriebsbedingungenJ, die u.a. im Katalog, den ambient and operating condiaionsrt which are eontai-
der Betriebsanleitungt in the catalog, order documentst opetating
' ned
Auftragsunteilagen, den
Schildangaben und der iibrigen Erueugnisdokumen- instructions, rating plate and other ptoduct documen-
tation enthalten sind, tation,
- die allgemeinen Errichtungs- und Sicherheitsvor- - The gCneral erection and saletli regulations,
schriften,
- die iirilichen, anlagespiziJischen Bestimmungen und The locat, plant-specilic specilications and requirc-
- ments,
Ertordernisse,
- der lachgerechte Einsatz von Werkzeugen, Hebe- und The proper use ol tools, fiJting gear and transport devi-
- cest
Tra nsportei n rlc htu ng en,
- die Benutzung persdnlicher Schutzausstattungen,
fiiir'Gerdte, die ggl. enbpte-
- lhe use ol perconal protective geah
for equipment which may be
- Hontagebedingungen
chend IPOO (ohne Abdeckungenl ausgelielert wer-
- Installation instructions
supplied to IPoo (urithout coversl, In operationt this
dent Im Bebieb mu0 det erlorderliche Befiihrungs- equipment must have the necessarysho ck protedion
sdhutz vorhanden bzw. eine getdhrliche Anndherung litted or access must be prevented which coutd rcsult
verhindert sein. in dangen
Die Betriebsanleitu ngen kiinnten a us Griinden d6r Ober- These instructions cannot claim to cover all details ol
sichtlichkeit nicht alle Detailintormationen zu m,6gli- possible'equipment variations, nor in particular can
chen Balvarianten enthalten und kiinnen inshesondere they provide lor every possible example of installationt
nicht jeden denkbaren.Fall der Aulstellung, des Betrte- operation or maintenance. This means that the instruc-
bes oder der Wartung beilicksichtigen; DemgemflB sind tions Jor machines or equipment lor industrial applica-
in den Behiebsanleitungen im wesenilichen nur solche tions normally include only the directions to be lollowed
llinweise enthalten, die bei bestimmungsgemdBer Ver- by qualilied personal (see aboveJ wherethe equipment
wendung der Haschinen oder Gerdte'in indgstriellen is used lor its delined putpose.
Einsatzbereichen Jiir qualiliziertes Perconal (siehe
oben| ertordeilich sind.
FaIIs im Sonderlall bei beabsichtigtem Einsatz der ll in special cases if is inte nded to use the machines
or equipment in non-industriat areas and therelore
t
Blaichinen oder Gerdte in nicht industriellen Berei-
chen eventuell erhdhte Antorderungen gestellt irer- requirements may he more shingentt e'9. proteclion
den (2, B. Beriihrungssghutz gegeq Kinderlinger against contact by children lingers, ect., compliance
o. 6.1, miissen diese Bedingungen bei der Montage iith such tequirements must be assured duilng'
durch zusdtzliche SchutzmaBnahm.en anlagensei- installation by providing additional proiective mea-
ti g gewd h rI eistet werd e n, sures on sile,
Bei diesbeziiglichen Unklarheiten, inshesondere hei II there ate anti uncertainties in this respectt part-
Iehlenden produktspezitischen Detail-lnformationent iculaily in the event ot missing product-related inloma-
rndissen die ertorderlichen Kldrungen iiber die zustdn- tion, clafilication must be obtained yia the apprcpfiate
dige' $EHEMS-Veftriebsstelle herbeigetiihrt werden. SrEltEttS sales ollice. Please arways indicate the
Biate hietzu grundslitzlich Maschinen- bzw, Gerete- machine or equipment typ-e and serial number.
Typbezeichnung und Fertigungsnummer angeben,
ES WIRD EMPFOHLEN, FUR PLANUNGS-, MONTAGE-, INBE- WE WOULD RECOMMEND ASKING FOR THE ASSISTANCE
TRIEBSETZUNGS- UND SERVICE-AUFGABEN DIE UNTER- AND SERVICES OF THE COMPETENT SIEMENS SERVICE
STUTZUNG UND DIENSTLEISTUNGEN DER ZUSTANDIGEN CENTRES FOR PLANNING, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING
SIEMENS-SERVICEZENTBEN IN ANSPRUCH ZU NEHMEN. AND SERVICING TASKS.
HINWEIS: FUr allgemeine Arbeiten, z. B. zum Prufen eingehen- NOTE: For general work such as checking of incomming deli-
der Lieferungen (Transportschaden), zum langfristigen Einla- veries (damage in transit), storing and preserving for prolonged
gern und Konservieren von Maschinen, zur Fundamentpru- periods of time, foundation testing, fitting of couplings, installa-
fung, zum Aufziehen von Kupplungen, Aufstellen uhd Ausrich* tion and alignment of machines, etc., further detailed informa-
ten von Maschinen, lnstallationsrnaBnahmen u.v.a., sind wei- tion is given in the SIEMENS installation instritctions which can
tere Detail-lnformationen in den SIEMENS-Montageschriften be obtained from the sales offices.
oder Arbeitsrichtlinien enthalten, die erforderlichenfalls 0ber
die Vertriebsstellen bezogen werden kdnnen.
I
""!"i":!ii!i,,"Jiiii!i}fflJf!;ii!. /!\
A A'
/!\ wnnnrur,rc
Inspektions-
benen Wartungs:,
wnnrurrua,[::"":E::,,:::o
sures must
und Revisionslma&nah- canied by "T3,T!""i",133:
be trainedout regularly serulce
men regelmahid von routinieilem SerYice-Peronal personnel in order to avoid any interruptions or break-
durchliihren zu lassen [siehe obenl. downs lsee abover. Deviations jrom the normal perlor- 1'l
it
Verdnderungen gegeniiber dem Normalbetileb (hiihere mance (higher powet input, higher temperatures or !i
Leistungsaifnahme, Temperaturen oder Echwingun' vibrationsr.unusuaf noises or odourc, reactions by moni-

gen, ungepriihnliche Gerflilsche oder Geriichey Anspre- toring equipment, ect.t indicate that prcper lunction gJ
chen der Uberwachungseinirichturrgen usw.l lassen er' the unit is impaired. In order to avoid laultst which might I
kennen, daB die Funklion beeintrdchfigt ist. Zur Vermei- directly oir indireetly cause serious damage to prcpetty
dung von Stiirungen, die ihrerceits mitletbat oder un- or injury to persons, the rcsponsible maintenance per-
miltelbar schwere Perconen- oder Sachschiiden bewir' sonnel must be notilied immediately
ken kiinnten, mul das zustdndige Wartungiperconal
dann umgehend verctdndigt werden.
ZiT M ZWE//FELSFALL D'E ENTSPNEC']ENDEN
z! r TR'EB$ITITfiELSOFORTAASCHALTENI
BE.
A
l---L\
IF tN DOttEr, sw4ICH
D'A'ELY.
OFF T+lE EQUIPTTENT IITHE-
HINWEIS: Es wird darau{ hingewiesen, daB der lnhalt der Be- NOTE: The contents of the operating instructions and product
triebsanleitungen und Produktdokumentationen nicht Teil ei- documentation shall not become part of or modify any prior or
ner frUheien oder bestehehden Vereihbarung, Zusage oder ei- existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The Sales
nes Rechtsverh€iltnisses ist oder diesesgbtindern soll. Sdmtli- Contract c-ontains the entire obligations of Siemens. The war.
che Verpflichtungen von Siemens ergeben sich aus dem jewei- ranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole
ligen Kaufvertrag, der auch die vollstiindige und allein gUltige warianty of Siemens. Any statements contained herein do not
Gewiihrleistungsregelung enthalt. Diese vertraglichen Ge- create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
wAhrleistungsbestimmungen werden durch die Ausfuhrungen
dieser Anleitungen und Dokumentationen vrieder erweitert
noch beschriinkt.
2
ITALIANO SVENSKA
ll presente foglio informativo con gli awisi di Detta informationsblad med varningsanvisningar
allarme vale come supplemento aggiuntivo alle giiller som tillagg till den produktspecifika drirts-
istuzioni specifiche per l'uso di ogni apparecchia- instruktionen och maste ges sptrciell uppm?irk-
tura e, per motivi di sicurezza, deve venire attenta- samhet av sakerhetsskal.
mente rispettato.
PERllCOLO FANA
I macchinari le apparecchlatute
e De elektiska malkinema och
eleftfiche sono sttumenti impie- apparatema 6r utrustning liir
gatl ,n impianti induslriali s6tto- anvdndning i industriella stark-
I posti ad.atta tensione. Durante iI
Jun.ionamento tati disposiJivi
striimsanlflggningar. Under drif-
ten har dessa utrustningenheter
o possiedono pafti pericolose, sia o lailiga, spiinningstdrande blanka
perch6 postesotto tensione e non detaljer, i vissa lall iiven. fiirliga
isolate, sia perchei in moto, eller roterade delar. De kan dlirliir
Iineare o rotatorio. Esse quindi f.irorsaka allvailiga personeller
't
I
1i
rt sono in gtado di causare gravls-
simi danni a persone o cose, se,
ad esempio, Ie prctezioni ,l€G€s-
sarie vengoito rrirnosse, in easo di
utilizzo non adeguato, di servizio
rt rhaterialskador, t.ex. om erlorder-
Iiga beriSrlngsslcydd avl5gsnas i
strid mot giillande bestdmmelser,
u_id osakkunnig anvflndning,
ll, felaktig maniivrering eller ofiIi-
non cofietao o dI non sulliciente rfickligt underhCll
manutenzione,
Per questo motivo i iesponsabili per la sicurezza De sorn ansvarar Iiir anleggningen mCste ddrJiir
dell'impianto devono garantire chet sekercteila aftt
)t - ai macchinari od aIIe apparechiature elettfiche

yengano. aasegnate solo percone qualilicate
tali persone possano non solo aempre dispone
- presso
tutle le relalive postazioni di lavoro delle
istruzioni per I'uso ortginali e di ulteilore docu-
-
-
enbart l<valiricerad pentonal IiIlAts arbeta med
masUnerna och utrustniigsenheterna.
dessa pers,onet stendigt har tillgflng till medfiil-
iande driftinstruffiioner, och 6vrig produktdoku-
mentation vid allt arbete pA utrusiningen och
mentazione sul prodotto, ma anche che ne osser- itliiggs alt i vafie detaljtiilja anvisningarni i denna
vino conseguenJemente i contenuti dokumentation,
- Ie lavorazioni ai macehinari elo apparedchi o - ol<valilicerad personal ej tillCts arbeta med maski-
nelle vicinanze di essi ven gano interil5tti a perso- nerna och appataterna, eller i deras ndrhet.
nate non quatiticato.
Per perconale qualiticato si intendono quelle persone che, Kvatilicerad persgqa.I eE,.pelsoner som pA qrundval av
per la loro formazione, esperienza e istruzione, nonch6 le utbildning, erfarenhet eller'ln5tru(tibner samt kunskap rOrande
conoscenze delle relative norme, prescrizioni, provvedimenti tilleimpliga normer, bestiimmelser, olycksfallsforeskrifter och
per la prevenzione degli incidenti e sulle condizioni di servizio, , driftsforhellanden har bemyndigats av s€ikerhetsdnsvariq chef
sono stati autorizzati dal responsabile della sicurezza dell'im- att utfdra erforderliga arbetsuppgifter och diirvid kan uppfatta
pianto ad eseguire qualsiasi necessaria attivita ed in questa och undvika mojliga risker (definition av fackpersonal se tiven
essere,in grado di riconoscere ed evitare ogni possibild peri- DIN VDE 0105 elleer IEC 364).
colo. (Detinizione per il personaletecnico, vedi anche VDE 010S
o IEC 364).
Fra l'altro si richiedono anche nozioni di pronto soccorso e Bland annat erfordras €iven ktinnedom rorande fbrsta hjiilpen
sulle misure di salvataggio in loco. och om lokala raddningsanordningar.
Per lavorazioni in impianti ad alta tensione, il divieto di impiego For arbetet pa starkstromsanldggningar regleras forbudet
di personale non gualificato e'regolamentato, ad esempio, r0rande anvZindning av okvalificerad personal t.ex. i DIN VDE
nelle norme DIN VDE 0105 o IEC 364. 0105 eller IEC 364.
)l )
/\
,/!\ nffgNZONE viene -r-ichiesto -clr-gr i londa' A
//l\. \ VARNING Det Jiirutss_tE al-t principiellJ
planeringsrhete rdnande sysfe-
der,irnpianto,."^"o;i""il::;:X1?';"::r:ff;:!;:"8?- met samt alla arheten ned transporl, instattation, idritt-
lazionen messa in servizio, manutenzione e riparazioni Jagning, underhflIl och reparation utliirc av lcvaliJicerad
yengano eseguiti da personale qualifiicato e contnoltati perconal eller kontrollenaq att ansvafig lackpersonal.
dal personale tecnico'responsabile.
w A guesto riguardo occofie in parlicolar modq osser- Dlirvidmlsfe man tramtiir alft ge akt pit:
vafeE
- e specifiehe sul!,utllizzo consentito {con-
d_?t! tegryici - tehniska data och uppgifter riirande tiilCten anvdnd-
dizioni di montaggia, collegamenlo, ambientali e di ning (monterings-, anslutnings-, miffi- och drrtsvilh
serviziol,9he sono fta lraltro conlenute nel catalogo, korl, som bl.a. linns i-kiatalogen, orderhandlingarna,
nei dati di progettoo nelmanualedlsewiziornei dati di drilbinstruHionen, pA skyltar o,ch iivrig ptoduktdoku-
targa ed in ultefiori documentazioni sul prodotto mentationi
- generali prescrizioni di costruzione e sicurezza - de allmliina installations- och sdkerhetsJiireskriJ-
Jemai
prowedimenti e fichieste locali, speciliche delltim-
- pianto -Iokalat anldggningsspecitika bestdmmelser och
kravl
idonee modalita. di impiego di uteneili, sollevatori e
- trasportatofi - facknrannamdssig anviindning av vetmyg; Iyft- ooh
transportdoni
- I'impiego delle personali dotazioni proteltiye
modalfte di montaggio di apparccchiature, che ven-
- gono soim iyrbsa Ievere-
consegnate in contotmila. con IPOO (senza vid driften mdste det
coper?;ute)t durante iI seruizio deve essere dispbnibile tinnas eller anordhingat
la necessafia prctezione da aontatto e devq essere sott att komma i ndrheten av
interdelto un accostamento pertcoloso. utrustningen.
5
Le islruzioni sul lunzionamento delle apparecchiature Fiir iiverckAdlighetens sftufl kan ilfiJtsinstruktiottema
non possono, pena una maficata globalitd, contenere inte alltid innehClla all detaljinlotmation rdrande miij-
nel dettaglio tufte le inlormazioni silte possihili vailanti Iiga konstryHionsvarianter, och kan lramriir aIIt inle ta
coglruttive, net tanto. meno ogni pensabile caso nel hdnsyn titl alra tdnkbara slag av Installation, driJt och
montaggio, nel seryizio o niella manutenzione; Nei underhflIl. Sdlunda in nehtller driftsinstruHionerna i aII-
manuate solamente Ie istruzioni necessafie aI perco- menhet bata oedana anvisningar som krdvs iiir kralifi-
nale qualiticato per un adeguato utilizzo di mac6hinari cerad perconal (se ovanl i samband mad korrelrl
o di appatecchiature in aree di lavoro industriali. anvdndning av maskinet etter apparater i industriella
sammanhang,
Se in casi speciali di installazioni di macchinafi od Om av maskinet eller apparater enstaka ,all

apparecchia-ture non in aree industriali, vengano anvdnds utantiir industriomrCden och deaa medtiir
evehtualmente poste ulteriori condizioni (es., prote- skerpta krav (t,ex. beriiringsslcydd liir hamJ, sA
zione da.contatto per Ie dita di bambini, elct, tali miste dessa villkor sekeoteths genom montering
condizigni devono venire garantite dallt impianto in av extta stryddsanordningar,
Iase di montaggio atlraverso misure di protezione
aggiuntive.
ln mancanza di chiarezza, specialmente con mancanti Ta kontakt med ndrmaste SIEMENS-kontor vid oklarhe-
inlormazioni dealagtiate sitt particotare ptodotto, ter i detta ayseende, Iramliir allt avsaknad av produkt-
occorre provvedere aI chiarimento necessafio attra: specilik detaljintormalion. Ange dErvid Wpbeteckning
yer5,o ,e strutture cornmerciali SIEIilENS competenti, Si och tillverkningsnummer tiit beriirda maskiiret eltet
prega di indicara chiaramente il codicd del macchina' apparateL
iio o dena apparccchiatura ed iI relativo numero di pro-
duzione.
PER IL PROGETTO, IL MONTAGGIO, LA MESSA IN SERVIZIO ED VID PLANERING, MONTERING, IDRIFTTAGNING OCH,SERVI-
IL SERVICE, SI CONSIGLIA DI RICHIEDERE IL SUPPORTO E CEARBETE AR DET LAMPLIGT ATT UTruVTTIN DEN HJALP OCH
L'ASSISTENZA DEI CENTRI SIEMENS COMPETENTI. DE TJANSTER SOM UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH DE TJANSTER J^
SOM KAN ERHALLAS FRAN SIEMENS SERVICECENTBA, -
NOTA: Per attivita generali, come, ad esempio, l'accurato test OBS: Fdr allmZrnna arbeten, t.gx. kontroll av mottagna leveran-
del materiale consegnato (danni da trasporto), I'immagazzi- ser (transportskador), lAngtidslagring och konservering av
haggio a lungo termine e la conservazione di macchinari, le maskiner, kontroll av fundament, padragning av kopplingar,
prove di base, la stesura dei collegamenti, la messa in opera e uppstdllning och riktning av rnaskiner, installations6tgArder
la messa a punto dei macchinari, le norme di installazione e etc. galler ytterligare detaljinformation, som finns i $IEMENS
molti altri, sono disponibili r-llteriori informazioni, contenute monteringsanvisningar, som kan erhAllas f rAn forstiljningskon-
nell6 pubblicazioni SIEMENS per il montaggio e reperibili su toret.
.richiesta presso le rispettive agenzie.
A A
/l\ Atfined-i evitaresuastr; ;nedes-
nffeNZlONE sario late eseguite rcgolah ,A uorn,*c'";!,Ix;ri1i8:l,l:: ";tTi;gf3:
mente dal perconale di servizio addestrato Ie prescritte inspektions- och revisionsdtgdrder regelbundet ufidras
operazioni di manutenzione, ispezione e rcvisione (vedi av ertaren serticeperconaL Vid iakttagelser som ei
sopral, Variazioni ilspetto al nomale Junzionamento stdmmer dverens med normal dfilt (t.ex. hiigre etleh-
(assorbimento di potenza maggiorato, tempetatute, lii rhru kn i n g, lii rh 6jd temp e ratu te h v ib ratio ne r, ova n I ig a
vihrazioni, rumoil, etc, o segnalazioni da parte delltim- Ijud etc, eiler ndr skyddslunktioner liiser ut, ,inns det
pianto di sicurezza) fanno prevedere che il Junziona- anledning att misstdnka att Sven lunktionen piverkats'
mento sia non conetto. Per impedire guasti, che pos- Fiir alt undvika st6rninga4 som i sin tur man medfiira
sono recare direttarnente od indirettamente gravi danni allva rligaperson-ellet materialskador, m*ste dd ansva:-
a pensone o qgse, il perconale addefto alla manuten- rig serviceperconal kallas in utan driiismfll'
zione deve venire tempestivamente intormato.
,/N tN cAso DI DUBB/,O D/,SAT7TVARE TITMEDiATA- A KOPPLA OMEDELBANr I/FRAN UTNUSTNINGEN
/ ! \ TTEN?:E GLI UTENSILT SOSPETT'
NOTA: Si fa inoltre presente, che il contenuto del manuale e
delle documentazioni relative al prodotto non fa parte di
A vrD vaRJE MtssraNKE.
OBS: lnnehAllet i driftsinstruktioner och annan produkidoku-
mentation skall inte anses ingA som en del av tidigare eller giil-
o
accordi, impegni o rapporti giuridici, ne precedenti ne attuali e lande dverenskommelse, utf€istelse eller rattsfdrhallande och
che tale situazione non puo cambiare. Tali impegni da parte di ej heller dndrar detta. Alla forpliktelser fren Siemens sida grun-
SIEMENS risultano nel contratto di vendita corrispondente, daS pe det berorda kopeavtalet, som ocksA innehAller fullstdn-
contenente anche certificati di garanzia completi ed autono- diga och oinskrZinkta uppgifter r6rande garantiAtaganden.
mamente validi. Tali certificati di garanzia regolati da contratto Dessa avtalsenliga besttimmelser rorande garantidtaganden
non vengono n6 ambliati n6 limitati dalla stesura del presente varken kompletteras eller inskr€inks av framstdillningarna i
manuale. driftsi nstruktioner' och annan dokumentation.

Bereich Antriebs-, Schalt- und lnstallationstechnik / Driyes and Standard Products Group
Elektromotorenwerk Bad Neustadt a. d. Saale (EWN)

Sous r6serve de modifications Sujeto a modificaciones
Con riserva di eventuali modifiche F6rbehAll Eindrinjar
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft EWN-Bestell-Nr./Order No.r 610,42356/21

Bestdll-Ort: EWN
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
AGOTCO2OO(} MA6 Dc-Fn-Fr-snJt-sv
FRANQAIS ESPANOL
La pr6sente fiche d'information, qui comporte tes Esta hoja informativa con indicaciones de peligro,
marques d'avertissement, s,inscrit en compl6- es complementaria a las instrucciones de servicio
ment a la documentation du produit et doit etre especificas del producto y su contenado debe
respectee dans tous ses points pour des raisons observarse especialmente por razones de seguri-
de s6curit6 dad.
DANGER
Les machines et appareils 6tectri-
' PEL'ERO
qoes sont des mal6riels destinds Las mflquinas y aparatos elactth
dt 6tre utilis6s dans des installa- cos lorman parte de instalacio-
o
tions induslrielles I courant rort.
Ces mat6riels comportent des I nes industriales de energia el6c-
trica, Duranle su sewicio tienen.
parties actives nues et 6ventuel- o algunas partes descubiertas
Iement des piEces en mouyement sometidas a lensiones peligro-
I
ou en rotation susceptibles de sas, pudiendo haber otrasiuietas
I
constituet un danget en courc de a movimiento o totaci6n, Por este
il fonctionnement. Ils pourraient motivo, pueden dar origen
1r
par cons6quent occasionner des siemprg a graves.daftos pensona-
ll
l6sions cotporelles tris graves ou les o materiales si, por ejemplo,
des dommages inaieriels impor- se eliminan indebidamente ,as
t! tants, par exemple en cas drenli- cubieftas necesarias,.se hace
lJ" vem ent i ntem pestr'f des rec ou v r€- uso indebido de las mismas, se
ments n6cessaires, en cas dtutili- manejan ert6neamente o no se
sation non appropri6e, en cas de practican en ellas las suticientes
manoeuyre incortecte ou en cas' operaciones de mantenimiento,
) ,l de carence au niveau de ltentre-

tien,
II incombe par cons6queni aux responsables de Ia
e6curiJ6 de I'installation de taire en aorte
que seufes des perconnes
fos responsabtes de Ia seguridad de Ia instalaci6n
- g6es qualili6es soient char- tienen que garantizar quet
de ltex6cution de ttavaux sur les machineg - solo se encatguen los trabajos a realizar en las
ou aut les appareils, mequinas y aparatos a peraonas calilicadas
- que pour ltex6cution de tous les travaux corre-
spondants, ces pensonnes disposent en pema- - q-ue dichas pensonas aI realizar los correspon-
nence de Ia notice de mise en oeuvre livr6e avec le dr'entes trabajos tengan siempre a su disposici6n
produit et des autres 6l6ments de Ia documenta- y se comprometan a obsewar consecueniemente
tion du produit et qurelles goien? Jenues de se con- las instrucclones de servicio suministradas y Ia
tormer strictement i celte documentation, et demds documentacidn especitica de los pniiuc-
- qutil soit interdit aux personnes non qualili6es dte- tos.
x6cuter des Jravaux sur les machines ou appareils - Se prohibd trabefei'ei.Ias mdquinas y apatatos o
ou d leur voisinage, en sus proximidades a personas no caliticadas.
Par PEBSONNEL QUALIFTE il faut entendre les personnes PERSONAL CALIFICADO son aquellas personas que por su
qui, au vu de leur formation, de leur experience et de leur infor- formaciOn, experiencia e instrucci0n asi como por sus conoci-
mation ainsi que de leurs connaissances des normes et regle- mientos sobre las normas,. determinaciones, prescripciones
ments applicables, des prescriptions de pi€vention d'acci- sobre prevenci6n de accidentes y sobre las condiciones del
dents et des ionditions diexploitation, ont et6 habilitees par le servicio correspondientes, estan autorizadas por el respon-
responsable de la securite de l'installation d exdcuter les sable de la seguridad de la instalacidn a ejecutar las activida-
taches necessaires, et qui soi6nt en mesure de reconnaitre des des necesarias, reconociendo y evitando los posibles peligros
dangers eventuels et de les 6viter (pour les d6finitions relatives (sobre las definiciones de personal especializado consrjltese
)t A la competence des peisonnes, voir aussi DIN VDE 0105 ou DIN VDE 0105 o CEI 364).
cEr 364).
Elles doivent aussi avoir des connaissances de secourisme Entre otros, hay que tener conocimiento sobre los primeros
ainsi que de connaissances des €quipements de sauvetage se auxilios a prestar y sobre los equipos de salvamento locales.
trouvant sur place.
L'interdiction de conf ier des travaux sur des installations a cou- En las normas DIN VDE 0105 o en CEI 364 se regula la prohibi-
rant fort.a des personnes non qualifiees est reglement6e, par ci6n .de emplear personas no calificadas paia trabajos en
,l exemple dans DIN VDE 0105 ou CEI 364.
'sl; inslalaciones de energia el€ctrica.
lli
/r\ Les travaux d'6tudes et d'ing6'
fi ,/!\ nffgNflON ,/l\ pngCAUCION se-da Por guouesto que lostra'
nierie de ltinstallation ainsi que bajos lundamentales de planili-
# tous ,es travaux de transpott, de manutention, de mon- cacidn de la instalaci6n asi como todaa las operaaio;
tage, d'installation, de mise en service, de maintenance ngq de transporte, montaie, instalaci6n, puesta €D ser-
et de teparation sont suppos6s 6tre ex6cut6s.par des vicio, manteniniento y reparaci6n coirCn a cargo de
pexsonnes qualilibes ou sous ,e contrdle de perconnes perconal caliricadoy se realizan bajo eleonirot del per-
comp etentes respo ns a bies. onal especializado responsable.
s,
Dans ce contexte, iI a lieu det Hay que obsewar espeiialmentet
tenir compte des caractefi$iques techniques et des
- .conditions - e indicaciones sobre eI empleo
l,o-s d_atos tdcnicos
d,utilisation (conditions de montage, de admisible (condiciones de montaje, de conexiili, del
tacaordement, dtenviroinement eJ de serviceJ- qui amb_iente y del seruiciol, contenid-C, entre otros, itn el
Iig.urent entf6 autres au catalogue, dans Ia notice de 'gatftogo_, en la d6cunientacifln d;I pedido, 6n tas
rnise en oeatvre, sur ,es plaquettes signalitiques et instrucciones de sewicio, en rdltulos-y en li dem6s
dans res aulres 6ISmenE de Ia documentation du pro- documenlaci6n dal prcdicto.
dui]
d,se c'onlonner aux rlgles general€,s dt6tablissements Las-prescfipciones generates de instalaci6n y seguri-
- dad.
et de s5curit6,
respecter les prescriptions et contraintes locales
- sp6citiques Las determinaciones y condiciones e^rigidas especi-
- jicas
I I'installalion, de Ia instalacion y locales.
- veiller d I'uJilisation ad6quate des outils ainsi que des - EI empleo conveniente de herramientas y equipos de
. 6quipements de levage et de manutentionr' elevacian y transporte.
- veiller I I'utilisation des 6quipements de protectlon - El uso de los equipos de ptotecci6n peraonat.
des pelsonnes,
3
- conditions de montage pour des appareils qui.seront - Condiciones de montaje pana loa apatatos que pudie-
6yentuellement mis d llexpedition en degr6 de prctec- ran.habercesuministrado con el giado de protecci6n
igro, tion IPOO (sans tecouyrementsli en'servicer la protec- IPOO (sin envolventeslt Durante el seryicio tiene que
vicio tion requise contre lescontacts directs doitAtre assu- existir Ia protecci6n necesafia contra contactos
lebe r6e et une approche dangereuse doit €tre 6vil6e. casuares o impedirce Ia aproximacihh peligrosa.
guri- Poui des raisons de c[alrt;6, Ia documentation ne con- Pard mayor claridad, las instrucciones de setyicio no
tient pas loutes les iniormations de d6tail relatives aux ineluyen toiras ias inlormaciones detalladas de las
variantes de conliguration possibles i eIIe ne peut pas variantes constructivas posrtles y, especialmente, no
non plus abotder toutes res sttualions susceplibres de pueden considerat todos los casos imaginables de
se pr6senter Iorc de l,installalion, de I'exploiJation et de coloceci6n, de seruicio o de mantenimienJo. Por este
Ia maintenance. Dtune lagon g6n6rale, Ia.documenla- motivo, las initrucciones de servicio incluyen eD aaen-
etri- tion ne contient donc que des itrtormations n6cessar'res cia solo aquellas indicaciones que eI perconal caliti-
cio- .au personnel qualilib (voir ci-dessusJ, lorsque les cado (v6ase mds arribal necesiJa si las mdquinas o
I6c- machines et appareil2 sont utilrb6s dans des applica- apatatos se utilizan para eI fin industrial d que estdn
nen, tions indushielles, cohlorm6ment e I'usage aiiuel iI destinados.
rtas sont destin6s,
,fo-
rfas
rsle
gen 9i, dans un cas sp6cial, it serait envisagil dtutlliser Si, en casos especiares se pretende utilizar las
lna- Ies machines ou appareils dans des application non mdquinas o aparatos luera del embito industfial y
industrielles oi ils leraient 6ventuellement trohiet hubiera que cumplir condiciones mes severas (por
PIot d'exigences plus s6vdres (par exemple, protection
.las eiemplo, proteccidn contra contactoscon los dedos
ace contre les contacts des doigts d,enlant avec les pie- de los nifros o similaresJ eslai condiciones tendrdn
r5€ ies sous tension ou fes pieces en mouvemeni in- que quedar garantizadas por parte del cliente, adi-
)5e t6rieures d ltenveloppe ou autres), ces conditions cionando medidas de protecci6n durante el mon-
rles doivent 6tre gafanties sut I'installationr lors du montare,
to. tage, pat des dispositions de sec,utite additionnel-
fes.
>i6n Au cas od ces points ne seraient pas surlisamment Si hubiese dudas al respecto, espeeialmente si lalta-
clairc, notammdnt en cas dtabsence d,inlormations sen detalles inlotmativos especilicos del producto,
las produit, iI est indisptensable
'de contactei I'agence au
d6taill6es sp6citiques habria que establecer ias aclaracr-ones necesarias a
S/E;ilENS Ia plus proche pour trav6s de Ia oticina dc SlEifEltlS competente. Se ruega
obtenir les renseignements correspondants, D'une Jundamentalmente que, se indiquen la denominaci6n
,on- maniire g6nArale, 17 est ,recessaire de pr6ciser d cet del tipo de ias mdquinas o aparatos, asi como su
>i6n efJeJ Ia d6signation du type de Ia machine ou de l,appa- ntmero de labilcaci6n.
!nte reil et Ie num6ro de fabrication,
yla
Iuc- EN CE QUI CONCERNE LES TRAVAUX D'INGENIERIE, DE MON- AL EFECTUAR LABORES DE PLANIFICACION, MONTAJE,
TAGE, DE MISE EN SERVICE ET DE MAINTENANCE, NOUS PUESTA EN MARCHA Y SERVICIO SE RECOMIENDA HACER
tso RECOMMANDONS DE RECOURIR A L'ASSISTANCE ET AUX USO DE LA ASISTENOIA /.:.QOLAEORACION DE LOS CEN-
ts, PRESTATIONS DE SERVICE DES CENTRES SAV SIEMENS TROS DE SERVICIO COMPETENTES DE SIEMENS.
COMPETENTS.
NOTA: En ce qui concerne les travaux generaux, parexemple INDIGAGION: Los impresos SIEMENS de montaje, que en caso
por su le controle des livraisons (constatation des dommages occa- necesario pueden adquirirse en las delegaciones correspon-
rnoci- sionnes en cours de transport), le stockage et la conservation a dientes, contienen otras informaciones detalladas para los tra-
:iones long terme de machines, le contr0le des fondaticins, Ie montage bajos generales, por ejemplo, comprobaci0n de los sumini-
es del -d'accouplements, la mise en place et I'alignement de maihi- stros recibidos (dafros de transporte), almacenamiento prolon-
'9Pon- nes, les tiavaux d'installation, etc., les instructions de montage gado y conservaci6nde mdquinas, comprobaci6n de cimenta-
tivida- SIEMENS, qui sont disponibles dans les agences SIEMENS, ciones, calado de acoplamientos, emplazamiento y alineaci0n
lligros fournirons de plus amples renseignements. de maquinas, operaciones de instalacidn y otras tareas diver-
ultese SAS.
A Alindepr6venirdesinciderrts,it
/l\ ATTENTION est pRECAUCIOI;- Para preventu perturbaciones
meros
,cales.
r---:-r n6cesbaire de conlier d du z/l\'- \ es necesario que eI perconal de
personnel dtentretien exp6ilment6 fe soin drexdculer setyicio expefimentado (vfiase mai arri'ba1 eiectte
r6gulidrement tea ttavaux de maintenance, dtinspec- teguramente las operaciones prescfitas de manteni-
ohibi- tion et de r6vision prescrits (voir plus hautJ, Les anoma- miento, inspecci6n y revisi6n. fas altericiones
os en lies par ruppod au lonctionnement normal (puissances respecto al sewicio normal (mayor consumo, incre-
absorb6es, tempetatures ou vibrations plus 6lev6es, mento de tempetaturas o de vibraciones, ruidoi u olo-
bruib ou odeurc inhabituets, entree en action des 6qui- res no habituales, actuaci6n de los equipos devigilan-
s tra- pements de surteillance, etc.t laissent supposer que Ie cia, etc.r, dan a conocetqueelluncionamienlo estd dili-
lanili- fonctionnement bst compromis. AIin d,6vfuer des inci- cultado. Para evitar perturbaci6nes que, a su y€21 pu€-
iacio- dents susceptibles d'occasionner directement ou indi- den motivar directa o indirectamente graves daffos per-
tl S€l- rectement des l6sions corporelles ou das. dommages sonafes o materiales, hay que avisar inmediatamente
go de mat6riels, le perconnel comp6tent pour la maintenaice al perconal de mantenimiento competente.
{ per- doit 6tre averti imm6diatement.
npleo
A
/.\
EH CAE DE DOUTE, PNOCEDER INTED'ATEMENT
A LA M'SE A L'ARRET DES HATERIELS CONRE.
s/PONDANTS!
/N
/ l\,
EU CASOS DE DIIDA, DESCONECTAR TNMEDIA-
TAilENTE LOS COfiIpONENTES AFECTADOS.
n, del
,en el ATTENTION: Nous attirons I'attention sur le fait que le contenu INDIGACIONT Se hace notar que el contenido de las inslruccio-
,n las de de la documentation du produit ne fait pas partie d'un nes de servicio y de las documentaciones de los productos no
emea accord, d'une Bromesse ou d'un rapport juridique interieurs ou son parte componente.de convenios, coneesiones o relacio-
en vigueur; elle n'a pas non plus pour objet d'y porter amende- nes legales pasadas o existentes, ni pretenden modificarlas.
ment. Toutes les obligations de SIEMENS ddcoulent du marche Todos los compromisos adquiridos por Siemens resultan del
egurh conclu, qui stipule aussi les clauses de garantie completes et correspondiente contrato de compraventa el cual contiene la
valables a titre exclusif. Les presentes instructions et docu- regulaci6n completa y Unica valida del compromiso de
;peci- mentations ne sauront ni 6tendre ni restreindre les clauses de garantia. Las deteirhinaciones contractuales sobre la garantia
garantie contractuelles no quedan ampliadas ni limitadas por el contenido de estas
osde instrucciones y documentaciones.
3 4
Conservazione (v. Fig. 2, 3) VSrd (underhill) 1se Fis. 2, 3)
Sostituire le spazzole quando vengono sostituite quelle della Utbyte av borstarna skall genomforas nar man byter borstarna i
macchina principale. Sganciare le staffe di sostegno di 8.90, huvudmaskinen. Borstbygeln av 8.90 demonteras, resten av
togliere i residui delle spazzole, pulire il portaspazzole ed il borstarna avltigsnas, borstapparaten och kommutatorn
commutatore dalla polvere delle spazzole. Pulire la dinamo, rengdres frAn damm frAn borstarna, takometergeneratorn
con aria compressa ed agganciare le nuove spazzole con le urblAses och de nya borstarna med borstbyglarna (8.90)
staffe di sostegno (8.90). insattes. Om kommutatorn uppvisar rriiflor mAste den svarvas.
Se il commutatore presenta delle rigature, dovra essere Minsta tillAtna ytterdiameter 38 mm; Rz 3...7 pm.
ripassato. Minimo diametro esterno ammesso: 38 mm; Rz : Glimmerisoleringen mellan Kommutatorlamellerna urfrases
3...7 pm. L'isolamento tra le lamelle del commutatore va f resato noggrant. Den avmonterade takogeneratorns storsta tillatna
accuratamente. Max. eccentricita radiale del rotore excentricitet : 0,02 mm.
tachimetrico smontato: 0.02 mm.
Riparazione Reparation
Smontaggio della dinamo tachimetrica (v. Fig, 1, 2, 3) Nedmontering av takogeneratorn (se fig. 1, 2, 3)
Dopo aver tolto la cappa, staccato ;l collegamento ad innesto Ta av kApan, lossa stickfdrbindningen (U, mark ledningarna
(V), contrassegnato i conduttori, e sganciato in direzione och ta ur borstarna axiellt. Monterna sedan av statorn genom
assiale le spazzole, si pud smontare lo statore svitando le due att de tua cylinderskruvarna M5 (8.89) eller annat fastelement
viti a testa cilindrica M5 (8.89). lossas.
Per smontare il rotore (8.84), svitare le viti di fissagio h46 (8.85) Demontage av rotorn (8.84): FZistskruven M6 (8.85) urskruvas.
opp. un altro elemento di fissaggio. lnfilare la spina d'acciaio StAlstiftet (Gl 4,8x24 instickes till anslaget i motoraxeln (som
.G" (4,8x24) nell'albero del motore fino al riscontro (a skydd av centreringen i axeliindan). I stiillet fdr fdistskruven
protezione del centraggio sull'estremitd d'albero). Al posto eller annat ftistelment inskruvas en skruv M8 (S) (min. laingd
della vite di fissaggio opp. di un altro elemento di fissaggio 30 mm), eller skruv enligt driftinstruktionen for den
avvitare una vite M8 (S) (lunghezza minima 30 mm) o viti huvudmaskin, varmed rotorn lossas frAn den koniska sitsen pA
indicato nelle istruzioni per I'uso della macchina principale. motoraxeln (kon 1:10). Genom att hAlla fast av rotorn vid
Con essa staccare il rotore della sede conica sull'albero del sexkanten (SW 19) pa rotornavet forhindra att denna vrides.
motore (conicita 1:10). Trattenendo l'esagono (SW 19),
impedire che ruoti anche il rotore.
o Montaggio della dinamo tachimetrica (v. Fig. 1)

ll rotore della dinamo (8.84) viene calettato sull'estremitd
d'albero conica (A) della macchina principale, come indica lo
Montering av takogeneratorn (se fig. 1)
Takometerrotorn (8.84) skjutes med dubbelkonaxeln pA den
koniska axeltinden (A) hos huvudmaskinen enl. skiss och
schizzo, e qui viene fissato con una vite ad esagono cavo ltrl6 fastsattes med en insexskruv (8.85) eller annat f2istelement
(8.85) opp. con un altro elemento dif issagio sec. ivalori quotati enligt driftinstruktionen fdr huvudmaskinen. Dra At skruvarna
nelle istruzioni per I'uso della macchina principale. Coppia di med det moment som anges i denna driftinstruktion, eller med
serraggio per (8.85) o per l'elemento difissaggio indicato nelle 10 Nm, om inte annat anges. Rotationsavvikelse fdr
istruzioni per I'uso della macchina principale; altrimenti 10 Nm. kommutatorn max 0,04 mm.
Massima oscillazione radiale del commutatore 0,04 mm.
Poi viene montato lo statore (8.86) sul bordo di centraggio dello DAreiter monteras statorn (8.86) pa centeringsfliinsen hos
scudo del cuscinetto (6.20) oppure sulla flangia di dispositivi lagerskolden (6.20) eller pA fltinsen hos mellanpAbyggnaderna
eventualmente frapposii (p. es. riduttore di misura per un (t.ex. vaxel for varvtalsgivare). Borstarna monteras efter
sincro). Le spazzole vengono applicate dopo il montaggio dello statormontaget'geno.ynyaxial..arretering av borstbyglarna av
statore, agganciando in senso assiale le staffe di sostegno di 8.90 (se iiven "Vdrci"). Koriekt placering av borstbyglarna
8.90 (vedere "Conservazione"). Fare attenzione ad un buon beaktas.
fissaggio delle staffe di sostegno.
ll sistema statore-rotore pud essere combinato e sostituito Rotor-stator-systement kan utbytas och kombineras fritt.
liberamente.
Collegamento elettrico della dinamo tachimetrica (Fig. 3) Elektrisk anslutning (se tig. 3)
Mediante il collegamento ad innesto, effettuare l'allacciamento Den elektriska anslutningen fores dver stickforbindningar till
elettrico sui punti 2A1 (positivo ") e 2A2 (negativo.) sulle staffe anslutningspunkerna 2A1 (plus-) och 2A2 (minus.).
di sostegno.
* con rotazione destrorsa dell'azionamento t da drivanordningen roterar medurs
)o Nota: Si dovrd fare attenzione che la compensazione della Obs: Observera, att temperaturkompensationen meste vara
temperatura venga collegata in serie con il polo negativo delle kopplad i serie med minusborsten.
spazzole. Si usino possibilmente cavetti schermati.
5
Ersatzteile
Ersatzteile vom Werk lieferbar. D = Diese Dichtflachen si nd bei Montagearbeiten vor dem
Wiederzusammenbau zu reinigen und mit Fluid D oder
Normteile sind nach lvluster im freien Las piezas normalizadas, seg0n
8.84 Tacholaufer 8.88 einem gleichwertigen Dichtmittel zu bestreichen, sonst
Handel zu beziehen. muestra, pueden adquirirse en el
8.86 Tachostender keine Gewahrleistung der Schutzart lp 55. comercio.
8.87 Abdeckkappe The standard parts can be procured Le parti sono normalizzate e reperibili
8.90 KohlebUrste mit BrirstenbUgel D = During servicing, lhese surfaces should be cleaned according to samples from local secondo campione in commercio.
8.93 Dichtung fUr die Abdeckkappe and coated with Fluid D or an equivalent sealing com_ dealers.
8.95 Djchtung 8.87 pound before reassembly, otherwise lhere can be no
guarantee of type of protection lp 55. Les pidces normalisdes se trouvent Normerad del kan erhallas i fria han
dans le commerce sur presentation deln enl monster.
A Wellenende der Hauptmaschine
8.84
D= afin de restaurer le degre de protection lp 55 lors du d'un echantillon
G Stahlstift r6ssemblage, nettoyer ces surfaces et les enduire de
K Anbaumdglichkeit f0r Klemmenleiste Fluid D ou d'un produit d'gtanch6ite 6quivalent.
S M8-Schraube zum Abdrr.lckerr D: Antes de esamblar, durante los trabaios de montaie
U Anbaumdglichkeit lrir Kondensator se limpiardn estas superticies de junta y-se untardn con
V Steckerleitungen 8.85 Fluid D o con un producto similar, ya que de omitirlo, no
d
A queda garantizado el grado de protecciOn lp 55. 8.88
8.85 DrN 6912 8.89
D: Durante i lavori di montaggio, prima di esser rimon- DrN 84
Spare parts tate, queste superfici di tenuta devono esser puljte e spal_
mate con Fluid D oppure una sostanza idonea. Altrimenti
Spare parls to be ordered from our works. non puO esser garantita la protezione lp 55.
8.84 Tachogeneratorrotor
8.86 Tachogeneralorstalot
B.B7 Cover cap
B90 Carbon brush
8.86
8.ss
?:.Dessa tatningsytor meste vid montagearbeten fdre
aterinbyggnad rengoras och instrykas med fluid D eller
likvardigt tatn i ngsmedel.
ej garanteras.
I an nat fall kan skyddsform lp 5S
8.94 DtN 46320
N
8.93 Seal
8.95 Seal A n zie hd reh mom ent
A Shaft end ol main machine Tightening torque
G Steel pin
K N/ounting facility tor terminal block
S N48 bolt for extraction purposes
Fig. 1
95
Fluid D Couple de serrage
Par de apriete I .1,5
- 2 Nm
LJ lvlounting lacility for capacitor 8.93 Lieferant: Coppia di serragqio
Alrag n i n g sm om en t J
oo
V Clip-on leads Supplier:
Fournisseu r: Fa. Teroson
Pidces de rechange Proveedor: D-6900 Heidelberg

8.88
Fo rn itore:
Peut 6tre fourni par I usine comme piece de rechange.
Leverantdr:
8.84 Rotor de la dynamo tachymetrique
B.B6 Stator de la dynamo tachymetrique B.8z
a.B7 Ca pot
8.90 Balai en charbon 8.90
8.93 Joint
8.95 Joint
A Bout d'arbre de la machine principale 8.sg
G Pige en acier 8.84
K Emplacement de montage pour bornier
S Vis d'extraction lM8
U Emplacement de montage pour condensateur
V Conducteurs avec clip G
B.8s
Piezas de repuesto
Se suministra por la fabrica en calidad de pieza de repuesto.
B 84 Rotor del generator tacom6lrico 8.90
LB6 Estator del generator tacometrico
B.B7 Caperuza 8.86 8.86
8.90 Escobilla
8.93 Junta a
8.95 J unta
A Extremo de eje de la maquina principal 8.89
G Espiga de acero
K Posibilidad de montaje para regleta de bornes 8.84
S Tornillo M8 para desmontaje Fig.2
U Posibilidad de montaje para condensador
V Conductoresenchufables
Pezzi di riserva
oo A
8.94
Viene fornito come pezzo de ricambio dalla fabbrica

884
8.86
8.87
Rotore della dinamo
Statore della dinamo
Cappa
V
W
8.90 Spazzola di carbone
8.93 Guarnizione D
8.95 G u arn izion e
A Estremitd d'albero della macchina principale K 8.90
G Spinotto d acciaio
K Per eventuale montaggio della morsettiera 8.86
S Vite IVB per estrazione
U Per I'eventuale montaggio del condensatore 8.85
V Cavetto ad innesto
Reserdelar 8.89
Kan bestalles som reservdel frAn fabriken. V
B.B4 Takorotor
8.86 Takostator
8.87 Kdpan
8.90 Kolbo rste
8.93 Tdtning U
8.95 Tatning
A Axelande hos huvudmaskinen 8.84
G Sldlsti,t
K Fdr pdbyggnad av kopplingsplinl
S f/8-skruv ror avdragning Fig. 3
U Fdr pdbyggnad av kondensator
V Ledningar med stiftkontakt
6
7
Bereich Antriebs-, Schalt- und lnstallationstechnik / Drives and Standard Products Group
Elektromotorenwerk Bad Neustadt a. d. Saale

Sous reserve de modifications Sujeto a modificaciones
Con riserva di eventuali modifiche FOrbehAll fdr Andringar
EWN-Besiell-Nr./Order No.: 610.411 I 21 e

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bestell-Ort: EWN
7 4
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

AG049J5.0 MAB De-En -Fr-Sp-lt-Sv
lndustrie Elektronik
Liru#e x G.mbH
ANALOGUE REGULATION ELECTRONICS REG-3

FOR MOTOR CONTROL UNITS
REG-3 1093
ANALOGUE REGUI-ATION ELECTRONICS REG-3
Contents Chopter Title Pqge

t. Appllcotlon
Chorocterlsllcs 3
a
3. Soillng funcllons
4. Jumper 4
5, R€odlng 4
6. lndlcotlon exlls 4
7.O. Iechnlcol dolos 4
7.1 Connecllons Xl 5
LZ, Plug-ln letmlnols )€ 5
/.J. Connectors X3
7,4. Connectors X4 6
7,5. Loyout ov€rvlew 6
8.0. Connecllon lnslructlons 7
8.1. Enoble 7
8.1,1. Enoble by reloy conlocts 7
8,1.2. Enoble uslng exlernol voltoge 7
8.2. Nomlnol speed volue I
8.2.1, Nominol volue using lnlernol voltoges 8
8.2.2.
8.2.3. Nomlnol volue from SPS ot CNC I
8.2,4. Nomlnol volue cunenl 9
8.2.5. Auxlllory nomlnol volue 9
8.2.6. Currenl nominol volue ln/output
8.3. Cunent llmlls I
8.3.1 The currenl llmll uslng lnlernol voltoge l0
8.3,2, Currenl llmll from SPS ot CNC l0
8.3,3 Current llmlt by m€ons of currenl loop l0
8.4. Acluol speed volue 1l
8.4.1. Acluol tochomeler volue ll
8.4.2. Acluol ormolure voltoge voluo ll
8.5. Reody slgnol 12
8,6. oulpul slgnols t')
8.6.1 . Tochometer erlor tz
8.6.2. Ov€rlood t2
8.6.3. Stondstlll t2
8.7.r. Speed lndlcotor ,'i. " '' l3
8.7.2. Curreni lndlcolor I3
9.0. Seltlngs t3
Speed l3
9.2. lntegrolor le
9.3. Pl-seitlngs l4
9.3.r, P-componenl 14
9.3,2. l-componeni l4
o?L D-component l4
9.3.4 Ampllcotlon t5, l6
9.4.1 Deplctlon of the regulotlon setllng l6
9.4.2 Deplcllon differentollon of lho ocluol t7
Adlustmenl wlthoui meons of mecsurement 17
9,4.3
9,5,1. Aciuol volue lochometer IB
9.5,2. Actuol volue ormqlure volloge l8
9.6,1. lni€rnol cunenl llmll l9
9.6.2. Externol current llmli l9
9.6.3 Consloni curr6nl llmll t9
9.6.4. Commuiotlon llmll 20
, -2- UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH GruningerstraBe B D-71364 Winnenden / Stuttgart-Germany

U nrile x lndustrie Eleklronik
GmbH
Regulotlon electronics used for reguloting thyristor ond trqnsistor l"

'lQ ond 4Q operotions,
motors in APPLICATION
It con be employed for reguloting speed (tochometers or .
ormoture voltoge wifh lxR compensotion), torque or combined

speed-torque,
* differentiol input omplifier 2.

* slope limitor (the integrotor is odjustoble) CHARAC-
* regulotes the speed (RVU) with Pl-switching system TERISTICS
* input of the octuol difference volue
* output of the nominql current volue
* stotic ond dynomic current limit
* current ond commutotlon limit depending on the speed
* highly ohmic input of the ormoture voltoge
* forced setpoint volue
* enoble logic
* solderless odjustment
* bus controller
* possible optlons : Multil,Multi2,Multi4,Supi'l (lnterbus)
Function Component ":' 3.

SETTING
Tochomeier for the binory switch 59 ,-
octuol odlustment volue potentiometer P4 (n-mox) FU NCTIONS
Armoiure voltoge of the octuol polentiometer P4 (nmox)

odiustmeni volue with potentiomeier P2 (lxR)
lxR compensoiion
internolcunent limit jumper Sl3, S14

potenliomeler P5 (lmox-l )
(l O only P6 ) potentiometer P6 (lmox-2)
Externol cuneni limit potenliomeier P5 (lmox-l )

potenilometer P6 (lmox-2)
Constont cunent potenilometer P7 (lD)

lntegrotor Jumper 52
poientlometer P'l (lNI)
Ampliflcolion P componeni , binqry swltch 54

P3 (Xp), Jumper Sl5
Ampllflcotion I component binory switch S5
Ampllflcotlon D component binory switch 58
Commutotion limit resisior Rl I l, Rl l2
Zero odjustment (n-min wilh 1Q) potentiometer P8 (Offset)
Tel. 0049 7195/4006 FAX 0049 7195/4008 -3-

ANALOGUE REGULATION ELECTRONICS REG.3
4. Funclion Jumper Number

nominol input volue
JUMPER circuitry reference zero 56
tochometer regulotlon 57, Sl2
tochometer smoothing Sl I
ormoture voltoge regulotion, Sl0
lxR compensqtion Sl
internol current llmit I Sl4
internol current limit 2 (1 O) Sl3
with integrotors 52
without integrotors 53
omplificotion l:l (torqueresutolon)
- Sl5
tochometer moniloring 516 Pos.2-3
over current iimingof lsecond Sl8
deloyed control blockoge (qurcksrop) Sl9
qctuol current volue SWI Pos.2-3
integrol-disconnection lswrcn.orr) SWI Pos.l -2
Jumper plugged with the given funktion
a- Function Luminescent dlode No.

nominol enoblevolue LED I
READING speed ond current
enoble
controller LED 4
reodysignol LED 26
+
speed controller ouiput L'ED 6'
-
speed controller output LED 7
overlood LED B
stondstlll LED 9
iochometer error LED 24
The LEDs lighien up occording to the given funktion
6. Functisn Terminql Number

reody signol X2:105 - X2:106 : - '
INDICATION tochometer error X2:1O7
EXITS overlood X2:l0B
siqndstill X2:1 l0
speed (octuol n volue) X2:109
current (octuol I volue) X2:l I I
When in good condition, the output signols supply >l5V/6mA
7.0, Technicol dolqs

Connection voltoge - +24Y,8.5mA X3:l
TECHNICAL without externol consumer +i5V, 25mA X3:3
DATAS -15V, l TmA X3:7
nom inol ouxiliory voltoge +l- l0V, lOmA
Output slgnols +24V,6m,A .
-4- UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH Gr0ningerstraBe 8 D-71364 Winnenden / Stuttgart-Germany

U nrile x GmbH
Functlon Terminol Number 7.1
input/ouiput of the CONNEC-

nominol current"volue Xl:l TIONS XI
oddltlon - nomlnol-volue speed controller Xl:2
+ 24 Yolt (for the enoble) Xl:3
enoble lnput (+'10..+30 Volt) f,l;{ i
+ l0 Volt (for the nomlnol volue) Xl:5
nominol volue - input (signol) Xl:6 :'
- l0 Volt (for the nomlnol volue) X1:7
nominol volue - input (GND) Xl:8o
device ground (GND) Xl:8 l
tochometer input (GND) Xl:8b., .
tochometer input (slgnol) Xl:9 '- '.'
--. Function Terminol Number

7.2.
+ l0 Volt (for the current limit) X2:l0l PLUG.IN
externol current limit ll X2:102
exfernol curreni limit 12 X2:.l03 TER MINALS
device ground (GND for current limit) X2:lO4 ,
x2
reody signol X2:105
reody signol X2:106
tochomeier error signol X2:147
overlood signol X2:.l08
speed (n-octuol) X2:.l09
stondstill signol X2:110
current (l-octuol) X2:l I I
Function Connector number 7.3,
+ 24 Yolt +l- 10 o/" X3:l ond 2 CONNECTORS

r' + 15 Volt +l- 2% X3:3 ond 4 X3
- -24 Volt +/- l0 o/" X3;5 ond 6
- 15 Volt +l- 2 % X3:7 ond 8
',device ground GND X3:9,.l0,.l 1,.l2,13,14
nominol I volue (GND) 0 X3:.l 5
nominol I Volue (signol) +/- l0 V = X3:.l6
current controller enoble + l5 V = X3:17
lnterlock direction + l0 V - X3:.l8
lnterlock direction + l0 V = X3:1 9
n-octuol +5V= X3:20
l<ctuol + l0 V = X3:21
Overcurysnt:pow€r unit n. c. X3:22
ignitlonphosel:+l0V= X3:23
; ignition phose 2: + 10 V = X3:24
reody slgnol + I0 V = X3:25
free n, c. X3:26
Tol OOd.9'71oBld.n,n6, trAY On49 71oE/4nnR -5-

7.4. Funclion Conneclor Number

CONNECTORS + 24 Yolt X4:l ond 2
x4 +.l5 Volt X4:3 ond 4
-24Yolt i :
',,' X4:5 ond 6 .'
- 15 Volt X4:7 ond B -
device ground GND X4:9 qnd l0
enoble X4:.l1
n nomlnol before
the diff. omplifler X4:12
n nominol ofter:
the diff. omplifier
n nominol ofter
the in tegrotor X4:14
lnominol X4:.l5
n octuol (ofter the divider) X4:16
free X4:17
current limit ll X4:18
current llmit l2 X4:19 -
loctuol X4.,2O
constont curent limit lD X4:21
n octuol (ofter rectifier) X4:22
tochometer error X4:23
overlood : X4:24 stondstill X4:25
n,c. ' x4i26'"
7.5. Where to find lhe mosl importonl components.

COMPONENT o X,I
6N0
LAYOUT
OVERVIEW Nal N7t
LED9
ral Xmti.fu06lmzr
- @stttstono
0bertosi
o svt l-:-l
RVU LEDE3 l?t
NI N3 I
P7
lo. Doucrsiron
r.rg l=l
o -.120/.
I
P2 KoFp"nsotion
lt t lxR
P3 Vertstiirkung
D-Ante(
I
H ss
Nst Tt
$-
f-
"p
PI
tNt lnt?gro,ter-Zat
[-Ante(
I
P-Anteil,
H s5 Schretl,rtopt
rt lntrgntr.[319
dn lrlmtclLse
'|
srr
i€Noa
CAOAF
UUUUU
)JJJJ
3O st1
st3
.s P5
I ..rt
Spttzenstrm
0 - 200'/.
s4 L-33 @oo(Do P6
I
Tocho-
B
I.dtglltisp LEDI rn!
J:O
ts
F
F
€
f. | ..re
P1
Spltz?nttrod
. 0 .- ?00't
Abgt?tch 39 ,r,.. Frcrgobc@
ml N'
BIB
Drehzohl
il o sl0
Hil N6 RD3
Sollrt-tutbc:oga Adc"n FSir{

7 t0e r04 r06 t0g ll0
-6- UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH GrtiningerstraBe 8 D-71364 Winnenden / Stuttgart-Germany

Urulkx lndustrie Elektronik
GmbH
The connection instructions ore solely os generol informotion ond 8.0.

ore nof deflnitive, Locol regulotions ond the connection/ CONNECTION
operotlng instructions of the boslc device (e. g. the thyristor INSTRUCTIONS
motor controller a1-4x) ore.to be observod: .-_-_ . , . .
As lnterference on the nominol ond octuol current lines

reducesthe control ronge os well os the control occurocy, these
lines must be shielded ond loid out seporotely from the moin
current lines.
Conneciing X1 :3 to Xl :4 or by setting o voltoge higher thon + l0 8.1.
V the nominol volue ond the speed controller (RVU) ore
ENABLE
enobled without deloy. By opening ihe contoct/switching off
the enoble voltoge, the nominql vqlue will be immediotely
pulled to 0 ond the speed controller disobled ofter 5 seconds
(quick stop) or the nominol volue ond the blockoge ore
switched simultoneously, The function con be chosen with
jumpet S19.
Sl9 plugged = deloyed control blockoge
S'19 open = undeloyed control blockoge
Xlr 3
o
*ee
8.LL
Output Xl:3 = 24 V l6mA |
ENABLE
lnput Xl:4 = input resistonce 4 kQ I'/o, BY
Coution: '( coNTACT(S)
loy out the reloy contocts for 6mA.
'/
Use only gold or reed contocts.
lnput Xl:8 = GND 8. t .2.

lnput Xl:4 = Enoble Xl' 4 Xl: I ENABLE
input resistonce 4 kQ
I GND
VOLTAGE
I
Enoble voltoge from on SPS or CNL +lo ... +3oV

.l0... I
+ + 30 Volt (nominol +24 V/6mA). F neigobesponnung
lf using reloy contocts in the enoble line,

pleose poy ottenilon thot the oppropriote contocts ore used.
Tel. 0049 7195/4006 FAX 0049 7195/4008 -7

ANALOGUE REGUTATION ELECTRONICS REG.3
8.2. The nominol input volue Xl:6 set for o nominol voltoge volue
is
NOMINAL of +l- l0 Volt, ln lQ operotion 0,, + l0 V, in 40 0., +/- l0 V, The

nominol volue con be either generoted by employing the inter-
SPEED VALUE
nol connection voltoges of + l0 (Xl;5) qnd - l0 V (Xl:7) or by
using o nominol voltoge volue of on SPS or o CNC system, The
input resistonce is 50 k. Switching contocts wlthin the nominol
volue erncrl nominol volue supply, it is lmportont thot the jumper
56 is set,
Hoving jumper 56 pulled, the octuol volue input will be swiiched
os o differentiol omplifier,
Ouiput Xl:5 = + l0 Volt/S mA Xl,5 6 7 8a

8.2.r. + -10
Output Xl:7 = - l0 Volt/S mA 6ND
NOMINAL
Output Xl:Bo = device ground GND d2
VALUE USING lnput Xl:6 = nominol volue d1 d2
INTERNAL 0., +l- l0 Volt
VOLIAGES
Reversing the rotqticn direction is ochie- P-Sott
ved by meons of coniocts dl ond d2, Slop is
when dl ond d2 ore open, Speed odjustment
:
is fixed with the poieniiometer P-nominol,'Po-l"
..,
tentiometer resistonce from 5 up to l0 kA, No-

minol volue voltoge 0,,+/- l0 Volt
Jumper 56 closed
Xl' 5 6 7 Bo
IQ Output Xl:5 = + l0 Volt +10

GND
Output Xl:Bo = device ground GND
lnput Xl:6 = nolTtinol volue d1
0.. + l0 Volt
Stop with d1 open, speed odjustment with

P-Sott
potentiometer P-nominol, Resistonce
from 5 up to l0 kO.
Jumper 56 closed,
X1' 5 6 7 I
lnput X'l:6 = nominol volue input o
8.2.3.
lnput Xl:8q = nominol volue
THE NOMINAL
Voltoge Xl :6 - Xl :8o 0.,+l- l0 Volt
VALUE OF SPS lnput resistonce 50 ko +/- 0.,.10V
OR CNC Jumper 56 open = differentiol input Sotl.wen tspqnnung

Jumper 56 closed = Xl:8q=GND
-8- UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH GrrininqerstraBe 8 D-71364 Winnenden i Stuttgart-Germany

ti
I r'*i i GmbH
ln order to tronsform o nominol vqlue 8.2.4

5 6 7 I
curreni from 0 up fo 20 mA, o resistor Rl o o NOMINAL
of 5004 hos to be connected between
VALUE
Xl:6 ond Xl:Bo, KI
CURRENT
+/- 0,.,?0r'rA
Sottwertstnorn
At connection Xl:2 o correction volue of

R?{
mox, +/- l0 Volt con be used, The inpui AUXILLARY
.l00
resistonce is kA, Using the some polo- NOMINAL
rity os X1:6 (nominol volue) the correction VALU E
volue will be odded,
Jumper SW1 pos. 2-3
To set up porollel currents in U1 I UA I

8.2.6"
I I
severol devices, the ierminols X I I
I
Xl' 1 I I
I
CURRENT
Xl rl ond Xl:B of ihe devices NOMINAL
I I
L J L J
should be connected porollel, VALUE
The moster device tokes over
the speed regulotion ond the
o
slove devices receive the
sqme nominol current, The lC V'
il P8
N2 must be removed from the

l N2
slove devices, Terminql Xl:l
must be swiiched onio the
qctuol current vqlue with the jumper SW1 (Pos, 2-3)
The current limitors con be odjusted on the potentiometers PS 8.3,

(lmox 1) ond P6 (lmox 2) between O ond 200% iype current, if CURRENT
the jumpers Sl3 ond Sl 4 ore plugged, With qn externol current- LIMITS
limiting odjustment or regulotion the jumpers Sl3 ond Sl4 must
be open,
The current limits con be odjusted ln 1Q-operotions
only P6 (lmox 1) on P6 (lmox 2),
The current limits con be set from 0 up to by using o volt-

20O Yo
oge of 0 to + l0 V oithe input X2:1O2 for thecurrent limit I ond
X2:.l03 for the llmit 2, For odJustment using externql potentlome-
ters or voltoge dividers, X2:l0l (+.l0) GND of X2:104 con be used,
This externol volue con be reduced with the potentiometer
P5(lmox1) ond P6(lmox2),
,^ -raalt^^^ l:A\/ A6ri r4ac!Aaaa c

ANALOGUE REGUI-ATION ELECTRONICS REG,3
l0 Volt X?, I01 lOe 103

=+
104
8.3.1. Output X2:l0l
CURRENT
lnput X2:102 =curfeflt limif ll, 0,,+ l0 V I
lnput X2:.l03 = culrent limit 12, 0,,+ l0 V
LIMITS USING
Output X2:104 -device ground GND p-t
-r
INTERNAL ' 'sotu
VOLTAGE Jumper Sl3 ond Sl4 ore noi plugged,
D-t t
The current llmit l1 is odjusted with the ' soLta
potentiometer P-lso1r ond the current limit

12 with the potentiometer P-lsolz.
Using 1Q-operotions only the current limit 12

(input X2:103) is octive,
lnput X2:102 = cUII€flt limit ll, 0,,+ 16 y x?' r0r r02 103 104
8.3.2.
lnput X2:103 = curreflt limit 12, 0,,+ lO V T
GND
CURRENT LIMIT Output X2:lO4 = device ground GND 0... *,0, I
FROM SPS OR lnput resistonce 50Q Stro'rsrenze 11
CNC 0... +l0V

Jumpers Sl3 ond Sl4 ore not plugged, Strongrenze I2
The current limits ore controlled by the
volioges qt X2:102 ond X2:.l03.
't
8.3.3. With on externol control current of 0,,20 X?, 102 103 104
mA for the current limit, the externol lood GND

CURRENT 500 fi
resistonces of 500 Q must be connected, I
LIMIT BY
Jumpers Sl3 ond Sl4 ore not plugged 0,.,20nA 500n
MEANS OF Strongrenze I 1
I
CURRENT
0.,.20nA
LOOP Stnomgnenze Ia
-10- UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH GrtiningerstraBe I D-71364 Winnenden / Stungart-Germany

Us'*skru GmbH
Only suppliers with o dc voltoge dependent on the directlon 8.4.

con be employed os octuol speed volue suppliers for the 4Q
ACTUAL
operotion, The best regulotion results ore ochieved wiih
a
dc tochometers, Wlth the I operotion dc tochometers os well SPEED VALUE
os 3-phose current tochometers with rectificotion con be used.
The moximum suitoble iochometer voltoge is +/- 200 Volt,
Using olternoting current tochometers with o rectifier, on odditio-
nol smoothing copocitor of 0,47 mF ist to be set up of the
tochometer input ond the monitorig of the tochometer hcs to
be switched off,
lnput ' Xl:8b = tochometer (GND) X1' 8b Xl, 9 8.4.1.

lnput Xl:9 = tochometer (signol) GND +/- ACTUAL
0a - Jumper 57, 512 plugged,
TACHOM ETER
The tochometer input Xl:9 must hove on opposi- VALUE
tionol polorlty to the nominol volue input X1:6.
The tqchometer voltoge is
odjusted with the binory swiich 59 (See chopter "Settings").

With the jumper Sll o smoothing copocitor (0,1 pF ) con be con-
nected ": '
With on ormoturevoltoge regulotion with the lxR Xt: 8b Xl' 9 8.4.2.

compensotion the ormoture volioge UA is con- ACTUAL
nected to the tochometer input Xl:8b ond Xl:9, ARMATURE
Pleose pqy ottention thot the jumpers ore os fol-
lows : OQ-bridges 57 und S12 open , jumpers
Sl,Sl0 plugged ond SWl6 in position l -2.
t-fi:
Ank".sponnunO
VOLTAGE
VALUE
.l80
The input is set for on mqximum ormoture voltoge of Volt,
With ony higher voltoge, externol resistors must be ottoched, The
volues for RAI ond RA2 ore:
27OV = 200kQ
440V = 47OkQ
550V = 6B0kQ
The leods must be protected wifh O,lA fuses directly of the po-
wer pick-up (toke-off). The leokoge current versus the protective
eorth is <l mA.
For the mounting of the externol resistors ond fuses, on odditionol
boord, EXZU-UA1, is ovoiloble,
Potentiol-free ormoture volotge control by meons of o potentlql
seporoting omplifier (OTV) con be connected like the tochome-
ter control qnd the rotory switch 59 set onto position F,
8.5.1.
READY The signol contoct (reody for operotion) is clo- r-- d3---1
sed when the internol supervision of ihe power i
SIGNAL + xe'105 + X?' 06

section does not indicote ony error, The con-
toct informs the SPS or the CNC thot the motor t 1
controller is reody for operotion.

.l25
The contocts ore loid out for V/0,5A
8.6.
X2:104 t07 108 109 liO
QUTPUT GND
SIGNALS
TIOT
Tocho-
Fehter
Uben-
tost
Stiltstond
The output signols ore wired breok-proofly, This meons, thot in

the cose of qn error the signol switches io zero ond thot it other-
wise supplies + l5 Volt, The signols con be chorged with 6 mA'
Error signols ore not memorized internolly,
8.6.1. When the tochometer is interrupted or not connected, the volt-

age oi the output X2:l07 is 0 Volt, Polority ond voltqge errors
TACHOMEIER
connot be detected. Tochometer ertors ore shown with LED 24.
ERROR
ln the cose of ormoture voltoge regulotion ond olternoting cur-
rent tochometers with q rectifier the jumper Sl6 Pos.l -2 must be
plugged, Thereby the tochometer monitoring is swiiched off'
Cqution: When using tochometer generotors with high voltoge
or high wropping induciion, the tochometer monitoring con re-
spond without thot the iochometerline ist interrupted' When this
is the cose, o copocitor with 0,.l pFl400 V hos to be built in be-
tween the terminols + ond - of the tochometer,
8.6.2, When the drive is overlooded or blocked, the output X2:.l08

switches from >+24 to 0 Volt ofter obout 5 seconds,
OVERLOAD
The overlood/overspeed is indicoted with the LED23,
With o speed of 1 "/o the output X2:l l0 switches from >+ 24 Volt
8.6.3
to 0 Volt,
STANDSTILL The stillstond is indicoted with LED 9.
-12- UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH GruningerstraBe 8 D-71364 Winnenden / Stuttgart-Germany

' i f : i; .e{ ! lndustrie Elektronik
I 1 ; ir' i i t'c<
U- i'r i i U., - GmbH
X?,104 X2'109
A speed indicotor con be connected to 8.7.1.
the plug-in terminol X2:.l09, GND +/-
SPEED
The ouiput voltoge for +l- I 00 % of speed
IN DICATOR
is +7' 5 Yo,t,
The oulput resistonce is I kQ,
Dnehzohl.
X2:104 X2:111
8.7.2.
+/- CURRENT
An indicotor for ormoture current cqn be
connected to the terminol X2:l I l, IN DICATOR
The ouipuf voltoge for +l- 2O07o type cur-
rent is +/- 5 Volt,
Ihe output resistonce is I kQ.
S tnon
orn
A .9.
SEITINGS
The nominol input con be used os o switch for the difference in- o'!
put or for ihe input omplifier with reference poinf zero, The '":' SPEED
choice is mode with the plug jumper 56,
56 plugged = input with reference point zero
(X1:Bo connected wiih X1:B GND)
56 open = difference input
Amplificotion of the input omp he difference omplifier ot X4:13,
The integrotion time of the slope limit is odjusted with the poten- ot
tiomeier Pl (lNT), When turning the poteniiometer clockwise, the
INTEGRATOR
time until the entire nominol volue is reoched of the oulput is
prolonged,
The time constont of the trimmer's onti-clockwise stop = 0..l5 s
The time consiont of the trimmer's clockwise stop = 5 5
The function of the integrotor con be meosured with the logic
enoble closed of the connector X4:14,
The nominol volue input is switched onto the speed control loop
with or withoui integroting function by plugging the jumpers
52 or 53,
52 plugged, 53 open = with integrotor
53 plugged, 52 open = without iniegrotor
When turning off the enoble, the integrotor function will be con-
celeled.
Tol nQlo -tloE,lAnnA trAY nnd.9 7-lQF|AOO9 -13-

9.3 Boih, the proportionol os well os the integrotion componenl of

PI.SETTINGS the speed control loop ore odjusted by meons of three binory
switches with eoch l6 positions ond by meons of the qmplifying
trimmer P3 (XP). With the jumper Sl5 the omplifico-
tion of the speed controller con be switched onto
1:1, (torque regulotion by using the speed controller)
By exchonging the REG boord the setting volues can
be token over,
D."hzohl."0(?r
IK
50(
Xp
D6 D7
9.3.1. Adjustment of the P-component wiih the binory switch 54.

P-COMPONENT Schqller 54 J.l
Stellung 0 I 2 3 4..5..6.7 I
R-Wert 1000 450 2W 2@ 18O 148 123 107 kn
1
Stellung 8 9AB c .D , E. F
R-Wert 90 82 73 67 64.59.55 52 kn
l: I
s15
9.3.2.
I.COMPONENT Adjustment of the l-component wiih the binory switch 55
SJ
$choller SS
Stellung 0 I 2 3 4..5..6.7 0.lqF
C-Wert 0.1 O,2 0.3 0.4 0.8 . 0.9 . 1.0 I .lpf

IPF
I 9 A B C.D.E..F
Stellung
C-Werl LI 1.2 I.3 1.4 1,8 . L9 . 2.0 2,1 vF
INTAB
9.3.3 Adjustment of the D-component with the binory switch S8
D-COMPONENT
Schqller 58
Slellung 0 1t 3 4..5.,6.7 SB
C-Wed 0 0,0470,1 0.15 0.22 0.27 AS2 O.37 t'F
)_ ?
, 0.047yF
' lo.trF
Slellung 8 9 A B C,D.E.,F __7_
C-Wed o,47 O52 0.57 0.62 0.69 O.74 0.79 0.84 FF >_
__v_
' l0.22uF
F---F--'
I O.47 uF
-1+
i i r rTlnr . i tndustrieEtektronik
i I i-ri l-lf*K
\,/i\ti"uli.'G | - m b H
The prontionol omplificotion of the speed control con be odju- 9.3,4

sted with the swiich 54 und the potentiometer P3 (Xp), AMPLIFICA-
Due io the n-odoptotion the omplificotion will be reduced when
TION
the speed increoses,
The diogroms show the following omplificotion odjustments:
Piclure 1 P-Vensttirkung
Xp
Am plificotion odjustm ent
l0
Switch 5
c( 0/,,
Q"A\'c,
(--Jttt ts 5
€,v/^q
,6gL\
0
t?3456789ABCDEF
Pieture 2
V".stil.kuneE-
nmplificotion foctor - Fxp Foktor F;p
Adjusiment with 100
ihe Xp - Potentiometer P3 90
80
70
60
40
0 30
0
?0
t0
Potr3tattun0
0 t00'/.
Picture 3
nmpliflcotion reduction
withthen-odoption Frpn
Ve.stdrkung n-Adoptron
0,9
P - Amplificotion = Xp x Fxp x Fxpn
0.s
l0Z a0 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 l00Z D..hzoH
Tel 00a9 7195/4006 FAX 0049 7195/4008 -15-

ANALOGUE REGULATION ELECTRONICS REG-S
ln order to optimise the P-omplificotion the l-component con be

9.3.4
shorted by putting the jumper SWI onio Position l-2 ond by con-
AMPLIFICA- necting the terminol Xl:l with Xl:8.
TION With on nominol volue step of obout l0% the conirol response is
meosured of X4:.|6 with the oscilloscope ond the ompllflcotion is
optimised by odjusting 54 ond P3,
Picfure4
9.4.1
The diogroms (picture 5,6,7) show the effects of the qmlificotlon
DEPICTION OF odjustments with
TFIE REGULA- swiich 54 (P-omplifikotion)
TION switch 55 (l-component)
potetiometer P3 (Xp-omplificotion foctor)
ln q siotic condition (without o motor) 0,2V is given os nominol vo-

lue. The enoble is iurned on of time 0,
The control onswer is meosured os o voltoge titXa:t s,
XP 502 ss=8 S4 =voriabel
St.ffiol{rrt 54=t 54=e
Picture 5 t0v 54 =.r
Modificotion effects 9 ; s4=8
Switch 54 P - omplificotion I
7
?
Sotlibrt: o,av
t
0 0.1 0.a 0.3 0.,1 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 lsek
XP 502 Ss=voriobet S4=4
SlMio{trrt s5:0
Picture 6 l0v s5;i S5=8
Modificqtion effects 9
SwitchSSl-component I
7
: : . '. : Sottrirt:0,?V
I - -
- -:-J.-.--:.J.-.-.:.J
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0,.1 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 ls"k
-1S, UNITEK lndustrie Elektronik GmbH Gr0ningerstraBe 8 D-71364 Winnenden / Stuttgart-Germany

tlFL :*
I i a r t I a.t E lndustrie Elektronik
M. tt i ,. i i;" l,/
rvtLli\,i'! GmbH
Picture 7 XP variobel S4=4 S5=8

Modificotion effects StronSotlrert
l0v
XP=8 XP=6
Xp - Potentiometer 9
o
7 'xP=e
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 lsek
The diogroms show thot the odjusiment of the Xp - potentiometer

P3 olters the P-omplificqtion os well os the integrol - component
drosticolly,
The effect of the ocluol '**T;

vo- S8=,.
9.4.2
componeni I
lue differentiol
D E PICIION
is meosured by meons of q 6
step function with the motor :

DIFFERENTA-
connected, TION OF IHE
Adjust swiich SB such ihot -e
Sbttrart ACTUAL
ihe drive will not overshoot -4
VALUE
-6
on receiving o.50"/o step no- -8
minol volue, -l0v
Connect the motor, nomincl volue 0, Xp -- 83o/o 9.4.3

Switch 54 = Position B ADJUSTMENT
Switch S5 = Position 4 WITHOUT
Switch S8 = Position 0
MEANS OF
Enqble the controller, turn the swich 54 counter - clockwise until
the drive overshoots. M EASU REM ENT
Turn Xp counter - clockwise until the oscillotion stops, then turn
the Xp - potentiomeier onother 2 mrkings to the left (counter -
clockwise).
Adjust switch 55 such thot the drive runs smoothly ofter two oscilo-
tion on receiving o 5Oo/o (5V) step nominol volue,
Tat oou!o 7'toE,lA,nnA trAX Ondq 71o5/4OOR -17-

9.5.1. For ihe speed regulotion with ihe octuol tochometer vqlue the 0
ACTUAL Ohm resistors S7 ond Sl2 must be present ond the jumper S10
open, Ihe tochometer signol of Xl:9 must be of on opposite
VALUE
TAC H OM EIER
polority to the octuol input Xl:6
Use the binory switch 59 for o coorse r0K
|
s9
9_
J_
odjustment ,The fine odjustment of the _9_
moximum speed of moximum nominol
)_ _-ffntFl_
P4
volue input is ochieved with the trimmer t0K
P4 (n-mox).
The iochometer signol con be smoothed 4K7
by closing the jumper Sl I with o copocitor of 0,1pF.

With olternoting current tochometers on odditioncrl smoothing
copocitor of 0,47 pF ist to be ploced of ihe iqchometer input,
Schqller 59
Einsiellung Tocho - Grobobgleich
Stellung 01234 5 6 7 I 9blsF POTISTEILUNG nmc

Tocho.
spqnnung -67403225 23 20 IB l4 t2v mln
mln 100 70 50 M t< 30 a4 t8 mlite
205 r45 97 85 70 65 55 35 mox
For speed regulotion with the ormqture voltoge os octuol volue

9.5.2. the following settings ore importont :
ACTUAL Jumper Sl,Sl0 : closed , Jumpers 57 ond 512 : open,

VALUE Jumper SWl6 on position l-2, Switch 59 : position 0.
ARMATU RE .l80
With on ormoture voltoge of greoter Volt externql resistors
VOLTAGE hove io be ottoched qt the inputs Xl:Bb ond Xl:9,
The volues ore os follows:
for 270 V = 200 kQ
for 440 V = 470 kQ
for 550 V = 680 kQ
The fine odjustment of the moximum speed with moximum

nominol volue input is ochieved with the trimme( P4 (n-mox).
The dropping of the speed lxR is compensoted by the trlmmer P2
(lxR) in such o woy, thot with low speeds ond o 50 % lood jump
the speed does not drop into idle running,
The tochometer monitoring isi disconnected by plugging in
jumpers S16.
-J R- t JNITFK lnrftrstric Flcktronik GmhH GrfininnorqtreRo R n-71 344 Winnpndpn / Sh ltlnart-(larman\/

I
lsrry
i![n.!*g,-rf,
t$I-ittFF{ lndustrie Elektronik
I \t*F/ E \t t E \-[ lr GmbH
Jumper Sl3, Sl4 must be closed, 9.6.I .

The peok current con be set sepqrotely for both current CURRENT LIMIT
dlrections with the trimmers P5 (lmoxl) ond P6 (lmox2) between
INTERNAL
0 ond 2OO7o type current. Clockwise for moximum current
By using 1Q-operotion only P6 (lmox2) ist octlve,
The jumpers Sl3 ond Sl4 hove to be open, 9.6.2.

The current limit con be set with on externol voltoge at X2:102 CURRENT LIMIT
(lmoxl) ond ot X2:103 (lmox2) mox 10V ,The externol signol con
EXTERNAL
be reduced with the internol trimmer P5 (lmox1) ond P6 (lmox2)
The torque is set ot the inputs X2:1O2 ond X2:.l03 when using o
combined speed-torque regulotion,
9.6.3
The constont current is set for both torque directions with the
.l00 CO NSTA N D
trimer P7 (lD) between 2 ond % nominl current,
The resetiing time of the current limit from peok to constoni CURRENT LIMIT
current is dependont on the previous demond of constont cur-
:..
rent, This meons, thot o long peok current time (obout 5 se-
conds) is ovoiloble when demonding little current ond thot by
employing o high constont current (80 % type current) the peok
current time is reduced down to obout I second to prevent over-
heoting
The peok current time for disc-motors con be decreosed by
foctor 5 with jumper SlB.
t^l t^ qa l, nnrn
^^ ^r -A\/ -1-Plt660
^ê
9.6.4. commutotion limit hos io be respected when using direct
The
COMMUTATION current motors with o permonent excitqtion (no field) ond iron
LIMIT core, The limiting curve of the suitoble motor current dependont
on speed, is indicoted in the doto sheets for motors
Concerning motors, the moximum torque, which corresponds to
ihe moximum current, comes up to 3 to 6 tlmes the vqlue of the
constont torque, lt is double the volue with servo-ompllflers.
Toke this mofor curve here os on
exomple, The lineor limit choroc-
teristic of the servo-ompllfier must be
3xlnenn within the motor chorocteristic. The li-
miting line for omplifiers is morked qt
2x lnenn (which corresponds to l0 V
I nenn
nominol current volue), The stroight
reduction line is then ploced tongen-
50'/- l00Z Dnehzoht tiolly to the motor chorocteristic. The
stroight line is defined os
S=V/7on
volue S = V eurrent chonge /
Rlta
ltol
.B Ste{hcrt
, % t:era.ue chonge
!a
E
The volues for the exomple given
ore
tr
insertion point = 50 %
OJ d5 tra speed slope = 6/50 = 0,.l2 Yl"/on
-< s (v/z^)
The option commutotion limit is set

.l2,
with the resistonces Rl I I ond Rl At first the resistonce Rl l2
for the slope is fixed, then ihe resistonce Rl I I for the insertion
point is derivoted,
Exomple: Rl 12 = 220 kA
Rill =8,2ko
I The odjustment con be controlled
Rll rl
lko rl Einsotzpunkt by introducing o direct current volt-
t5
ta
l3
oge which corresponds to the
lt tochometer voltoge of the tocho-
t0
9 meter input ond by meosuring the
I
I reduction of the nominol current vo-
6
a
3
lue ot X4:.l5 (10 V = 2x lnenn),
?
I
The volues ore good for o nominql
0 t0 e0 30 {0 !0 60 70 g0 90 r00 h vqlue of l0 V,
-)n- llNlTtrK lndrretrio Flalzlrnnilz GmFrU lAriiniaaara+raD ^ o - h ?{ 44, l^n;6^-i^^ , Oa..s--r A --- ---
G H J
X1 svt X3
I +24V 1.?
9 9
?
xa'Le
?4V X4rll Frergo be +10v
3 Ot+ Frelgobe 3,4
Sotlw Regter (F-RVU)
Fre;gobe A c
4 Zet+
X4t34 I
I x4rle rT D4 S4
+lOV
e
rr
D1
lt I-lstrert
-E\
-G< JF-
GNI) 9...14
!ifferenz- X4'13 X4'14 ?? _Ej

6 v?Btfrkr x419.10
-I -lov s2
7
Ed
ot
V A IxR
P9
s1
Drehzohtregter P3
-?4V 5.6
7
Xp
JJ 0ffset x,t,5,6
s6 -l0v
f
Sol[wert
X4r!5 7,8
S7 <oo+ruct<a) A
XP<n> INV
X4'7,8
gb
-tF >lEV F
17 6
UA RVU
9
I X4'16
D-Ant?tl
Istr?Ft Stnongrenze
+/-l0V Stronsothert
l5
n nox D6 T7 6Ni)
r
Tochoteiten +10v
s11 RVU RVU l--€ l5
s1 s9 P4
sl4 Spitzenstron /
(0 I
Dquprstnon sP-l--ro re
"qxt P7 5
E
XE sv16
Tlcho-[berrochuq { L
sPE-----e
lol o-:l!)a- a x4'18 P5 -- ID 19
I x4r?l uPl----o
+10v as
l0a
extern s]3 ure*-o aq
t^ BTB 1
4
103
{
104 o-----{ Drehzoh[ xtl'19 p6 3TB
a5
De6
105 o.r \
106 J Tocho-
BTB x4,?3
D?4 X4,23 R!12

X4:aj
107 Konnutterungsgrenze
De3
108
TACHD
\/
Obertost 0bertost
?0
e
109
?r
Drehzohl D9 lstxPrt
\
110
Strtlstond
/ xaQ? ht*ffi RG-S318
Stittstond t{ ltwaGt ta !t193lan
ul O.lX
Stnon
Blockschqltbild
ProJekl
X,lP0 REG3
WICHTIGER HINWEIS FiiR DiE BESTELLUNG VON ERSATZTEILEN
Um evtl . Riicksprachen bei der Bestellung von Ersatzteil.en zu vermeiden, solite
Ihr Bestellschein unbedingt folgende Angaben enthalten:
1. Maschinent5Pe
2. Maschi:rennummer.
3. Posiiions-Nummer der -Ersatzteile
Maschinent5pe und it{aschinennummer sind dem Tlpenschild an der Maschine zu
enbrehmen
Die positionsnummer ist der Ersatzteilliste zu enbnehmen, wobei jeweils die gan-
ze ZeiIe des Textblattes aufgefiihrt sein sollte.
Zum BeisPiel: TyPe: RAS 68.35
Masch. -Nr.: 109/4
Pos. -Nr.: 104; 1 Stck.Verstellspindel; 004 699; oder
Pos.-Nr.: 108;2 Stck.Zyi.-Schraube; 005 064; M 8x30 DIN 912
Teiie die in der Ersatzteilliste mit sf,richpunktierter Linie eingerahmt und mit ei-
ner Pos.-Nr. versehen sind., k$nnen nur kompletto also i:r zusammengebautem Zu-
stand, nachgeliefert werden.
Bei Motoren bitte wie im unten angefiihrten Beispiel, Leistung und Daten des TSpen-
schildes vom Motor angeben.
Zum Beispiel: T5p: D 2 A 63/309 K, Motor Nr. 297854
IflI/ 3, 0;220/280 V; 50 Hz; n1 = 930; n2 = 39,5; A 9,7/5,6
WICHTiG FiiR AUSLANDISCHE BESTE LLER
AuslZindische Besteller bitlen wlr, die ZeIIen hinter den Pos.-Nr' jeweils, wie in
der Ersatzteilliste aufgefiihrt, i]} deutscher sprache anzugebqrl- !.
t,.
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR ORDERING SPARE PARTS
To eliminate repeated inquiries when ordering spare parts' your order sheet
should definitely contaia the foliorving data:
1. I\{achine TlPe
2. Machine Number
3. Item Nuinber of sPare Parts
Machine type and machine number are shown on t5pe plate of machine
.Ihe item number is shown in the spare parts list; the complete hrre of the resp.
sheet should be q\roted.
For example: TSPe: RAS 68.35
Machine Nr.: 109/4
Item Nr.: L04; 1 each Verstelispindel; 004 699 or
Item Nr.: 108; 2 eaeh Zy\.-Schraube ; 005 064; M 8x30 DIN 9].2
Parts which are shown in the spare parts list rvith a dot-and-dash line and have
only one item number can be delivered only complete, that is, i:r assembled con-
dition.
of rating piate
I\[otors should be ordered as shouryr belorv. State output and data
of motor.
For example: Tlpe: D 2 A 63/309 K, Motor Nr'29'1854
3,0;22Q/28trV;50e/s;n1=930;nr=39,5;A9'7/5'6
I]\IPORTANT FOR CUSTO]\{ERS FROI\{ ABROAD
enough and write ihe
Customers in foreign counfries are requested to be kind
lines behind the item number in the German language, as
printed in the spare parts
iist
I
4
I
I
DIRE CTiVES IMPORTANTES POUN CO]\,1]\,IAME DE PIE DE RE E
pieces de rechange' nous

Afin d,dviLer des dchanges de consul.tation €t,ennrels lor.s de la conrmande de
sur votre bon de com-
vous saurions 916 de bien vouloir n:eniionner sans fau'ue les indieations suivanf,es
mande:
1. T\pe de machine
2. \a de ia n:achine
3. No -r€pertoire des pi0ces de rechange
peuvent 6f,re repris A la plaque fixde sur
Le tJpe de machine, de meme que le num€ro de ia machine,
la machine,
en vous priant de mentionner
Le numdro-repertoire peut 6tre repris A la liste des piOces de rechange'
1a ligne comPldte du texte
P. ex. : TlPe: RAS 6 8. 35
No de machine: roe/4
f - r6p.: . 104; 1 Stck Verstellspindel; 004 699; ou
llo - rdp. : 108; 2 Stck Zyl. -Scbraube; 005 064; M 8 x 30 DIN 912
encadr6es d' une ligne pointillde et qui pos -
Les pieces qui, dans Ia liste des pidces de rechange, sont qu' a I'6tat complet, c'i d' as-
sgdentun num€ro-rdpertoire, ne peuvent 6tre fournies ultdrieurement
sembl6es comPl€tement.
que monf,r€ A 1'exemple Suivanto la
En ce qui concerne les moteurs, nous vous prions d'indiquer, tei
puissance et les donndes lecb:riques figurant sur Ia plaque de moteur.
P; €x. : Tlpe t D 2 A 63/309 K, Motor Nr'297854
Kf[ 3, 0;220/380 V; 50 Hz; nI=930; n2=39,5i A 9'7/5'6
IMTPORTA NT POUR LES CUENTS A L 'ETRANGER
Nous prions les clients €tra:rgers de bien vouloir toujours mentionner
le texte derri€re les num€ros-
pi€ces de rechange!
rdpertoire en langue allemande, tel qu', indiqud dans la liste des
r ;r!" t'."
'
U RVACIONES II\{POR A}ITES PARA EL P DE REPUE
A fin de evitar preguntas de lrrelta aI hacer pedidos de repuestos,

dar en la hoja de pedidos los datos
sigrientes:
1. Tipo de la mdquina
2. Nrimero de ia m6quina
3. Nrimero de posicion del repuesto (en ia iista)
Eltipoyelnrimerodelamdquinapuedenserleidosenlaplacadeltipo'
EI nrimero de posici6n puede ser tomado de la iista de repuestos, para 6sto, escribir
la linea completa
de Ia hoja del texto.
Por ejemplo:
Tipo RAS 68. 35
No. de mdguina: 10e/4
No. de pos:ci6n: 104; 1 Stck. VerstetlsPi-ndel; 004 699;
No, de posici6n: 108; 2 Stck. ZYl.-Schraube; 005 064;
M8x30DIN912
puntos y rayas' y estdn dadas
Las piezas de Ia lista de repuestos que est6n rodeadas por una linea de
por un No. de posici6n, solamente pueden ser suministradas como juego completo, es decir ya monta-
das.
A1 pedir motores dar Ia potencia y Ios datos de la placa de tipo, como en el ejemplo de abajo'
Por ejemplor
Tipo D 2 A 63/309K, It{otor-No. 297854
K\/ 3,0;220/28A V; 50 Hz; n, = 930 rpm; i12= 35,5 rpm;
A 9,7/5,6
IMPORT ANTE PARA CLiE }IIIES EXTRANJE ROS:
posici6n, igual
A los clientes extranjeros se ies ruega escribir en Alemdn Ia linea despuds del No. de
que como estd escrito en la lista de repuestos.
HAS
Spane pants list
REI NHABDT
MASCH I NENBAU
GMBH
RAS 74 20-25-30 -40 :
MULTI BEND 2000

MULTI BEND 9000
consisting of
basic machine
pictune pnesentation p dge 12
listing p age 2t 35
speci al equipment
pi cture pnesentat i on p age I lu

listing pa9e 36 47
Spane pants lists o Folding machine a
US - execut.ion
pa9e
7 4 .20-40 GHUNDMASCHINE: Oberwange, Untenwange und Bi egerlange

of pagE
07.07.94 Schmit 47
I
ilvI o
o I
I
0! I
--=_**.-*?
I l
{
\
il
rl l,{
)
6
7u
\
I
-J
Spare pants iists
a Folding machine o
rl
US - executi on GHUNDMASCHINE. Seitentei I links:
D age
L
7 4 .?0- 40 Antriebseinheil und Messen & Schalten of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
J I
0
a Fo 1d i ng mach i ne a
Spare parts iists
US - execution GBUNOMASCHINE: Sei tentei I nechts
page
3
7 4 .20-40 Messen & Schalten
of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
"J
rl
I
I
a
T.*
0 -
I
Spane pants lists
a Folding machine a
US - execution GHUNDMASCHINE: Travense kpl ., Tank kpl. und 0 dge

4
7 4 .20-40 SeiLenteil nechLs und links of
07.07.94 Schlnit
oage
47
-
a
-
rr
Xrr
-\
'.->
G
0
Y.,
SBane pants Iists a Folding machtne a
US - execution 0aqe
5
7 4 .20- 40 GHUNDMASCHINE: Abdeckungen und Seitentejle
of oage
07.07.94 Schll|it 47
0
I
4 0
a Fo ld i ng mach i ne a
Spare parts lists
! age
US - execution 6
7 4 .20-40 GHUNDMASCHINE: Untenwange und Unterwangenvenstellung kp1
of page
07.07.94 Schlnit 47
t__
-----{--
I
Spare pants lists
o Folding machine a
US - execution
7 4 .20- 40
GRUNDMASCHINE. 0benwange:
Tonsionstnieb, Seitenfuehnung und Hydnaulikzylinden
page
l
ot page
07.07.94 Schnit 47
74.40
Spare pants lists
o Fo ldi ng mach i ne a
US - execution
p age
B
7 4 .20- 40 GflUNDMASCHINE: Bi egewange und Antr i eb Bi egellange
of
t1
.,,. 07 . 07 . 94 Schn i t
oage
4t
t 9000
-l
00
L 00
___ I
I
__l
ti
Spare parts lists a lro ld ing rndch i ne o
US - execution GRUNDMASCHINE UND ZUSATZEiNRICIITUNG: MULTIBEND

p dge
I
7 4 .20-40 SeilenLei l jinks mil tlydnaulik
2OOO
of page
07.07.94 Schllli t 47
I f-
6
r
--J
f--.-
....------.-.-*-
J
i
_t
It '',.'.
"3
parts lists a Fo 1d j ng rndch i ne o
Spare
US - execution 0 age
7 4 20-40
GRUNOMASCHiNE UNO ZUSATZEiNHICHIUNG: MULTIBENO 9OOO
Seitenteil links mit Hydnaulik
of page
1 0
07.07,94 Schmit 47
I
-LlL--a
It
.:J
@
g)
_-___J
{}!
parts lists t Foldi ng tnachi ne e
Spare
US - execution GRUNDMASCHINE UND ZUSATZEINRICI.ITUNG: MULTIBEND 2OOO / gOOO
pdge
t1
7 4 .20-40 I
Sei tente i nechts mi L l.lydlaul ik
of paqe
07,07.94 Schmit 47
9i'.,-(i
-1
1..
I
I
-'t
I
i_l
lL
ll
i
L-----
a Foldi ng machi ne o
SpQre pants Iists
US - execution
page
T2
7 4 .20-40 GFUNDMASCHINE: Obenwangenhalt 0-12mm
of page
07.07.94 Schltlit 47
=}6
\: I
\
\-
Spare parts lists
US - execution ZUSATZEINBICHTUNG. MULTIBEND 2OOO / 9OOO:

page
13
7 4 .20-40 Bedienkasten mit Galgen und Fuss-SchalLen of 0age
07.07.94 Schmit 41
2000 9000
oo DO o
on ao o0 oa o
oDo
DoD
seoO
a Foldrng machine a
SpOre parts lists
US - execution ZUSATZEINRICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2OOO / 9OOO
page
T4
7 4 .20-40 Fahneinheit: Antnieb und Messen kpl. of page
07.07.94 Schlllit 47
-t
lists
C Folding ntachine a
Spare pants
-
p a9e
US execution ZUSATZEINRiCHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2000 / 8001: 15
7 4 .20-40 Fahnej nhei t. Fuehnung kpl . und Endtasten-Anschlag kpl of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
.e'
P €
4O 6 e
.g 0 6
p
),
,@
tl
,?z
'd
S0are parts ljsts
a Foldjng rltachine o
US - executron ZUSATZEiNRJCHTUNG: MULTIBEND 20OO BOOl: /

p age
16
7 4 .20-40 Rahmen kp1., Abstuetzung kpl. und Anschlagtnaegen kpl of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
l,i
ll
l,'l
I
I u,
_-
I
\,, ll
Y
(
o Y
t
a Fo 1d i ng mach i ne o
Spane parts lists
US - execution ZUSATZEINBICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2000 / BOCl
I age
1 7
7 4 .20- 40 Anschlageinheit und Iischbleche kpl. of
E 07.07.94 Schmit
oage
47
r r),.
rxil
I
L
(
a Folding mach i ne a
SDone pants lists
US - execution ZUSATZEiNRICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2OOO / 9OOO:
0 age
1B
7 4 .20-40 Untenwangen-Venstel iunq motori sch
of page
07.07.94 Schlnit 41
9000 2000
'I i.^:
ri
;
-R,
lists
o Folding machine o
Spare pants
-
p
US executron ZUSATZEINRICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2O()O / 9OOO

age
t9
7 4 .?0- 40 0berwangenhalt 25mm of
07.07.94 SchlI|it
oage
47
MULIIBEND 2OOO MULTIBEND 9OOO
,9 B
P
Spane parts lists a Folding tnachine a
US - execution ZUSATZE]NRiCHTUNG: MULTIBENO 9OOO

page
20
7 4 .20-40 Messeinnichtung Obenwange links (und rechts)
of paqe
'u
E'
o Fo ld i ng mach i ne o
Spane par.ts I ists
r\A
- execution
p age
(I
US
7 4 20-40 GffUNDMASCHINE:
0benwanqe kpl . und Torsj onstni eb of page
47
1,:. 07.07.94 Schlllit
oant's numben / number of pieces

Pos denomi nati on paqe
7 4 .20-40 14.20 7 4.25 74 3A 74.40
OBFRWANGF KPI .
1 flhprvannp 60 177 1AA / 1 1?7 AE7 / 1 131 ?89 / I '133 506 / 1
( nhpruannp 4q' ) ,t?/ 000 / I t?.a nla / I t1? A6t / 1 1?t oo7 / 1
? S(.harfschi Pnp {5 n07 26q / 1 00'7 55A / 1 r31 390 / I 083 76r / t
3 7vl Schnaube M10x30 DIN 912 I 001 104 / 1
A Halfpnlattp ,t1r rR? / 1 ti,t 1R3 / 4 r31 t8i / 5 r3t 183 / 5

7vl Schnarrhe M12x35 niN S12 000 5?1 / 6 000 53t / R 000 531 / 10 000 531 / 10
5 Cleitnlatte I 1:'1 lal / a
Senkschnaube M6x16 DIN 7Sg1 001 0q0 / 32

6 I aoernfanne 1 1?1 11A I 2
TNRSiNNSTRTFB
t0 Torsionswelle 1 133 146 / | 1?A 2Rq / I l?1 266 I 1 1?1 E07 / 1
1'1 nll-Bilnhse M85040 7 oal ?a0 I 4

1? lnlenps.hPihP 50r79 7 n7q F66 / 2
l1 St ilFt Tsnhe i he 50xix62 7 10? 02? / 6
IA Ke t te nrad 7 131 ?67 I I
15 Gp,rindPctif i AMgx'16 nTN q14 7 n02 511 / 1
KeoPlst i ft
10x50 DiN 7978 00a F,87 / ?
'16 Bo I zen 7 nI tffi/ 2
( Rn lTpn nU 45' ) 172e2 / ?
17 Sichenunosnino 40x1. 75 DIN 471 7 001 ?19 / 2
IR Qrhp i hp 7 n1 |rc/ 2
Scnkschrarrbe M5xl6 DIN 7991 134 843 / 6
ts UtJ-Buchse M84050 7 a54 964 I ?
,n Kpttpnned 5/R" 7 171 l?7 I 2
?l Tuost anoc ' 7 1i| 12A I 4
?? Kett ensDannet 7 131 I 4

21 Qkt Mrrtipn Ml2 nlN A?4 7 2a-7 I
oon '?? 12
2A qchp i hP 'l 1 nlN 7i4q 7 0R6 77q / r'
2a R-KpttF 5/8" 3-fach 7 062 AAA / 7

Spane parts lists a Foidlng machtne a
US - execution GRUNDMASCHiNE:
p age
??
7 4 .20-40 Tonsionstnieb, Seitenfuehrung und UntensLuetzung Torsionswelle
of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
part's numben / numben of pieces
Pos denomi nat i on 0age
7 4 .20-40 74.20 74.25 74 3A 74.40

Steckolied fuen R-Kette 5/8" 3-fach 06? 845 / 4
26 7 111 127 I 7.
Tel lenfeden 40x20. 4x2. 5 7 061 861 I ?2
2B Nutmutter M20x1.5 0IN 1804 7 000 8q1 / 4
2q Scha I to latte 7 13t 1?5 I ?
10 Srhaltsi i ft 7 131 1?1 / ?
3t Skt Mutten MB DTN q34 7 000 0?1 / 2
3? Endlaster 3SE3 120-00 7 10q 70q I 2
/vl SrhnarrhP Mhxr'O niN q12 0BB 811 / 4
SFl TFNFI IFHHI ING 111 A7q I 1
/0 Halfpn 7 131 120/ 1
AI Skt.Schnaube M12x70 DTN q31 7 n02 6q8 / 2

47 FPrlpnnino A12 nTN 127 7 nnl 117 / )
A? Krrnvennnl iP 12x30 7 0a? ?ea I 1
44 Stuetzschei be {2xtHxl. 2 7 (taq 1a7 / I

A5 FPdennino A12 nTN 127 7 oor rr? / 1
46 Skt.Mutter Ml2rl. DIN 9345 7 oao 4R1 I 1
47 Fuehnunosleiste 7 131 1,7 / I

AN Skt.Schnaube M12x70 01N 931 7 002 698 / 2
r'q Fidennino Al2 nIN 127 7 001 ,H3 / 2
50 Gexi ndetloiTPn 7 111 76A I 2
6,1 Nutrnutten M30x1.5 DiN 1804 7 005 760 / 2
UNTEHSTUETZUNE TOHSIONSI{FI I E
60 tlpl lpnqtrrptzp 1 rjiqrl/ ,l
(UPllPnc{ilPl7F nU 45') 133 937 / t

6J Gleitstreifen 7 t?? qtd / r
(GlpilqlrFifpn nU 4q') t?l q?6 / I
PDn-B1 i nrin i Pt -i. 2 061 645 / 2
Senkschnaube MBx30 nTN 7991 000 4BB / 2
Srhp i hp \7? ql? I 2
o Fo ld i ng mach i ne a
Spare parts lists
US - execution GBUNDI'4ASCHiNE:
D age
23
7 4 .20-40 Knanaufhaengung und Untenwange Anbau of page
"T 07.07,94 Schmit 47
oant's number / number of pieces
Pos denomi nati on page
7 4 .24-40 7 4.20 7 4.25 74.30 74.40
KQANAIIFI.{AFNGI ING
70 Knanhakpn kol. links 1 15? 111 I 1
( llrenhaLpn kn I I inks nU 45' ) 1\2 AFq / 1
71 Kranhaken kol nechts

,I
157 3r? I I
(knanhakpn knl rp.hlq nU 45') 162 A6A / I
7? 7h, i schen I ao P 1 155 A?' / ?
73 Skt Schnaube M20x50 OiN S33 '| 157 777 / I
Venschluss-Stoofen 152 786 / B
IINTFRI{ANGF ANBAII
80 llntpnHannp 1 111 rr'q / I 13i 5R5 / 1 131 306 / I r?1 nio / r
R1 Fprrhrrrnosfcdpn t?1 ?81/ ?

Qnannhrrplqp 8y50 nIN'14R1 oo2 FAA / 2
n2 Gl Pitstrei fen vonne 1 171 A80 / ?
R? nlpilclnpifpn hintcn 1 I
i?'t asi 2
atie
FrrPhnilnosnl 1 fit17ql ?
R5 skt SrhnauhP U16x70 nTN 931 005 7i1 / 4
H6 Fedennino A16 DIN 127 1 000 464 / 4

B7 Di st6nzbuchse 1 \11 2A:r / 4
BR (rrl i ssFnklntT I llt / a
?ga
Rq Skt Schraube M24x120 DiN S31 I 0s9 688 / 4
90 Fpdpnr i nn A2y' nTN I 27 I oao ,17 / t
qt (ka1a Tnll 5 15{ q1q / 1
q2 Nnni us nechts Tnl l 5 154 918 I I

Flachkonfschnaube M4xB DIN 85 o72 1q\ / )
q? Bl,PoP I 5 111 834 / 1
Ski.Schnaube MBx16 DIN 933 000 279 I 2

Fedennino AB DIN 127 ooo 61R / 2
Skt Snhnarrhp Ml0170 nIN C31 {Tnansnortsicheruno) 000 785 / I
Scheibe {0.5 DIN 7343 (Transoortsichenuno} on6 77A I I
Spane parts ljsts a Folding machine a
US - execution GHUNDMASCHINE:
p dge
?4
7 4 .20-40 Unterwangenauflage Und Unterwangenvenstellung
paqe -1
07.07.94 Schmit of A-lI
pant's number / numben of pieces
Pos denomi nat i on page
74.20-40 7 4.20 74.25 74.30 7 4.40

UNTERliANGENAUFL AGF
t00 Getei lte Untenwanoenauf laoe 17a oa\ / , 134 08A I I l:il rqn / r t?1 q2q / I
tnt K I emmstreck I 171 17t I 21 t3t 177 / ?4 131 177 I 27 111 177 / 1r
tn2 131 178 / ?1 131 178 / 24 131 178 I ?7 t3r 17R / 1r
t03 Zyl.Schnaube MBx20 oIN S12 001 a42 / 2l 001 At? I ?a oo1 a12 / ?7 olt at? / 1t
UNT ERl'lANGENVEFS TELLUN6

il0 Stel lilel le 6 121 / t 134 291 / r 131 27q I I 11?. 612 I t
,t'fi
Ri llenkuoel laoen 30x52 040 635 / 2 '\)
l1? Stuetzscheibe 50x3x62 h 102 022 I 2
It3 Sichenunosnino 52x2 oTN {72 6 a40 634 / ?
114 Stuetzscheibe 30x2. 5x42 6 047 0?7 / 6
r15 SichPnrJnosnino 30xl 5 nTN r'7{ 6 000 436 / 4
{JR Keoelnad M=5 Z=18 6 111 1?6 I A
ll7 Passfeden ABx7x36 nTN 6RBF 000 435 / 4
t1R t aufnino 35 niN 2209 h 000 Rn2 / 2
ilq Universal-Ratsche 6 136 780 I I
l?0 ntl-Brrchse M83530 6 0F? q6/ / ,
l2t Axialnol lenlaoen 35x62 6 1?'1 177 I ?
l)2 Venstellsoindel links 6 nl ?ao/ 1
127 Venstellsoindel nechts 6 131 ?81 / I

I?A Soindelmutten links 6 131 ?78 / I
{25 Soindelmutter rechts 6 131 28? / I
,t
26 Gewindesti ft AM12x40 niN q!4 6 oo\ a76 / a
127 Skt.Mutter M12 DiN 934 6 lao ?a7 / a
l?g Flansch l aoen 6 111 193 I 1
r2q Zvl.Schnaube M10x30 DIN 912 6 oo1 \0a I 2

t30 Fedennino Al0 UIN {27 F ooo aqq I 2
l:ll 0istanzbuchse 6 10? 43A I 2
132 Ra tsc henven I aenoeruno 6 112.70? I 1
tr:i
parts lists
o Fo ld i ng rndch i ne o
Spare
1tr
US - execution GRUNDMASCHINE:
0age
LJ
7 4 .20-40 Biegewange kpl. und Antnieb Biegewange of page
"n- 07.07 .94 Schmi t 47
pant's nurnben / numben of pieces
Pos denomi nati on paqe
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 7 4.25 74.30 74.40
BTFGFWANGE KFL.
t50 Ri pnp}lAnop I 11q AOl / I 1/3 5ql / I 134 041 / I 137 5S6 / 1
,t6.t Ripnacrhipnp ?0 aa? a77 / | $2C?n/ t r?1 /00 / J {32 q3q / I

Tvl.Schnaube M12x35 0IN 6912 006 2{4 / 5 onF' 2,a / 6 006 21A / 7 006 21d / q
l^2 Skala 7n1l ?/7 ,an qlq / 2

t53 Nonius links Zoil 154 q17 I 1
Nonius rechts Zol I r54 Cr8 / I

r5d nistanTklntT 1?l A1\ I 2
Flachkoofschnaube M4x20 DIN 85 00? 187 I a
qnhFihPdl nTN714q 134 845 / 4
r55 Frrehntrnosh uchse I 111 211 I ?
156 Fuehnunosschei be I 131 270 / ?
l\7 7vl Snhnarrhe M16x80 nIN St2 ,1
oo2 qnl
I 2
SchutThlech Iinks 13a 770 / I
'171 I
thB srhlrtThlpch rPchtc 1 11A 1
Scnkschnaube Mbxl2 nIN 7991 003 657 / 4
ANTRIEB BIEGEI{ANGE
t70 tlpllP R r33 r6q / 'l 134 293 / | 171 t72 I I t11 5,t8 / I
tl1 La oerboc k I ,?2 57A / ? ti? 574 / 3 1i7 574 / 4 13? 574 / 5
FPrlPnnino 6 nTN 7q80 001 663 / 6 onr 661 / n n01 66i / R /
nor 66? 10
7v'l Schnaube MGx25 DIN S12 002 855 / 6 002 855 / 6 002 855 / I 002 855 / 10
t72 Mnlnnvinkpl H |?1 ,166 / ,l
Sr:hpiheBS4ST UiN125 000 683 / 3

Zvl.Schraube l,16x12 DIN 912 001 124 I 3
tl-Mnfnn 0 2l K|{ I r53 Bqo / ,t
174 qPnkc.hnarrhP M5x'12 niN Tgql I no1 alq / a
175 Tahnni emenschei be Z=15 n 1?,t t?l / I

,t7F Ri nosnannp I pmpni I 1?4 t6? I 1
a Fo idi ng mach i ne o
Spane parts iists
US - execution GHUNDMASCHINE: D age
26
7 4 .20-40 Antnieb Biegewange
07.07.94 Schlllit of page
4l
Pos denoni nat i on Ddqe
7 4 .20-40 74.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

177 Soann deck e l I 111 l7l I ,l
t7F Federrina A5 DIN 127 I oo5 6d6 / 4

17q Skt.Schnaube M5x20 nTN 933 I 1Aa 6t1 / A
180 Zahnrielnennad Z=48 I 13r 168 / 1
,tBt
I 1?'1 17? / 2
Soannhuelse 2.5x16 DIN 148l 114 467 / a
182 Schneckenwe 1 1 e R 131 174 I ?
tR? Schraeokuoellaoer 10x30 I 111 16? / r'
{8/ 0istanzrinq n 131 175 I A
t85 Passfeden A3x3x25 nIN 6R85 R 131 160 / 2
186 Schnec ke R 171 161 I )
r87 Zahnniemen T=5 I n2?a1 / I
t88 Gehaeuse g 171 116 / 2
tRq Fedencino AB nTN 127 n 000 618 / B
rqn Zvl.Schnaube MBx25 DIN S12 I 000 ?q5 / R
rqt Sichenunosnino 30xl 2 nTN 172 R 10a n26 I A
1q2 V€nstel lmlltter n 131 110 I ?
lc3 Buechse I 1\tnq/ ?
tq/ AxiaI-Scheibe AS5070 I o7a tla / )
tqq Axi al-Zvl i nderrollen-Laoer B1110TN I 111 00? / ?
tq6 Spezial-Tellenfeden R t32 731 / 36
Netzanschlrtssdose 050 223 / 1
tqi Fuehrunos s t anoe H 171 11A I )

r98 Schmienkonf 6 DIN 3402 R oln t6a / ?
Klenlllblech 137 144 I ?
Linsenschraube M4x1? DTN 7q85 aoo 77q I 6
Skt.Mutter M5 DIN 934 001 973 / 4
Spare parts lists a Folding machine a
US - execution GHUNDMASCHINE: 0 age

?7
7 4 .20- 40 Traverse kpl. und Sei tentei I rechts kpl
of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
pant's numben / number of pieces
7 4 .20-40 74.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

TRAVERSE KPL.
?lo
2,t0
TP av er se 4 153 986 / I 153 777 / I 153 987 / r t53 CBq / ,l
74.40: 4-Meter-Anschlao
Tn av er se 4 thl qRR / I 74.40: 3-Mctpn-Anschlen
?11 Soannhuelse 12x32 leicht DIN 7346 A 106 890 / 4
212 Scheibe B 10,5 ST DIN 125 4 000 n?8 / 4
2t1 Zv I . Schraube M10x55 0IN 912 A 007 533 / 4
214 Abdeckblech A 153 9S0 / I 153 75q / 1 153 9Sl / I 153 Sg3 / I 7{.40: 4-l'leten-Anschlao
2r5 Abdeckblech A 155 3qt / I 155 ?q7 / I 74. 40: A-Me,lP,n-Anschlao
?14 Abdeckblech 4 153 CC2 / r 74.40: 3-Meter-Anschlao
2J5 Abdeckblech t65 ?qr' /
A I 74.40: 3-Metpn-Anschlen
Zyl.Schnaube M6x30 DIN S12 iol 7?q I 2 001 729 / ? ool 7?q I 7 001 7?s / 4 74.40: 4-Meten-Anschlao
Zvl.Schnaube M6x30 DIN s12 ool ]?q / q
74.40: 3-Meter-Anschlao
Zyl.Schnaube t48x20 DIN 912 001 /
4l? a
Scheibe B 8.4 ST nIN 125 000 656 / 4
Zvl.Schraube Mbx10 0IN 912 001 467 / ? o01 467 / 2 oo1 aF.7 I \ 001 467 / 5
Scheibe B 6. d ST nTN 125 000 6F? / 2 000 683 / 2 000 6Rl / 5 00n 6R? / 5
SEITENIEIL RECHTS
210 tentei I rechts
Sei j 1?'1 2AO / 1
211 Gerindesti ft M16x55 0IN s15 i 1?2 880 / ?

?3? Skt.Mutter I|416 DIN 934 i 000 2?2 / 2
27? Zvl inderrolleniaqen zrei nei hi q 3 t31 ,106 / r
2?A Zvli ndernol lenlaoen ei nreihio 3 131 107 / 1
27\ Sichenunqsninq 140x4 OIN 472 3 046 7?q / I
2?6 Di stanzri no 3 162 560 / 1
277 Di stanzni no ? 171 27? / 1
238 Halteri nq 1 111 21?' I 1
2?q Senkschnaube M6x20 DTN 7991 3 000 387 I 4

2AO 0-Rino 115x3 j 00q 1dff / I
Spane pants lists
a Folding machine a
p dge
2B
7 4 .20-40 SeitenLeil nechts kp1. und Seilenteil ijnks kp1
of page
07.07.94 Schnit 47
Fant's number / numben of pieces
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.25 7 4.30 74.40

241 Bipoeranopnuellp ? 131 tt3 / 1
?42 Halipn 1 nt I
2q1 ,l
2A7 Ge}tindesti ft
AM12x40 0TN 914 j 005 r'75 / r
Gleitstrei fen 11' 22a I 2

VPnsch I rssrlpckF I 1?1 011 / 3
?44 I ni ste 5 131 220 / I
Scheibe B 8.4 ST DIN C02t lao 032 / a
ScheibeE4 nINT3dq oa6 77-t / 12
Skt.Schnaube MBx30 DiN 933 001 060 / d
SEITENTEIL LINKS
250 SPitPntPil links 7 111 zq1 I 1
251 GeHinrlesti ft M16 nTN q34 ? 172 RRO I 2

?5? Skt MutteP M16 DTN q34 ? 000 ?72 I 2
2q? Zvlindenrollenlaoer ? r31 106 / 1
25A 7vI i ndPnnn'l lpn laopn 2 1?1 1o7 / 1
2qq Sichenunosnino 140x4 nTN 472 7 046 7?9 I t

2\ Ili qianzni nn ? 162 660 / r
?57 ni stanTni no ? 131 ?77 / 1
25R Hal tpni nn 2 1?l 27? I 1 .;1
259 Senkschnaube M5x20 nTN 7991 ? 000 387 / 4

280 n-Ri no 1 l5x1 009 348 / 1
26r Bi eopwanocnwpl lc ? 171 111 / ,l
?6? Ha I ten 111 ?7I 1
2h3 Gewinrlesti ft AM12x/0 nTN ql4 ? 00E 476 / I

Glei tstnei fen 111 ??1 I ?
Ve rsc h I us sdec ke I 1?t 071 I 1
26A q ,a7 a72 / I
7vl.SrhPaube MEx'10 nTN 912 001 a67 / 2
Sr:hPihP A 6 4 St-7n nTN 125 006 88? / 2
Spare parts lists
p age
29
7 4 .20- 40 Messen & Schaiten of page
t 07.07.94 Schmit 47
7 4 .20-40 7 4.24 7 4.25 74.30 74.40
MFSSFN IINN SNHAI TFN

280 6ehen-Kuoo I uno 1 I
171 77F' 1
skt Schnarrbe M{x'16 nTN q33 oqq a7a / ?

Fedennino A4 oIN 127 001 665 / 3
Geriindestift AM4xt6 DiN 914 10a qe1 / 2
2At l mnu l sophpn 3 131 489/ I
Flachkoofschraube M3xB niN 85 r11 552 / i
Skf Mrrffpn M? 7N nTN 7 040 d56 / 3
?8? Kl emmsche i be 1 t?'t 277 / 6
283 Dr ehlnolnen tens tuet z e
j 111 276 / 1
2AA 7vl Stift

l0m6x40 nfN 7 1 000 5|1 / 1
Fndtasten 3SE3 120 lD 0R6 /

qqs 2
7vl SrhnnrhP MEx40 nTN q12 088 811 / 4
7vl schnarrhP MAx20 nTN q12 oo1 zqq I a
FpdAnnino A6 nTN 127 oo0 1?9 / 4
2F5 Gpl,ti ndcbnlTen ? 13{ h?1 / 1
286 Fixierscheibe ? 13,r 530 / 1
297 s.haltsl:hPihp kol 131 528 / 1
288 Skalenscheibe ko1. ? 1it 560 / '1
2Rq Srhc i hc ? t1t 511 / 1
2q0 Gcwi ndehnlzen 2 {1t 5i5 / {
Soannhuelse 4x20 DIN 1481 000 552 / 1
2qt Ra PndP l qn hP i he 2 131 535/ 1
?q? Schalterolatte ? 171 5?7I I

2S3 Spnkqchnarrhp M16x?0 nTN 7qq1 2 n?5a5/ ?
zqa HPihPnonenTtasten ? 068 350 / I
Tvl.Schnaube M6x25 DIN 912 00? 8s5 I 4
GPHi nrlPsti ft Msxl2 0TN ql4 oa2 aa7 I 1
Sgare parts lists o Fo 1d i ng mach i ne a
US - execution GBUNDMASCHINE.
0age
30
7 4 .20- 40 Abdeckungen und Hydnaulikzylinden kpl of page
Pos denomi nati on p age
7 4.20-40 7 4.20 7 4.25 74.30 74.40

ABNFCKIJNGFN
?0n lhdprkharrhp hi ntpn I i nkq 5 15i ool / I
!10 I Ahrlprkhauhe vorne links 5 155 007 / 1
302 tl-Bl pch 5 r55 0r2 / 1
?0? AhrlPrkhauhP nFnhts 5 1?,1 Aq / I

7vl Schnaube M6x10 DIN S12 001 467 / ?t
7vl Snhnarrhp MFxl6 niN ql2 ool 150 / 2
Scheibe A 6.4 St-Zn DIN 125 006 RR? / d
Vpnhlrs Schnauhp MFxl0 062 q72 I 4
7vl Snhnarhc M6x10 0IN q12 001 /67 / 6
304 Schrrtzhlenh l inks 5 131 4C6 / 1
305 Srhrrtrhlprh npchtq 5 n1 I

aq1 1
i06 5 11? 5q1 / 2

Pnn-Rlindnict 3 2 t3t 850 / 4
qpnkq.hnerhp MFx ln nTN 7qq1 n61 77A / 6
107 Gph pn ahdPr:k ilno 5 t32 hR6 / 1
108 Har rhe 5 tq\ nt1 / 2

ni ct inThilrhqp 177 I 2
7vl Snhnailhe M6x45 nIN 912 Â't
o1F2F.I ?
Scheibe B 6.4 ST DIN 125 000 68? / 2
309 Ahdpnkrrnn FilFhFunn nPchts 5 17? A67 I \
?,t0 lhrlPcklrno Fuphrnno links 5 t32 868 / I
9pnkschnarhp M6x20 nTN 7qq1 000 387 / 4
HYI]RAIJI IKTYLINDER KPL. 110 RR6 / 2

120 Hvdnarrlikzvlindpn 7
,ti0 887 / I
12t Snann s t inoe 7 130 897 / ?
7?2 qnpT Niltml'ftFn 7 11? 706 I ?
323 Qtrrpizschpihp /2v2 5 7 oqF. 272 I 2
72A 7vl i ndnnailf nihmek I ot7 7 130 Bq8 / r
lists
a Folding machine a
Spare pants
.\A
US - execution 7 4 .20-40
GHUNDMASCHINE:
p dge
J1
Hydnaulikzvlinden kpl. und Antniebseinheit of page
'ir 07.07.94 Schmit 47
oart's numben / number of pieces
Pos denomr nat i on psge
7 4 .20-44 74.20 7 4.25 74.30 74.40
?25 qn ennmr rt t pn 7 130 899 / 2

i26 Skt Schraube M16x100 DIN S33 7 oo5 7a? / t
?27 s.hpihp R 17 ST nfN |25 7 000 44c / t
12R TPIlPrfeder 34xt6.3x2 7 05r 551 / 4
12q H^l lPnahcl 7 r30 900 / I
330 /vi Schraube M10x40 DIN 6912 7 00q dR8 / 4
331 Tpl lpnfpdpn 20v10 2xl 5 7 tlq 113 / 24
ANTN T FRqF TNHF I T 131 ?34 / I

3d0 ll-Motnn 9 Kt{ 2 151 Rql / ,l
?dt Skt Schnauhp Ml2xi5 nTN qjj ? a02 438 / 4

1A? Fpdennino A12 DIN 127 ? 00r 1t? / 4
343 Mnt nn ehdprk t rnn ? r33 548 / t
vpnhus Schneuhp Mnv10 06? 972 / 2
?44 Hvdnaul i k-Pumoe ? 0q? H50 / r
?/5 TFntnipnnino ? 131 t8t / 1
?/6 Skt Sr:hnarthp M{2x100 nTN q31 001 6,t? / 2

347 l,nt en 1 eosc he i be ? 00? 5q2 / 2
?/R FPdpnninn A12 nIN 127 2 00,r ,t1? / 2
?/q Skt.Mr,tten M12 DIN S34 000 ?47 / ?

350 FlactiR.hp Krrnnlrno FQ7 2 093 857 / I
6eHindesti ft
AMbxl6 DIN 914 000 q48 / 2
?5t Anqrhlrrssf I ansch q l\1 764 I \
352 0-Rino 37.7x3.53 q 136 203 / I
Fpdonninn A'10 nTN 127 000 499 / 4
1{
7vl Snhnarrhp M10xi5 nTN gl2 nol 2\o I a

Gr rt i asvn-Sc h I ar rch 0q7 Rr'o / lm
SKF-Stahlhand g'nln 057 841 /0. 6m
I ln i -Snh I auchb i nden 057 B4? I ?

35.3 Fl ensrh c 135 007 / 1
Spane parts ljsts a Foldlng machine o
page
3?
7 4 .20- 40 Antriebseinheil, Tank kp1. und Steueneinheit kpi of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
Fant's numben / numben of pieces
7 4 .20-40 74.20 74 25 74.30 74.4Q
354 0-Hi no 28x3. 5 q 04r R?1 / .r.
Tvl.Schnaube M{0x35 0IN 912 001 ?a0 / A

FPdprnino Al0 nTN 127 000 lRq / l
355 F0-Venschnaubrrno GFI6SH q 00a A1\ / 1
TANK KPI
360 0e I tank 4 15i 766 / .r
?6t Blindstoot B-112 4 05t 003 / I

?62 0plarrnp M2Fv'l 5 4 008 953 / 2
Skt Mutten M26xl 5 nlN 80705 lqa qal I 2
?F? Iil{ifiltpr,+ Siph A 135 406 / I
364 Rrrecklauffi lten 4 1La07 I I
lFE cr0-T00-Patnone (Frsatzoatnonel
Mi A 't35 4oB / r
Skt Schnarrhc MBx20 nIN q?? 0n0 2?0 / 2
366 Schlauchtuelle 4 ocq 438 / t
7vl Srhnîlhp MFr2n nTN q12 001 4t? I ?
I inspnschnauhn MEv15 nIN 7q8s 001 5?2 / 6
Skt Milttpn M5 nTN q3d 001 q71 / 6
1F7 npvi qi nnqdprLal A 146 9?1 / 2
SKF-S}ahlhand Qmm n57 AAI 11 2n
tlNT-Schlarrchhi ndpn 057 BA? / A
STFIJFRFINHFTT KPI
1Rn HvdnailI i kqipilFnlrnn q 147 480 / |
?81 Mpssanschlrss q ti5 156 / I
i82 Strnmneoelventi I s 1i2 ?0(t / 1
Zvl.Schnaube MBx100 0IN 912 1?3 549 / ?

Fpdonninn lR nTN t27 000 618 / 4
7vl Schnîlhtr MRYFn nTN ql2 000 qal I 2
Spare parts lists a Folding machine o
US - execution GBUNDMASCHINE:
p age
33
7 4 .20- 4A Steueneinheit kpl. UND Antrieb 0benwange
of page
'* 07.07.94 Schmit 41
7 4 .2A-40 7 4.20 74.25 74.30 74.40
383 venschnauhuno nSVHt6-SR s ooa a36 I ?

1Fr' vPnsrhneilhrlno GF6-SH q 00r qtq / F
385 verschnauhilno nSVt{20-SR q ooa a?7 L
lF6 SrhlalrhtrrpllF q
'i1, a7c I I
387 Gummi -0elschlauch q 0q7 |40 / tm
lRR Vprsnhnarlhlrnn GFI 6-SH q oo4 t1\ / 2
38q Venschnauhuno GF8-l R q 00t qt{ / 1
3q0 Verschnaubuno T8-L s 054 344 I t

3qt Hvrlneul i k nnrrr:ksrhalt€r. q 115 irq / ,l
3S2 Aufsleckstutzen l6 q 005 366 / r

?q? VFrsnhnelrhilnn T16-S q 005 ?q5 / 1
iq4 Vcnsnhnarthuno GF'16-SH e I

fia{ at\ I
3S5 ljeberoanosstu tzenmu f fe I 006 575 / 'l
nF nqcp I sn hp i hF 1AA A71 I 1
Venschl rJss-Schnarrhc H1 /2" o7o BRq / I
ANTRIEB OBER}{ANGE 131 237 I 1
fi0 RrJcnksnhlaovcnti I q 111 10F' I ?

all Venschnaubuno DSVlil6-SR I 004 436 / 6
AI? Arrfstpiksttrtrpn 'lF q 005 ?66 / 4
413 Venschraubuno DSVI'I8-SR q o6a ??a / ?
aln VPncrhnalrhlrno GF'l 6-Sn cl ooa 41q I 2
{15 0rrrckbponpntttnosvent i l 111 llv I 2
4t6 Verschraubuno ll16-3 s a04 440 / 7
al7 VPnsrhnailhtlno FVhlt6-S q fiA7 0q7 I )
IIF Vpnqchnarrhrrno l{8-l q oca 7a7 I 2
dtq Vpnqthneilhilno GR-S q oo7 Rnq / I
A?O VPrschnalrhuno T16-S q 005 ?q5 / 1
a Folding machine a
Spane parts lists
US - execution GFUNDMASCHINE:
page
34
7 4 .20-40 Anlnieb Biegewange und Rohrbefestigung kpl of page
07.07,94 Schlnit 47
Pos denonrination 0age
7 4 .20-40 74.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

ANTRTFR RIFNF'hIANGF' 131 239 / I
4?n 0nphknlhpnrvlindpn 217 110 Aln I 2
7vl Srhnarthp M16xB0 nTN q12 oo2 qn1 / ?n
Ferlenn i no oon a6a I 12
a7l I lphpn0annssf ilt 7pnmilf f p lllphproanosstrrt zpn) q nEH Rlq / a
43? VenschnaUbuno DSVl{lE-SH q 00a ai6 I a
a?? Vpnst.hnirrhnnn T16-S q 008 ?q5 / 1
434 Aufsteckstutzen 16 q 005 366 / I

415 n.r rakhFonPnTr,nosvpnt i I q 1?1 \OA I 1
436 Venschnaubuno GE16-SH q 00a atF' I I

477 Venschnaubuno i{16-5 s 004 440 / A
43R VPnqchnarihrJnn FVttlI 6-S c 0R7 nq7 / ,l
HOI]HBFFFSTTGIING KPI t?1 t63 / I 1?? 16? / r 132 578 / I t33 526 / I
450 Hnhnsche l
'le
4 oo5 3,8? I ?
7vl Srhnîlhp Mnv?0 nIN q12 onl 72Q / a
Fpdpnnino AB nTN {27 ooo ,2q I a
Qrhl -Klpmmlpiqte nlR A67 / ,r
0a8 667 / 1 048 667 / I oaq 667 I ?
7vl SrhnailhF M5x16 nIN q12 005 5/0 / h
Fedennino A5 DIN 127 005 646 / 5
/5t nnhnha I tpn A oo7 20a / a oi7 zna / a 007 ?04 / 5 007 204 / 6
Skt Schnalhc Mflx35 nTN q3l 00t R05 / 6 001 Roh / 6 001 R05 / R nnt /
R05 .10
Fprlcnnino AB 000 61R / 6 000 618 / 6 00n 6t8 / R 000 6tR / 10

45? Hnhnha I t en 4 ti2 \7q / I
qki q.hnîlhP MRY20 nTN q?? 00n 2?0 / I
Fpdpnrino AB 000 fi{8 / I
Skt Schrauhe MBx35 OIN S33 lal ?10 / ?
Federn i no AB ooo 6JB / P
Spare pants lists
a Folding machine a
p dge
35
7 4 .20-40 0benwangenhalt 0-12mm und Fusstrittschalten of page
"i 07.07.9{ Schmit 47
pant's nutnben / number of Dieces
Pos denomi nat i on Da ge
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.?5 74.30 74.40
NRFRh'ANGFNHAI T O-I2MM
an0 7vl i ndpnsti ft 12x80 nIN 6325 l2 00, ?| ,t / ,l
/6t lnlenpqchpihp'12r2y' 1? 0a6 qlq / 7

a67 Otl-Brrchse MB1215 t? oq1 \4a / 2
d6? qtp l l Fi no 4 12 nTN 705 1? 057 ?t? / \
AEA lli one t? 11A 166 I 1
!F5 Tricchpnnlattp 1? 134 164 / I

466 Fndtasten 3SE3 120 1D I/ 086 995 / r
467 Zvl.Schnaube M5x55 DIN S12 12 oo7 -t61 I 2
d6R Vpnqfpl lnlattp 1i4 t63 / 1
d6q 7vl Schraube M6x30 DIN S12 t2 oo1 72q I 2

470 Dtl-Buchse M80610 12 06a 211 I ?
a-l I Tpl lpnfprlen t2x6 2x0 5 12 114 707 / B
A7? sichPnunosnino 6x0.7 nTN 47'l 12 oo1 767 /

a77 qkf Miltten MF nTN q1d nl(t 6a2 I ^
2
A7A GPri ndpstanoe l2 ,i'1,a tF\ I 1
Alq nnilrkst ilpak l2 1?,a|'7nl I

n76 llnphknnnf 12 107 610 / 1
477 Scha I tnocken t1a 171 / 1
.-€LI.SSTH TT TSIIHAI TFH

ftso 'll 0d5 56? / r
Spane pants lisls
a Foldlng machine a
US - execution ZUSATZEINRICIITUNG: MULTIBEND 2000 9000 / p age

36
7 4 .20- 40 Fuehnung kpl. und Antnieb & Messen kpl.
of page
07.07.94 Schmi t 47
pant's numben / numben of pieces
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.25 74.3A 74.40

FIIFHRUNG KPI . (aus Fahreinheitl ll4 tfa / 1
50n Fuehnuno 15 l|a 175 I 1
501 Snannhrtelsp l0xd0 nTN 'lI8l 15 oo2 h6q / .t
502 Skt.Schnaube M12x50 nTN q33 t5 001 565 / 2

50? Schpihp H 11 ST nTN 12h ,t5
000 26c / 2
504 IellPrfPrlen ?3x17 ? ,lh lne tQ / t2
t05 Skt.Schnaube Ml2x35 0IN 933 15 00? 438 / t
50fi IlntpnlPosnhPi he t5 003 592 / 1
ANTHIEB & MESSEN KPL. lrA 1A5 I 1
Et0 Mntnntnanopn IA 121 90A / I

5,t r Zvl.Schnaube M10x25 DIN S12 14 000 8c7 / 6
q12 FprlpnFinn tn nlN 7qR0 1A noo q26 / F
511 Snannhuelsc 6x10 nTN 1d81 14 001 14q I a
q1/ Glei chstnom-Servo-Mnton 14 123 3A4 / I
5t5 F l ens.h 1A 12n qaq / I
5t6 7vl .Schnaube MBx25 0IN 912 IA 000 3s5 / 4
5t7 FAdpnnind AH nTN 127 IA 000 F|R / ,12
5r8 7vl Schnarthp MBx'150 nTN q12 IA l?? 108 I a

51S Skt Mutter MB DIN q34 l4 000 03r / 4
520 Sichenunosnino 40x1.75 DIN 472 t4 057 996 / I
qi upt 7 srhF i hp 2Fx2 nTN qRR 1t 047 081 / 2
^21
n22 Kpnplnnl lpn laopr llxAO 1A n5? ?qq / 2
523 Nilosrino 30203 AV 14 064 890 / 2
\2A lli qtanzni nn 1t |5R 005 / 1
525 Nrrtmrtten M17x1 IA 11A \AA I 1
Snannhuelsp 3x16 nIN l48t l4 lal 757 / 1
526 Krrnnrrno l9/24 All

f 1A r14 r?h / {
5?7 SnannhilPlsc 6x40 nTN 1481 1t 000 01a / ,l
528 Kuoclr0l I enulnlauf s0 i nr,el E Fi nf achsn i nrle lmrltten 14 113 770 I 1

;aF-*
.. !.
Spare parts lists a Fo ldi ng machi ne a
)-7
US - execution / 0 dge
.) I
7 4 20-40 ZUSATZE INRICI.ITUNG.
Antrieb & Messen kpl
MULTiBEND 2O()O
und Schl i tten kpl .
9OOO
of
{i* 07.07.94 Schmit
Dage
47
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.?5 7 4.30 7 4.40

52q Milttpr.f l enqrh nn 1A 11A lgA I 1
510 Schnipnknnf F nIN ?102 ,A 000,164 / I

5?t 7vl Qrhnerthp Mhy'lF nIN ql2 IA ooq I a
532 Fertenrino A5 nTN 127 14 005 âo
5d6 / 4
5',13 KrrriFl srhF i hF CR 4 nIN 6?1q {d oTfi aa6 / A
ilr' Keoplnfannp nq 6 nTN 6i1q IA 071 487 / a

535 Skt.Mutten MB DIN C34 t{ 000 031 / 5
h36 Snindpl lanpn 14 11t lql I ,l
537 IA t58 433 / 1
5?R qkt qnhnanhP MRy20 nTN q?? 1l c|00?70 I 2

53q Bi I lenkuoel laoPn '17x40 IA 049 1?3 I I
5!0 qnidpY-Kilnnlilno A l5 1A lla 177 / I
Snannhrrplse ?x2d nTN ,l481 000 r33 / 2
qt1 Tmnil l qnFhpn 1i 11A \?R I 1
7v'l SnhnarhP M5x16 nIN q12 oo5 s4o / 4

7vl -Schnauhp M4x20 nTN 84 no, l2t / 2
KahpIhinrlpr 110 47A 795 / 5
SNHI TTTFN KPI

550 Schlitten t6 ltaloq/ 1
551 La oerbo I zen t5 lta 1?0 I ?

5h2 Snannhrrplqp FxF0 nIN 1d81 {5 003 546 / 2
553 Ri I lenkuoel laoer 30x55 15 006 ?n5 / 12 ,n
564 Strrpfzqchpihp ?0v2 E t5 na1 077 I ?0

65E SinhPnllnosrino ?0xl I nIN 471 t5 000 436 / 18
556 I aoerbolzen 1q 11A IOA I 2
557 I enpnnlittp t5 11A ?11 I A
558 7vl Schnauhe MBx20 niN 912 ,t5 oot a12 I A
55q Fpdp^nino AB nTN 127 15 00n 618 / I

5h0 SrhpihPRd nTN734q t5 0A6 777 I 8
Spare pants ljsts
a Folding machine a
US - execution ZUSATZEINRICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2OOO / 9OOO

0 age
3B
7 4 .20-40 Schli tten kpl. und Endtasten-Anschlag kpl. of page
pant's numben / numben of pieces
Pos denoni nat i on page
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

561 Snannhrrelsc 6xl6 DTN l4B1 ,t5 0n0 188 / R
5n2 I aoPrsrht{inoe t5 l\a |1fr I ?

563 I aoerschwi noe t5 1\A l1Q I 2
564 7vl qrhnarrhp MFx'16 nTN q12 ,t5 001 'lh0 / rt
5F5 7r ro f Pdpn t5 1ta 13t / 2

566 I aopnhnlzen It 1r4 1?1 / ?
567 7vl .Schnaube MBx70 0IN S12 15 059 780 / 2
568 Skt Mutter MB DIN 934 ,t5 00n 0?1 / 4
5Fq TFllPnferlPn l5xF 2x0 I t5 045 625 / 36
570 Geni ndest i ft
AMBX3S DIN S15 15 1ss 365 / 2
57t Snannhrrplsp 8x50 nTN td81 15 fio2 644 / 4
51? Scha ltr i nk e I t5 ,1A ?1? / 1
ski Schnailbe M6x15 nTN qi3 oal 791 / ?

Fedennino AB UIN 127 oon 12a / )
573 Qch:ltrinkpl t5 tla a00 I 1
\74 Ahqtnp i fPn t5 117 ?A5 / ?

575 skt schnalJbe M6x'15 nIN 933 15 001 791 I ?
576 scheibe B 6.4 ST nTN 125 ,t5 000 6R1 / d
5R5 Ffpctnr M12xl Gl t5 roc 5BB / 1
GrenTtaster ltal?al ?
546 Endsc ha 1 t enk 1o tz {5 ra?1a / 1
5R7 Skt Schnaube M6x70 DIN 933 15 051 246 / |

5BR Skalenschei be ,t5 l\a 211 I 1
hRq 7vl indPnsti ft 8m6x80 nIN 7 ,t5 000 c45 / t

Tvlindersti fl 6m6x14 nIN 7 00n ?qq / I
qqn nnr rrk f pdpn t5 ooq 6a? / I
5q,l 15 1ln ioo / 1
5q2 skt schnarrhe M6xl2 nIN 933 15 000 985 / 2

6q? Fpdpnnino AF nTN 127 15 000 12q I a
--_".--.-"\
parts lists
Spare
US - executlon ZUSATZEINRICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2OOO / 9OOO
p age
39
7 4 .20-40 Sonst i ges zur Fahne i nhe i t, Bahmen kp I . und AbstueLzung kp l of page
47
pant's number / number of pieces
Pos denoni nat i on pa9e
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

qNNqTTGFS TIIN FAHPFTNHFTT
F00 Klpmmenkasten 1A lla 4q / I
F0t F1 Mannptvpntil ?/2 lt 1a) 697 / 2
Flachkoofschraube M3x30 DIN 85 073 717 / 4
SnhwenkvPnschrauhuno M5 PK-4 oqa ola I a
VPPtei lerstueck 133 083 / {
llichrino 0-M5 PVC 105 hl8 / 4
RAHMFN KpL. (aus Komolettieneinheit) 134574 / 1 134 075 / I 131 154 I I ilt {qr' / I
610 16 115 055 / ,t

l1a oqz / 1 127 A7? / 1 1?7 A?? / 1
61,1 AilfnahllleholTen t6 111 157 I ?

Fl2 Hn I zpn t6 11A 10? / 2
613 sichenunosrino 16x1 DIN 471 t6 ooo 825 / 4
6tr KahelrinnP 16 il5o5q/ I 11a a65 / 1 117 0?7 / 1
,i17 0?7 / I
Venbus-SchPaube M6x10 oF? q72 / 7 n?q72 / a oF? q7? / a 06? 97? / A
Ft5 lilinkPl links ,t6 l1R Rq2 / I

E{h llinkel nechts 16 1?1 954 / I
Tvl Schnaube M6x16 DIN 912 001 150 / B
qrhpihpRnIST nTN125 OOO FR? / R
Skt Mutter M5 DIN 934 000 682 / I

ABSTIIFTTIING KPI {3,t r55 / 1
620 Aufnahmewi nkel t6 13t 158 / 2

62t Srhpihp 1? nlN 734q t6 086 77q / I
67) Skt Schnaube M12x35 DIN 933 t6 002 438 / B
523 (nannhrrplqp ,l0xy'O nIN l/81 t6 002 56q / 4
6?A 7vl schnalthP M't0x20 nTN 912 t6 ool 5?5 / ?

625 Haltewinkei 16 1?{ 15q I 2
fi26 srhpihP B 10 5 ST DIN ,l25 16 000 03H / I
627 skt Schnauhe M10x35 []IN 933 16 00? 184 / B
o Fo 1d i ng mach i ne a
Spare parts lists
US - executron ZUSATZEiNRiCHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2000 / 9000 p age
40
RAS 7 4 .20-40 Abstuetzung kpl., Anschlagtnaegen kpl. und Pneumatik kpl of pase
07.07.94 Schmit 47
Fant's numben / numben of pieces
Pos denoni nat i on pdge
7 4 .20-40 74.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

62R Snannhrrclse 10x40 nIN ,l481 16 002 56q / 4
62q Si r rpt zp l6 u7029 I ?
610 llrrtrkhni zen 16 114 094 I ?
63r Skt.Mutten M12 DIN S34 16 000 247 / 2
F?2 qi rhpnilnost.li nkpl t6 11R Inr? 2
VPnhrs-Schnalrhe MBx t0 062 97? I 4
Soannhuelse 4x45 OIN 1481 ooa aq7 / ?
ANSCHI AGTRAFGFR KPI !18 0q8 / I 118 104 I I 1t4 6?A / 1 11A 620 I I
640 Ansc h I ao tn aeoen 16 127 \5A / I \27 Ft1 I r 127 A12 / t 127 d?2 f I
64t 7vi Srhnarrhp M1OxEE nTN q12 16 007 571 / A
FAz FFdPrnino t0 nTN 7q80 16 000 q25 / 4

64? l(poclstift 10x50 nIN 7978 t6 00A 687 / 4
644 Be taet i ounoso es t aenoe {6 lal ac1 I 2 ldr 00q / 2 I
lal' n1\ ? ,a1 nlq I )
7vl qrhn^nhp MFy/n nTN q12 o04 6?a I 18 ooa 6?a / ?2 ooa /
62i 2a ooa 62a I ?a
SnhPihPR64ST nIN125 000 683 / l8 nno FR? / 22 000 683 / 24 000 683 / 24
6/5 Glpitstnci fen ,t6 t1t 6q7 I a
Fnn-Rlindnipt ? 2 oal lAA / n
6r'6 Rl at i fPdPn 16 rar oio / ra 141 0r6 / 20 14t 016 / ?? 141 016 / ?2
7vl Schnaubp M5x10 DIN 912 002 657 ,/ 36 oo? 657 / AO oo) 6\7 / aa no2 Rq7 I aa
PNFIJMATTK KPI . t1a 6)1 / 1
6q0 (lnir t4 1t7 043 / 2

65,t 7vl Schnauhe M6x40 DiN 912 1A ooa 62a I a
65p FederninoA6 DiN127 14 000 t2q / I
6q? 7vl Schnarrhp M6x16 0TN q12 14 001 150 / 4
554 I aoerbock 1A ioz75o/ 2
F55 Pnprrmet ikTvl indpr FSN 20-25 P 14 114 6n9 I 2
656 6ahelkoof SG M8 td 10? 1aq I 2
Spare pants lists
US - execution ZUSATZEINFICHTUNG: MULTIBEND 2()OO / 9OOO
page
4T
7 4 .20- 40 Pneumatik kp1., Tischbleche kp1. und Impulsgeben BW kpl of page
ri: 07.07.94 Schnit 47
oant's nutnber / number of pieces
7 4.24-40 74.20 74.25 74.30 74.40
GF VPrsnhnauhuno l/8"'4 or'q 6?1 / ?

657 Kunststof f schlauch PL-4 1t 04q 632 / 4m
HFn NinnPl 1lA"t1/A' o/n 6R6 / I

658 l'{artunose i nhe i t Rt /4 " 14 oai 170 I \
0irhtninn 0-llr'" n/0 5R8 / 2
Dichtrino 0-1/8" ndo 58q / ,
Schwenkvenschnaubuno M5 PK-4 1qa a14 / \
ANSTIHI AI;FTNHFTT t2s 083 / I 129 083 / 10 r2q 0R? / 1r {2q 0R? / il
670 Anschlaoei nhei t la 1?'2qlol 1
fi7,1 7vl Snhnarhp MBx20 nTN q12 17 001 2Rq / ,l
61? 7vl.Schnaube M6x30 UIN S12 17 001 7?q / I

673 ski..Schnaube M5x65 nTN 933 17 1A? l?5 / I
674 nnllakhDplqp lano 111 o1,a I 1
675 Skt.Schraube M5x40 nTN 931 11 14? 12? I 1
676 Ski Mrrttpn M5 nTN q1/ 17 001 973 / ?
TTSI]HBI FI]HF KPI 1a7 707. / I 1?7 loa / 1 137 70n / I 137 70a I I
680 u-Blech 56lllln l1 1A0 qnq / 7
FRI ll-Rlprh l06mm a1
140 890 / 1
6R2 ll-Blpch 206mm 17 1AO Aq) / ?

683 u-Blech 306mm 140 BS3 / 3
68? tl-BlPnh 341mm 17 1A0 Rq6 / 4
683 tl-8lech 396mm 17 lAO Aq7 I \ 1d0 Rq7 / 5
6H4 BI ech tr aeoen 17 127 609 / I 127 616 I I 127 A?6 / I 127 4?6 I 1
6F5 HlprhinapoFn knl 17 1a1 \aq I 1 141 a50 / t 141 551 / r i4! 551 / I
685 TYl.Schnauhe M6x20 DIN 912 11 001 289 / l0 nn1 zqq I 1A n0{ 2Rq / lR 00r 28q / 1R
6F7 0i stanrschp i hp ,7 nOq q12 / r0 00q qr2 / lr' 00q cr2 / {8 nnq qr2 / ,tF
$
c Folding machine a
Spane parts Iists
US - executron ZUSATZEINRICHTUNG. MULTIBEND 2OOO 9OOO / p a9e
4?
7 4 .20-40 Tischbleche kp1., Impulsgeber Biegewange kp1. und Steuerung of page
07.07.94 Schmit 47
Pos denolni nat i on page
7 4.20-40 74.20 7 4.25 74.30 74.40
fiRR Qkt Mrrltpn MF nTN qil l7 000 582 / {0 000 682 / 1/ 0n0 682 / 18 000 6R2 / lR
6Rq St:hilt7h lp.h t7 1A3 385 / ? in1 aqa / 2 1A3 385 / 1 r43 385 / {
6S0 (rhrttzhlpeh 17 1/? lRR / I !a1 ?RR / 1
nqt fli stenThilFl sp 17 1/3?ql / 4

6q2 Senkschnaube Mhx45 niN 79S1 t7 ,^2 70l' / A
-Sfnpi fpn 20r2

Grrmmi 062 R,r6 /i 5m
IMPULSGEBER BIEGEWANGE KPL. (MULTIBEND 9OOO) 11A A7A I I Nrrn Mlll TIRFND q000 |
70n I 11? 575 I I

7vl SchraubP Mdxl0 0IN 912 ll7 qR7 / ?
Fpdpnn i nn Ay' nTN 'l 27 00r 665 / 2
70t Indukt i v-Naehnunosscha lten I la2 oaq / I
7n) qkt Mlritpn Mn nTN 4?q I 00r 06t / 2
70? Skf Schnarrhp M6xdF nTN q31 B 0a9 907 I ?
704 Skt Mrrlten M6 DTN S34 c ooo RA) I )
705 Getlersche i he R l72 a'76 I I
706 GpHinrlPsti ff AMFyln nlN q15 H 043 975 / 1
SCHAI TST.HRANK RFNIFNKASTFN UNO STFUERUNG

720 Schal tschrank 6 r17 qq6 / r
721 Bed ienunoskasten {3 t3! 515 / r Nrrn Mtlt TTBFNII 2000 I
722 RFdi pnilnnskastPn 13 'rsc 208 / 1 Nrn Mlll TTRFNfl q000 |
7?3 Kist pn 1? r5R fi5? / I Nun Mt,l TfBFNfl q000 !
724 BlendenHi nkel t3 rq8 66d / t Nun Mu[ TIBEND S000 !
725 Blende Leistuno '13 r58 552 / I Nrn Mlll TTRFNfl q000 |
Rpd i pnr rnoqh I pndF t3 134 41? I I Nun Mlll TIHFND 2000 I
727 Bedi enunoshlende

,t? /
lEfl fiqr 1 Nnn MtJl TIEFND C000 I
72R Gri ff 13 114 581 I 1 Niln Mlll TTRFNn 2000 |
7?q tuif f t? rhg 71q / 1 Nrrr lltJl TTBFNn 9000 !

Spare parts lists o Fo 1d i ng mach i ne o
US - execution ZUSATZEINRICHTUI{G: l',lULTIBEND 2000 / 9000

p dge
43
7 4 .20 -40 Galgen kp1. und Hydn.-014-Panallel (9000)
of page
't 07 t 47
denomi nat i on page
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 7 4.25 74.3A 74.4A
GAI GEN KPL.

7AO ,l?
131 1B? / 1
11, Lame I 1 en-Kaooe t3 1?t ai1 / ?

7A2 Sirhpnunosrino 70r2 5 nTN d7l .t?
003 643 / r
Po I v-llnr ckst uec k 106 127 / ?
Genindestift AMBXl6 0IN S15 043 916 / ?
Snannhrrplse 5x28 nTN ,l481 040 482 / 2
Soannhuelse 5x24 UIN 148'l 000 755 / r
7A? Sicherunosnino 50x2 DIN 471 t3 000 763 / 1
7AA Iel I enfedpn 7{ 5x50 5 ,t1

114 608 I 2
7Aq Anlaufschei be 52x78 t3 07q 865 / I
Tvlinrlcnctift 8n6x20 nIN 7 ool all / 2
746 Stellrino t? 1?7 aF2 I I
7A7 Stellrino A70 t]IN 705 t3 003 663 / I
7vl Schnaube MBx12 nTN qt2 oo8 E1o / P
Zvl.Schnaube M10x30 nIN 912 00, t}a / I

Skt MuttPn M'10 nTN q?l onn n?q / {
748 I aufscheibe I 55070 1l o7q A70 I 1
HYDHAULIK-OBEHWANGE-PARALLEL (MULTIBEND SOOO} 147 485 / I Nun MULTIBEND 9OOO !
755 Tusaizsteuenhlnck t0 1A7 nql / 4
766 Aufsteckstutzen 15 t0 005 356 / r

R0hnstutTen-VenschnauhUn0 205'l 6R1 006 567 / 2
Venschluss-Verschraubuno R112" DIN S10 005 sr() / 'l
flichlnino A. )2v27 nTN 76n? 060 504 / 1
757 VPnschnauhilno l.l{ 65 ooa aao I 2

S0ane pants lists
o Fo 1d i ng mach i ne a
US - execution ZUSATZEINRICHIUNG: MULTIBEND 2000 9000 / page

44
7 4 .20-40 Untenwangenvenstellung motonisch und 0benwangen-Halt 25mm
of page
21.04.92 Schnlit 47
Pss denolnr nat i on Da9e
7 4 .20-40 7 4.20 74.25 74.30 74.40

IINTFNHANGFNVFNSTFI I IING MNTORTSIIH
7F0 StFl lrPl le 1R tl? 116 / {
7Bt PassfPdPn ABxTYh0 nTN 68R5 IH oon RH2 / I
782 SnhPihP 10 5 nTN 734q IB 086 778 / 2
7fi? skt.MlJtten M10 UIN 934 1n 00n n?q / 1
7na Skt Srhnauhe M{0x45 nIN qil IR ooa 5c|? I 1
785 Au f steckoetn i ebemotor ,IR 15/ qq8 / t

786 Scheibe B 6.4 ST t)IN 125 ,t8 000 6Bi / 5 Nrrn Mlll TIBFNn 2000 |
747 Skf Schnarrhe M6x{6 nIN q33 1R 001 791 / 2

788 Halteilinkei IR 1?? ?5A / I
7nq IR 133 54?/ I
7q0 7vl Srhnarrbe M6x10 DIN 912 {B oo1 a7 / 7
7qt GPUi nrleholTPn 1R 1?8 d5q / ? Nrin UlJl TIRFNn q000 |
79? Di stanzhuelse IR lln d60 / ?

7q? Skt Mrrltcn M5 nIN C34 1B 001 s73 / 3
7qa Snheihe B 5.3 ST UIN 125 1R 00r q76 / ?
7q5 Halteolatte IR I?aa61 I 1
7q6 Halipn IB 118 51A I 1
797 qrhaihpH6lST nTN125 IB 000 68? / 2

7qR 7vl Schnarrhe M6xl0 niN ql2 18 001 7?9 / 2
7qq Tnd[ktivschaiten ,IR 1?'2 202 / |
800 Gebensche i be 1B 47A 515 / 1
Nptzanschlrrssdnse 050 223 / I

I insenschnaube M4x10 DIN 7385 o01 e?a I ?
OBFRI{ANGFN-HAI T 25MM dSGHAO

8t0 St PilPrnockenha I tcn 1q 162 q46
/ t
8'll Hi lti-Geliindebolzen tq $aq6a I ?
81? ski Milttpn Mg nIN 93/ rg 000 031 / 6
Rr1 ScheihPBS4St nTN125 rq ooo 666 / ?
*- o' -, -U
Spare parts lists
US - execulion ZUSATZEINR]CHTUNG: MULTiBEND 90OO

0 age
45
7 4 .20-40 0benwangen-Halt 25mm und Messeinnichtung 0benwange links und nechts of page
.1!. 07.07.94 Schmit 47
0ant's numben / number of pieces
7 4.20-44 7 4.20 74.25 74.30 7 4.40
81! srhpihpR4 nTNTi4q 1q r|AFii7 I ?,
815 henorenztaster
F€ i 1q 06R 150 / I Nun MtJl TiBFNn 2000 I
R,t6 Skt Srhnarrhe Mhx25 nTN q33 tq ool aaq / 4

nr7 FFdprninnAF nlN127 .lq 000 1?9 / a
HIB 7vl indersti ft 6m6x24 DiN 7 tq ool 16) / 2
B{S Fp i nF i nq t F I I nnrk pn tq 153 653 / r
Skt Sfi ftschluPqsel 3 nTN ql1 005 6c0 / r
820 Fndtasten 3SE3 120 ln tq 086 qq5 / I Nun Mlll TIBFND q000 I
nl Tiii qr:hpnnl atip lq 11A tF,A I 1
R22 7vl Schnarrhe Mhx65 nTN q12 1g 11A t5S I 2

823 Nuten fbid tq t5i 6d8 / r
R)A qtprrpnnnakpn tq r53 652 / 1
825 Anzeioewinkel 1q t51 fi5n/ t

R26 Skt Schnailhp MBY20 nTN ql? 1q 000 230 / r
8?7 Scheibe 8.4 nIN 7349 tq oa6 'tl-t / 1
R2R 7vl indpnsti ft HmBr20 nTN 7 tq onl A,7 I )

82q Schal tahrleckrino rq tB2 qt7 / I
Scheibe 4.3x12 V t]IN 9021 '133551 / 1
Pnn-Bl i ndni pl d 102 490 / 1
MFSSFINRTCHTIING OBFRI{ANGF (Gemeinsame TEi IC) l2 Nun Mtll TIBFND 9000 !
860 Gehacusp 20 lAA 72n I I

85r QnhpihpFd nINT?dq 20 118 721 I ?
Rfi2 7vl Snhnarrhp MFx30 nIN q12 )tt 001 72a / 2
86i Dnehoehen Rnn 420 20 127 270 I I
Flachkoofschraube M3x16 DIN 85 002 tco / 3
fl64 Mpsct n nmmp 1 20 1AA 721 I 1
865 20 10a qg\ I 2

866 Me ss hand ?o laa 7?2 / I
i.

RAS Multibend 9000 Folding Machine Safety &amp; Operation Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAS Multibend 9000 Folding Machine Safety &amp; Operation Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

lc-;-t t € v

7032 SINDELfINEEN TEL. 0703 I -6 I 8-0 REINHARDT

SAFETY AND OPERATING

RAS 7 4.20-7 4,25-7 4.30-7 4.40

1 TECHNICAL DATA 1-1

2.2 CAUTION SYMBOL 2-1

2.3 GENERAL HMARDS IF SAFEry DIRECTIVES

2.4 SAFETY.CONSCIOUS OPERATION 2-3

2.5 OCCUPATIONAL SAFEW DIRECTIVES 24

3 RECEIVING INSPECTION, TRANSPORT,

3.2 TRANSPORT 3-2

3.3 CLEANING THE MACHINE 3€

3.5 FITTING THE REAR PLATE STOP 3-15

Februar 22, 1994 l-1 RAS 74.20-40

4.g CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL, CHANGTNG THE OIL,

4.3.2 CHANGING THE FILTER 4-6

4.4 REPLACING THE FILTER MAT +7

4.6 GENERAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION 4€

5.2 MAINS CONNECTION

5.3.1 FUNCTION OF THE FOOT SWITCH 5-7

RAS 74.20.40 l-2 S€ptemb€r 7, 1993

6.2 WORKING DIRECTIVES 6€

6.2.1 FOLDING MATERIALS.OFDIFFFRENTI.ENGTHS 64

6.2.2 AUTOMATIC FOLDING SEQUENCE 6-5

6.2.4 BEND]NG CHEEK SETTING 6-8

6.2.5 LOWER CHEEK SETTING 6-10

6.2.6 SETTING VALUES FORTHE LOWER CHEEK

6.2,7 ADJUSTING PROGRAMMABLE LOWER CHEEK 6-13

6.2.8 IMPRESSIONBENDING 6-14

6.2.9 REPLACING THE RAIL 6-1 5 I

6.2.10 CORRECTING THE STOP DIMENSIONS 6-20

6.2.11 PARALLEL POSITION OFTHE STOP 6-21

7 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT 7-1

7.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL SYSTEM wlTH AUTOMATIC CLAMPING 74

7.2.2 FITTING AND REMOVING THE TOOLS 7-5

7.2.3 SCALE AT UPPER BEAM 7-8

'CNC-COLOURGRAPHIC-CONTROLLER MULTIBEND 9OOO-

-Refer to the separate rnanual-

Aplil 26, 1994 l-3 RAS 74.2G40

CRANE SUSPENSION WITHOUT REAR STOP

CRANE SUSPENSION WITH REAR STOP

CRANE SUSPENSION - STOP (2 sheets)

LEGEND OF SYMBOLS FOR THE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF BENDING SETTINGS

DRAWING . SWITCHGEAR CABINET RAS 74.20.40

PNEUMATIC PLAN WITH LIST OF EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONDITIONERS

LEGEND OF SYMBOLS FOR RATING PLATES

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SIEMENS SERVOMOTOR

SEPARATE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE

OPERATING INSTRUCTION FOR UNITEK ANALOGUE

RAS 74.20-40 l-4 SeptgmberT, 1993

RAS v4_20 7t1.30 74.40 I

Usefullength 80.3" 1 00" 126" 159.9"

Max. sheet thickness for -

and the 1.18" wide bending rail. I

Max. permitted sheet thicknesb

Min. permitted bending radius 1.25 x sheet thickn

Min. permitled inner shoulder

Max. opening width of the upper inches 15.75"

Regulating range of the bending inches 3.1str _

September 7, 19!13 1-l RAS 74.2G40

Connected ioad aPProx. KW

RAS Multibend 9000 Folding Machine Safety & Operation Instructions

RAS Multibend 9000 Folding Machine Safety & Operation Instructions